A new edition of Codex I: The Washington Pauline Manuscript 9781463240547, 1463240546

Citation preview

A New Edition of Codex I (016)

Texts and Studies

20 Series Editor H. A. G. Houghton

Editorial Board Jeff W. Childers Viktor Golinets Christina M. Kreinecker Alison G. Salvesen Peter J. Williams

Texts and Studies is a series of monographs devoted to the study of Biblical and Patristic texts. Maintaining the highest scholarly standards, the series includes critical editions, studies of primary sources, and analyses of textual traditions.

A New Edition of Codex I (016)

The Washington Pauline Manuscript

By

Justin J. Soderquist Thomas A. Wayment

gp 2019

Gorgias Press LLC, 954 River Road, Piscataway, NJ, 08854, USA www.gorgiaspress.com Copyright © 2019 by Gorgias Press LLC

All rights reserved under International and Pan-American Copyright Conventions. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, scanning or otherwise without the prior written permission of Gorgias Press LLC. ‫ܙ‬

1

2019

ISBN 978-1-4632-4054-7

ISSN 1935-6927

Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data A Cataloging-in-Publication Record is available from the Library of Congress. Printed in the United States of America

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Acknowledgements................................................................................ vii List of Plates ............................................................................................ ix Introduction .............................................................................................. 1 The Manuscript ............................................................................... 4 Date ................................................................................................... 8 Layout and Scribal Features ........................................................ 11 Nomina Sacra ................................................................................ 15 Other Scribal Tendencies............................................................. 15 Provenance: Immediate Origin ................................................... 20 Sanders’ Quest to Determine an Ancient Origin ..................... 22 Physical Character ......................................................................... 23 Variants ........................................................................................... 26 Selected Notable Variants............................................................ 27 Textual Affiliation ......................................................................... 35 About the Transcription .............................................................. 37 Observations on Working with Digital Images........................ 40 Transcription of Codex I ...................................................................... 43 ΠΡΟΣ ΚΟΡΙΝΘΙΟΥΣ Α ............................................................ 43 ΠΡΟΣ ΚΟΡΙΝΘΙΟΥΣ Β ............................................................ 50 ΠΡΟΣ ΓΑΛΑΤΑΣ ........................................................... 62 ΠΡΟΣ ΕΦΕΣΙΟΥΣ .......................................................... 67 ΠΡΟΣ ΦΙΛΙΠΠΙΣΙΟΥΣ ............................................................. 73 ΠΡΟΣ ΚΟΛΑΣΣΑΕΙΣ................................................................ 79 ΠΡΟΣ ΘΕΣΣΑΛΟΝΙΚΕΙΣ Α.................................................... 85 ΠΡΟΣ ΘΕΣΣΑΛΟΝΙΚΕΙΣ Β .................................................... 91 ΠΡΟΣ ΕΒΡΑΙΟΥΣ .......................................................... 94 ΠΡΟΣ ΤΙΜΟΘΕΟΝ Α.............................................................. 115 ΠΡΟΣ ΤΙΜΟΘΕΟΝ Β .............................................................. 121 ΠΡΟΣ ΤΙΤΟΝ ............................................................................. 126 ΠΡΟΣ ΦΙΛΗΜΟΝΑ ................................................................. 129 v

vi

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016)

Conclusion ............................................................................................ 131 Appendices............................................................................................ 133 Appendix 1: Terminal nu ........................................................... 133 Appendix 2: Line-ending or Terminal sigma .......................... 137 Appendix 3: Enlarged Letters with Ekthesis and Paragraphoi.. 140 Appendix 4: Nomina Sacra .......................................................... 143 Appendix 5: Textual Variants.................................................... 149 Appendix 6: Orthographic Differences................................... 154 Plates ...................................................................................................... 159 Bibliography .......................................................................................... 167 Subject Index ........................................................................................ 173 Author Index ........................................................................................ 175

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS I first became interested in the Freer manuscript of the letters of Paul while working as an assistant for Dr. Thomas Wayment at Brigham Young University. Over the years, he has progressed from being a teacher and employer to a close mentor and friend—always encouraging me and ready with a friendly word of advice. His dedication to thoughtful and meaningful scholarship has inspired me and countless others, to be sure. I’m honored to be his coauthor in this volume. It has also been my privilege to work with Dr. Kent Clarke at Trinity Western University, who graciously agreed to be my thesis advisor. His expertise and instruction in textual criticism were indispensable for me in what, in retrospect, turned out to be quite the ambitious undertaking. I’m grateful for the time I was able to learn from him, and even more so for his friendship and empathy while I was going through a couple of rough patches. I’m also very grateful to the many other professors and fellow students at both universities for the numerous thought-provoking discussions and shared insights. Most of all, I want to thank my family—especially my sweet Becky. She lifts me up and brings me joy and, together with the kids, is my inspiration and the reason behind everything good I try to do and be. She’s my all. Justin J. Soderquist I would like to thank the College of Humanities at Brigham Young University for the generous support that enabled me to hire student assistants who helped with source checking and proof reading the manuscript. Specifically, I would like to thank my student assistants Zak Gram, Sam Mitchell, and Erin Bendixson. I would also like to thank my colleagues in Classics and the warm reception I have received in the department of Comparative Arts and Letters.

viii

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016)

I would also like to thank Larry Hurtado, who years ago sparked an interest in me in the Freer manuscript collection. We would like to thank Hugh Houghton for his editorial suggestions and guidance during the submission process. He was always gracious in his criticisms and suggestions for emendation. We would also like to thank Brice Jones and the editorial team at Gorgias Press for the care and attention they have shown this project. They have combined to make this a delightful publication process. Thomas A. Wayment

LIST OF PLATES Plate # 1 (p. 159)

Contents Appearance of the Washington Manuscript of the Epistles of Paul When Found

2

A. 1 Corinthians 12:16 (folio 6) B. 1 Thessalonians 3:2–5 (folio 94)

3

A. 2 Thessalonians 1:1–3 (folio 100) B. 2 Thessalonians 1:10–11 (folio 101)

4

A. Hebrews 13:16–18 (folio 138 from Sanders) B. Hebrews 13:16–18 (folio 138 from modern color image set)

5

A. 1 Timothy 6:1–2 (folio 149 from Sanders) B. 1 Timothy 6:1–2 (folio 149 from modern color image set)

6

A. 2 Timothy 1:1–3 (folio 152 from Sanders) B. 2 Timothy 1:1–3 (folio 152 from modern color image set)

7

A. 2 Timothy 1:10–12 (folio 153 from Sanders) B. 2 Timothy 1:10–12 (folio 153 from modern color image set)

8

All Extant Titles in Codex I (016) – missing 1 Corinthians and Ephesians

(p. 160)

(p. 161)

(p. 162)

(p. 163)

(p. 164)

(p. 165)

(p. 166)

INTRODUCTION Initially esteemed as little more than a “blackened, decayed lump of parchment as hard and brittle on the exterior as glue,” the Washington manuscript (Codex I, 016) of the Epistles of Paul has proved to be an important witness to the text of the epistles, more than Sanders and others who saw the darkened lump of parchment originally expected.1 When Charles Lang Freer, a wealthy philanthropist and patron of the arts, purchased the manuscript from an Arab antiquities dealer in Egypt named Ali Arabi on December 19, 1906, neither party placed any real value on the damaged fragment. Its contents were unknown, and because of its “almost hopelessly decayed condition” it was simply thrown in with the purchase of 3 larger, more well-preserved manuscripts “rather because of its association with them than from any supposed value of its own.”2 The significance of the damaged document has since become quite clear, although it and the other biblical manuscripts in the Freer collection are deserving of much more scholarly attention than has been allotted them over the past century.3 1 Henry A. Sanders, The New Testament Manuscripts in the Freer Collection Part II: The Washington Manuscript of the Epistles of Paul (University of Michigan Studies, Humanistic Series 9/2; New York: Macmillan, 1918), 251. This volume represented the editio princeps. See Plate VI (page xi) for an image showing the appearance of the manuscript when found (reproduced in this edition as plate 1). 2 Sanders, Epistles of Paul, 251. 3 In his introduction to a recent collection of studies compiled in honor of the 100-year anniversary of Freer’s original 1906 purchase of four of these manuscripts, Larry W. Hurtado indicates that “although they initially generated enormous popular and scholarly excitement internationally

2

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016)

In addition to acquiring these invaluable manuscripts, Freer demonstrated his generosity and patronage by funding not only their transcription and publication, but also additional trips to Egypt that were organized in an effort to both obtain further information regarding the provenance of the documents as well as to secure, if possible, any additional manuscripts which may have also been associated with those previously purchased.4 Freer even made arrangements for his entire collection of art (including the manuscripts) to be donated to the Smithsonian in Washington DC after his death, and he provided the capital necessary to build a structure in which to house it—now known as the Freer Gallery of Art.5 As for the labor of transcription and publication, he made arrangements via his at the time of their acquisition and publication in the early twentieth century, in the subsequent decades they have received only sporadic serious attention from biblical scholars, and the general public today scarcely knows of them.” He goes on to postulate a possible reason for this scholarly neglect in that they were likely eclipsed by the discoveries several decades later of a number of other important biblical manuscripts such as those found in the Chester Beatty and Bodmer collections as well as the Dead Sea Scrolls. See Larry W. Hurtado, The Freer Biblical Manuscripts: Fresh Studies of an American Treasure Trove (ed. Larry W. Hurtado; SBL Text-Critical Studies 6; Atlanta: Society of Biblical Literature, 2006), 1–15 (especially pages 1–2). 4 Freer also occasionally tasked others to purchase manuscripts and other items in his absence. In this way he was able to add to his collection both a 5th century Coptic codex of the Psalms in 1908, as well as a fragmentary 3rd century Greek version of the Minor Prophets in 1916. For a much more comprehensive account of the details surrounding Freer’s history, various acquisitions, and other endeavors, see Kent D. Clarke, “Paleography and Philanthropy: Charles Lang Freer and His Acquisition of the ‘Freer Biblical Manuscripts,’” in The Freer Biblical Manuscripts: Fresh Studies of an American Treasure Trove (ed. Larry W. Hurtado; SBL Text Critical Studies 6; Atlanta: Society of Biblical Literature, 2006), 17–73. 5 The gallery opened in May of 1923, a few years after Freer’s passing in September of 1919. It consists of approximately nine thousand items and stands as a witness of the fulfilment of Freer’s desire that the general public become the recipients of his collection. See Clarke, Paleography and Philanthropy, 24.

INTRODUCTION

3

friend Francis W. Kelsey, a professor of Latin literature at the University of Michigan, for the work to be carried out at the hand of the capable young scholar, Henry A. Sanders (then an assistant professor of Latin at the same institution). Sanders quickly proved himself worthy of the task and over the next twenty years he worked diligently to make the manuscripts available for study via scholarly articles, facsimile editions, and major monographic studies.6 Of the six biblical manuscripts in the Freer collection, the Gospels codex has clearly received the majority of scholarly interest.7 Comparatively little, in fact, has been afforded the Pauline codex (I) since the publication of its editio princeps by Sanders in 1918. This is probably, in large measure, because of the deteriorated condition of the manuscript as well as the lack of a facsimile edition.8 Fortunately, due to the combined efforts of the Society of Biblical Literature, the Freer Gallery of Art, and the Institute for the Study and Preservation of Ancient Religious Texts (ISPART) at Brigham Young University, a new set of high-definition color images of the Freer biblical manuscripts was created in 2002–2003.9 Due to what appears to be fairly severe water or fire damage that has caused significant deterioration of the manuscript, an additional set of images of the Pauline codex was created using multi-spectral imaging (MSI) technology with the

See Hurtado, The Freer Biblical Manuscripts, 3–4. Few studies have been carried out on Codex I, and it typically only appears briefly in catalogues of New Testament manuscripts. See J. K. Elliott, A Bibliography of Greek New Testament Manuscripts (3rd ed.; Leiden and Boston: Brill, 2015), 80–81. Additionally, for the publication of some images, see Michelle P. Brown ed., In the Beginning: Bibles Before the Year 1000 (Washington: Freer Gallery of Art and Arthur M. Sackler Gallery, Smithsonian, 2006), 261. 8 In his preface to the editio princeps, Sanders wrote, “Owing to the extreme discoloration of most of the fragments a facsimile edition is impracticable” (Sanders, Epistles of Paul, vii). This remains true today despite some modest improvements with a few of the MSI photographs. 9 Multi-spectral imaging projects carried out by Brigham Young University are now undertaken by the Ancient Textual Imaging Group. 6 7

4

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016)

hope of recovering text too dark or deteriorated to be seen otherwise.10 Based on these two image sets, we have sought to provide an update of the Pauline codex in the form of a new edition of the manuscript, offering both a fresh transcription and commentary for this valuable, albeit somewhat neglected, text. This has been done in order to increase the transparency and accessibility of Codex I. The raw data presented here, both through the transcription itself and the various tables and charts, will facilitate more specialized studies.

THE MANUSCRIPT The Washington manuscript of the Epistles of Paul is classified as Greek manuscript IV in the Freer Collection. It is currently housed at the Smithsonian Museum in Washington DC in the Freer Gallery of Art (catalogue number 06.275). Also known as Codex Freerianus, it has been given the Gregory-Aland designation 016 (or Codex I in the earlier system), the van Haelst number 507, and the von Soden number α1041. Additionally, it has been categorized as Trismegistos (TM) 61887, 3044 in the Leuven Database of Ancient Books, and given the Diktyon number 70838.11 Despite the fragmentary nature of Codex I, it is possible to determine the original size and content of the manuscript with some certainty. This is partially due to the estimated number of lines per 10 For an excellent overview of the process of applying multi-spectral imaging technology to manuscripts, see Stephen Bay et al., “Multi-Spectral Imaging vs. Monospectral Infrared Imaging,” ZPE 173 (2010): 211–17; and also Stephen Bay et al., “Exploring the Limitations and Advantages of Multi-Spectral Imaging in Papyrology: Darkened, Carbonized, and Palimpsest Papyri,” Digital Imaging of Ancient Textual Heritage: Technological Challenges and Solutions. Proceedings of the Εἰκονοποιία Conference 28–29 October 2010, Helsinki Finland (ed. Vesa Vahtikari et al.; Commentationes Humanarum Litterarum 129; Ekena: Societas Scientiarum Fennica, 2011), 87–97. Using MSI technology allows imaging at a wider range of light bandwidths. At times, this results in images which show a higher contrast between the ink and the substrate, thus making the text more easily legible. With respect to water damaged manuscripts like Codex I, the improvements in visibility are less significant. 11 https://www.trismegistos.org/ldab/text.php?quick=3044.

INTRODUCTION

5

page (30)12 and also in part to the survival of 10 quire numbers, including the last one (ΚΖ or 27).13 The extant quire numbers are located in the top right-hand corner of the first page of the individual quires. Sanders gives an overview of the quires as follows:14 Modern Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Ancient Number lost (16) ΙΖ (17) ΙΗ (18) ΙΘ (19) Κ (20) ΚΑ (21) ΚΒ (22) ΚΓ (23) ΚΔ (24) ΚΕ (25) Κς (26) ΚΖ (27)

Leaves Preserved 6 8 8 7 5 8 8 8 8 8 8 4

Leaves Lost 2 0 0 1 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Ms. Page Number lost 13 29 45 lost 69 85 101 117 133 149 165

As it now stands, the codex contains fragments of all of the letters of Paul except Romans (Hebrews follows 2 Thessalonians, and the Pastorals and Philemon follow Hebrews). Based on the amount of surviving text, Sanders estimated that the manuscript originally contained between 208 and 212 leaves, which would have allowed sufficient space for the inclusion of Acts, Romans, the missing two thirds of 1 Corinthians, as well as the Catholic Epistles.15 He concludes that “joined with the [manuscript] of the four gospels, found with it, it Sanders, Epistles of Paul, 255. For examples of the quire numbers, see plates 3b and 5. 14 Sanders, Epistles of Paul, 253. Corresponding Arabic numbers are provided in parentheses next to their Greek counterparts in the “Ancient Number” column for convenience and are not original to Sanders’ version of this table. Also, not original to Sanders’ version of the table is the fifth column which indicates the manuscript page number on which the quire number can be found in the transcription below (which follows the numbering of the fragments from Sanders’ edition). 15 See Sanders, Epistles of Paul, 252. 12 13

6

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016)

made a complete New Testament, which did not however contain Revelation.”16 Acts, Romans, and 1 Corinthians 1:1 through 10:28 would have occupied the first sixteen quires of the manuscript, based on the estimate that Acts would require approximately 8 quires. Sanders further estimated that the Catholic Epistles would have filled three quires at the end. His conclusion that the manuscript omitted the book of Revelation is based upon the conclusion that the fused clump of pages at the end of the manuscript was not large enough to include that book. It is likely that Revelation was absent from Codex I, but there is no definitive evidence to confirm its omission. Additionally, Sanders assumes that Codex I was organically connected with Codex Washingtonensis that contained the four gospels. That codex was bound with painted covers, and its textual association with Codex I remains unclear despite Sanders’ assertion. If the two manuscripts originated from the same location, then they may have been used by the same community, but there is no surviving evidence to indicate that they functioned as a single codex, and the covers of the gospels codex exclude the possibility that they were joined in a physical way. Little can be said with respect to the precise physical construction of the manuscript, whether it was reinforced with papyrus or parchment strips and sewed, and whether all of the quires were eight pages in length. In the surviving portion, all of the existing quires are eight pages in length. Two leaves in one quire are blank (pages 8–9), probably as a result of damage to the manuscript that makes the text no longer visible rather than omission: they would have contained portions of 1 Corinthians 13–14.17 Several quires are lacking pages as a result of damage to the manuscript during its history prior to being purchased by Charles Freer. The layout and design must have included larger blank spaces at the end of each Epistle, as the scribe started each new book with its own title at the top of the page, although the loss of the folio containing the beginning of Ephesians, the title of which was lost in the missing pages from quire 20 (Κ), Sanders, Epistles of Paul, 252. See Sanders, Epistles of Paul, 253. It ought to be noted that pages 8– 9 were not included in either of the image sets (neither color nor MSI) on which this edition is based, thus the illegibility of those pages remains unconfirmed. 16 17

INTRODUCTION

7

makes the evidence partially incomplete. No complete pages of the manuscript have survived, and every page has experienced decay and damage along all four of its edges. Additionally, the manuscript was less legible when the two new image sets were created in 2002–2003 than it was when Sanders completed his original edition in 1918. The following table represents the contents of Codex I in their entirety, with several additions and modifications from Sanders’ original edition. The gains in being able to read additional text have been limited mostly to alterations in the placement of bracketed text and letters that receive an underdot. In a few cases, parts of additional words have been added to the transcription, which has altered Sanders’ text by the addition and alteration of individual lines. What remains of Codex I contains all or part of the following New Testament verses: Book 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians

Galatians Ephesians Philippians Colossians 1 Thessalonians 2 Thessalonians

Verses 10:29; 11:9–10, 18–19, 26–27; 12:3–4, 16,18 27–28; 14:12–13, 22, 32–33; 15:3, 15, 27–28, 38–39, 49–50; 16:1–2, 12–13 1:1, 9, 16–17; 2:3–4, 14; 3:6–7, 16–18; 4:6–7, 16–17; 5:8–10, 17–19; 6:6–8, 16–17; 7:7–8, 13–14; 8:6–7, 14–17; 8:24–9:1; 9:7–8; 9:15–10:2; 10:8–10; 10:17– 11:2; 11:9–10, 20–21, 28–29; 12:6–7, 14–15; 13:1–2, 10–11 1:1–3, 11–13; 1:22–2:1; 2:8–9, 16–17; 3:6–8, 16–17, 24–28; 4:8–10, 20–23 2:15–18, 3:6–8, 17–20; 4:9–11, 17–19, 28–30; 5:6– 11, 20–24; 5:32–6:1; 6:10–12, 19–21 1:1–4, 11–13, 20–23, 2:1–3, 12–15, 25–27; 3:4–6, 13–17; 4:3–6, 13–15 1:1–4, 10–12, 20–22, 27–29; 2:7–9, 16–19; 3:5–8, 15–17; 3:25–4:2; 4:11–13 1:1–2, 9–10; 2:7–9, 14–16; 3:2–5, 11–13; 4:7–10; 4:16–5:1; 5:9–12, 23–27 1:1–3, 10–11; 2:5–8, 14–17; 3:8–10

This verse number differs from Sanders, who listed the contents of this fragment as verse 14, not 16. See discussion on the change in the footnote to page 6 of the transcription below. 18

8

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016) Hebrews

1 Timothy 2 Timothy Titus Philemon

1:1–3, 9–12; 2:4–7, 12–14; 3:4–6, 14–16; 4:3–6, 12– 14; 5:5–7; 6:1–3, 10–13; 6:20–7:2; 7:7–11, 18–20; 7:27–8:1; 8:7–9; 9:1–4, 9–11, 16–19, 25–27; 10:5–8, 16–18, 26–29, 35–38; 11:6–7, 12–15, 22–24, 31–33; 11:38–12:1; 12:7–9, 16–18, 25–27; 13:7–9, 16–18, 23–25 1:1–3, 10–13; 1:19–2:1; 2:9–13; 3:7–9; 4:1–3, 10–13; 5:5–9, 16–19; 6:1–2, 9–11, 17–19 1:1–3, 10–12; 2:2–5, 14–16, 22–24; 3:6–8; 3:16–4:1; 4:8–10, 18–20 1:1–3, 10–11; 2:4–6, 14–15; 3:8–9 1–3, 14–16

DATE The handwriting of Codex I suggests a date of either the fifth or sixth century. In an initial report appearing in a 1908 article, Sanders attributed the handwriting to the fifth century.19 Later in his introductory material to the 1910 Washington volume on Deuteronomy and Joshua (in which he points out many graphic similarities between that manuscript and Codex I) he narrowed his initial estimate slightly to the latter part of the fifth century.20 This may have been, in part, a response to the earlier dating of the handwriting proposed by Gregory and von Soden.21 By the time he finished transcribing the manuscript, however, he changed his view again and moved away from the earlier dating and instead affirmed the sixth century.22 Un-

19 Henry A. Sanders, “New Manuscripts of the Bible from Egypt,” AJA 12/1 (1908): 54. 20 Henry A. Sanders, The New Testament Manuscripts in the Freer Collection Part II: The Washington Manuscript of Deuteronomy and Joshua, (University of Michigan Studies, Humanistic Series; 8/1. New York: Macmillan, 1910), 12–13. 21 Caspar René Gregory, Das Freer-Logion (J. C. Hinrichs: Leipzig, 1908), 24; Caspar René Gregory, Die griechischen Handschriften des Neuen Testaments (J. C. Hinrichs: Leipzig, 1908), 33; Hermann Freiherr von Soden, Die Schriften des Neuen Testaments in ihrer ältesten erreichbaren Textgestalt (2 vols.; Berlin and Göttingen, 1902–13), 1:2147. 22 Sanders, Epistles of Paul, 255.

INTRODUCTION

9

fortunately no significant discussion was offered regarding the reason for his changing views for the date of the handwriting of Codex I, and we are left to assume that the variations are a direct result of the vagueness of paleographic dating in general. The handwriting is characteristic of a late well-refined biblical majuscule. Similar hands to this one include Codex Nitrius (R, 027) of the sixth century, Codex Ephraemi Rescriptus (C, 04) of the fifth century, and Codex Rossanensis (Σ, 042) from the sixth century. The handwriting is characterized by rather consistent bilinearity, with an overly enlarged phi and (occasionally) psi;23 the lengthened tails of both rho and upsilon;24 and also the inclusion of ornamental dots or serifs to the ends of letters such as gamma, delta, epsilon, zeta, kappa, xi, sigma, tau, upsilon, chi, and psi.25 The script quite closely resembles Cod.Vindob.Med.Gr.1 (Dioscurides, De materia medica) which according to Cavallo and Maehler “represents the constantinopolite type of the formal ‘biblical majuscule,” and they also observe that the Dioscurides fragment can be dated with some certainty to 513 A.D. or soon after.26 23 The size of the φ is often excessively exagerated, whereas the ψ only appears so on occasion. Granted, there are many more instances of φ than ψ, but sufficient examples remain to see that the φ is enlarged much more than the ψ throughout the manuscript. For examples of the φ, see plates 3, 5, and 7. For examples of the ψ, see plates 2b and 4. 24 The letters χ and ζ also have sublinear tails, though these are not as pronounced as those of ρ and υ. The downstrokes of both φ and ψ are also sublinear, in addition to supralinearly extending up to the bottom of the preceding line. 25 Bruce M. Metzger desribes the stylistic tendencies thus: “From about the fifth century A.D. the vertical strokes of writing became thicker and in ρ, υ, φ, and ψ longer, while the horizontal or sloping strokes of γ, δ, ε, ζ, κ, π, ς, and τ often acquired heavy dots or serifs at their ends.” Bruce M. Metzger, Manuscripts of the Greek Bible: An Introduction to Greek Palaeography (cor. ed.; New York: Oxford University Press, 1991), 24. 26 Guglielmo Cavallo and H. Maehler, Greek Bookhands of the Early Byzantine Period, A.D. 300–800 (Bulletin of the Institute of Classical Studies Supplement 47; London: University of London, 1987), 58. Describing the Dioscurides fragment, they further explain, “It therefore exemplifies the

10

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016)

The scribe made effective use of thick and thin strokes, particularly with those letters that contain a horizontal cross member or hasta. Additionally, the loop of alpha is rounded, omega is rounded and frequently flattened or lengthened, and serifs are used generously and consistently. The overall effect is that of a text produced by a professionally trained scribe. Although the manuscript is severely damaged, the surviving portion of the codex was written by a single individual. There are a few corrections, but they are infrequent and where possible to determine, they too are likely in the hand of the original scribe. Also of note is the fact the scribe used ekthesis, setting enlarged letters in the left margin to indicate chapter divisions or sense breaks. Metzger points out that forms of this trend can be seen as early as the first half of the third century, and as Metzger writes, “By the fifth century the scribe of Codex Alexandrinus used an enlarged letter conspicuously placed in the left-hand margin…[but] in later centuries scribes, disliking partially filled lines at the right-hand margin, would fill out the line with the opening words of the new paragraph, enlarging whatever letter happened to stand first in the following line.”27 The examples of ekthesis in Codex I are similar in form to stage which the ‘biblical majuscule’ had reached in its development at the beginning of the [sixth] century: very elaborate letter forms; the ends of horizontal lines and ascending diagonals as well as the ends of the curves of [epsilon] and [sigma] equipped with small ornamental squares or triangles; diagonals descending from the left are very thick, except in [nu] where the middle stroke is always thread-like; diagonals descending from right to left, however, are very slender, except in [zeta], where the middle stroke is well marked; the arms of [kappa] are detached from the vertical; the horizontal strokes of [delta] and [pi] are drawn out and have small knobs at the ends (in ‘biblical majuscule’, they occur already from the end of the [fifth] century but become more frequent later); the middle strokes of [mu] sometimes extend slightly below the baseline” (Cavallo and Maehler, Greek Bookhands, 58). For the most part, all of these peculiarities occur throughout Codex I, with the exception of the extended horizontal stroke and accompanying “knobs” (or serifs) of the pi. 27 Metzger, Manuscripts of the Greek Bible, 32. See further discussion on the usage of these incipits below.

INTRODUCTION

11

fifth-century practice, and it is the method employed most consistently throughout Codex I, although in some instances the line preceding the use of ekthesis was shortened and not carried out to the line’s end. The effect was to create a shorter line in the line preceding the ekthesis so that that sense break would be noted at the beginning of a line (see fragment 60). In most cases, however, ekthesis signals a sense break in the line on which it is employed or in the preceding line. Another relative indicator of the manuscript’s date is the form of the titles of the various epistles. Metzger writes, “In the oldest manuscripts of the Greek Bible the titles of the several books tend to be short and simple…. In later copies these titles became longer and more complex.”28 Throughout Codex I, the earlier, shorter forms of the letter titles are used (Πρὸς Κορινθίους Β, Πρὸς Γαλάτας, etc.) instead of the later versions which were generally expanded to include the name of Paul or the name of the author for the non-Pauline epistles.

LAYOUT AND SCRIBAL FEATURES The text of Codex I is written by a single scribe and there is very little in the manuscript that appears to be the work of a corrector.29 Little can be said with certain about the environment in which the manuscript was produced, whether it was commissioned by a church or owned by a wealthy patron. At Galatians there is a dramatic increase in the number of variant readings which are only attested in 28 Metzger, Manuscripts of the Greek Bible, 40. For examples of titles, see plates 3a, 6, and especially 8. 29 Sanders writes, “There are only two or three corrections by a second hand and these are not important. They seem contemporary and so are probably from the διορθωτης” (Sanders, Epistles of Paul, 258). See also Thomas A. Wayment, “The Scribal Characteristics of the Freer Pauline Codex,” in The Freer Biblical Manuscripts: Fresh Studies of an American Treasure Trove (ed. Larry W. Hurtado; SBL Text Critical Studies 6; Atlanta: Society of Biblical Literature, 2006), 253, where he indicates that the corrector’s “influence is minor and easily identifiable through paleographical analysis. The corrector, however, did not make any identifiable changes to the orthography of the manuscript based on the exemplar.”

12

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016)

this witness, which suggests that something changed in the copying process. Given that the scribe is the same throughout, the change may be attributed either to the quality of the Vorlage or some change in the copying process. It is clear that the scribe had an excellent understanding of Greek resulting in a very accurate manuscript with surprisingly few nonsense readings, an observation also affirmed in the earlier study of this text.30 The scribe wrote in a medium-sized square uncial hand and was an “exceptional penman,” creating a very consistent text which is easily read where the leaves are not overly damaged.31 Unfortunately, however, a large portion of the manuscript is badly damaged making the reading process much more difficult than one might hope. In such instances, the consistency of the scribe is quite helpful in determining the likely reading of the text based on the shape and spacing of letters. However, it ought to be noted that the scribe occasionally wrote smaller and more tightly spaced letters at the ends of lines in order to make the text fit into the column without extending too far into the margin. This was likely done, at least in part, in an attempt to adhere to the standard which Sanders observed according to which “words are divided at the ends of the lines according to rule and with considerable care. All the consonants that can be pronounced together go with the following vowel.”32 Knowing that the scribe is occasionally inconsistent in this manner at a line’s end, it is often difficult to ascertain with certainty the exact number of missing characters on those leaves which are damaged along the right and left-hand margins. To further complicate the problem of determining the readings (or, at least, the number of missing characters in lines where text has been lost) in the damaged right-margin areas of the manuscript, the scribe also seems to have been somewhat inconsistent when dealing with the terminal nu. Sanders observed that the scribe only employed Wayment, Scribal Characteristics, 255–59. Sanders, Epistles of Paul, 255. 32 Sanders, Epistles of Paul, 255. Sanders offers more specific details on how this was carried out, and he gives several examples. He also points out seven instances wherein the scribe failed to strictly follow this rule (Phil. 4:5; Hebr. 6:3; 7:20; 8:1; 10:8; Tit. 2:14). 30 31

INTRODUCTION

13

the terminal form (a horizontal stroke at the line’s end over the preceding vowel) in order to save space.33 On several occasions the terminal form was employed mid-word. Although this form was used quite frequently, there are many examples of nu at a line’s end where it is fully written out. In fact, throughout the surviving text the use of the terminal form only constitutes about half of the instances in which a line ends with a nu, thus conflicting with Sanders’ assertion that it was used to save space, as the surviving examples appear to be quite random. Appendix 1 provides a comprehensive look at the usage of the terminal form.34 The terminal form of the sigma (ς), like that of the nu, was only employed when a sigma fell at the end of a line, and even then, only on occasion. Otherwise the typical lunate sigma was used (which resembles the Latin “c”).35 Unlike the usage of the terminal nu, the scribe’s decision of whether or not to employ the terminal sigma was not related to the amount of space at a line’s end, since both forms of the sigma are relatively the same size. When a sigma fell at a line’s end, its terminal form was used roughly two-thirds of the time.

33

Sanders, Epistles of Paul, 256. For an example of the terminal nu, see

plate 5. 34 Perhaps it bears mentioning that due to the manuscript’s damage, almost every page lacks text that runs all the way to the right-hand margin. This is the case for the majority of the extant fragments which, themselves, only constitute about a third or less of each original page. As a result, it should be emphasized that any statistical analysis based on the information in Appendix 1 ought to be carried out quite conservatively and the results of any such analysis should be weighed in relative proportion. 35 The first three of the following examples depict the lunate sigma which is most regularly used; the last three, the terminal sigma (all samples were taken from the included plates—see specifically plates 3b, 6, and 7):

14

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016)

Whereas the terminal nu was employed mid-word on multiple occasions, the terminal sigma only occurs mid-word once. Appendix 2 provides a comprehensive account of its usage.36 The larger letters which appear in ekthesis, as noted above, are almost always accompanied by a supralinear stroke (or paragraphos).37 These combinations of enlarged letters with ekthesis and accompanying paragraphoi often, but not always, indicate a strong sense break. They are not employed consistently throughout the manuscript, and it has been difficult to detect a consistent pattern or type of usage. In many instances damage to the left-hand margin makes it difficult to determine frequency of usage. The enlarged letter is often the first letter of the new paragraph or sense unit, but this is not always the case. In each of the Pauline Epistles the first word is set off by ekthesis and a paragraphos, although this is not done in Titus (pg. 161). The text is difficult to read, and so it is possible that the scribe included the usual paragraphos, but ekthesis was not employed on this occasion. On multiple occasions the enlarged letter occurs mid-word, when the word in question is broken up between two lines (see examples in the table below for these verses: 2 Cor 15:19; Gal 4:22; Phil 2:13; Col 3:8, 4:2; 1 Thess 2:9, 4:9; Heb 6:3, 10:37; 1 Tim 5:19; 2 Tim 2:23, 4:1). In such instances, whatever letter happens to begin the line following a paragraph or sense unit division is thus enlarged and set out into the left-hand margin. In almost every instance, the enlarged letter itself represents a notable sense break in the text or signals a sense

36 The same caution mentioned in the footnote preceding the terminal nu table ought to be maintained when analyzing the information in Appendix 2 depicting the usage of the terminal sigma. The information in the table is only representative of a fraction of the original text and ought to be weighed accordingly. 37 See plates 2b, 3a, 4, and 6 for examples of incipits. The paragraphoi occurred approximately 1/8" or 3mm above the incipits which, themselves, varied somewhat in size.

INTRODUCTION

15

break in the previous line. Appendix 3 documents all occurrences of this phenomenon.38

NOMINA SACRA As was customary for a variety of early Christian texts, the scribe of Codex I employed nomina sacra for certain words.39 Twelve such nouns appear in the existing portion of Codex I and where they do, the expected forms of the nomina sacra are adopted. In one instance, πνευµατικαῖς is contracted to ΠΝΙΚΑΙΣ at Col 3:16, while πνεύµατα is represented as ΠΝΤΑ at 1 Cor 14:32 (in contrast to ΠΝΑ for the singular at 1 Thess 4:8; 5:23; 1 Tim 4:1). Appendix 4 records all the surviving examples of nomina sacra in the manuscript. Notably, there is once occurrence of the name Δαυίδ (Heb 11:32) that is written as a nomen sacrum, and three instances of σωτήρ (1 Tim 1:1; 4:10; 2 Tim 2:10) that are written as nomina sacra.

OTHER SCRIBAL TENDENCIES Several of the letters throughout the manuscript are written with ornamental dots or serifs on their horizontal or sloping strokes. Examples include gamma, delta, epsilon, zeta, kappa, xi, sigma, tau, upsilon, chi, and psi (the markings are somewhat less pronounced and/or less frequent for kappa, upsilon, and xi).40 The markings also occur on the horizontal strokes found in crosses or staurograms as-

38 The table reveals a potentially deceptive pattern in what remains of the text: the vast majority of occurences of the incipit set out into the margin are only found on even-numbered pages, since the left-hand margin is missing on so many of the odd-numbered ones. 39 Metzger, Manuscripts of the Greek Bible, 36. See also Larry W. Hurtado, The Earliest Christian Artifacts: Manuscripts and Christian Origins (Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2006), 95–134. For examples of the nomina sacra form, see plates 3a and 4–7. 40 Examples of all of these letters are shown here (samples were taken from the included plates):

16

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016)

sociated with the titles of each book, terminal nu, and above the nomina sacra. In addition, they can also be found in the paragraphoi located above the first letter of a line as well as in the decorative horizontal strokes which are written both above and below titles and quire numbers.41 The propensity of the scribe to include these serifs at either end of horizontal strokes proves somewhat problematic when seeking to identify the various diacritical marks found over certain vowels throughout the manuscript. In general, the mark above vowels takes the shape of either a short supralinear stroke or a double-dot (diaeresis/trema).42 Sanders proposed several additional shapes to portray the various notations that he included in his transcription.43 These, however, proved irregular and difficult to confirm, partly as a result of the significant transfer of ink from opposing pages and also the overall general legibility of the text in its current state, and thus throughout this edition the marks are divided into only two forms: a straight supralinear line and diaeresis.44 Even with this more simplified classification system, it was nearly impossible at times to discern between the two marks. This was due to the occasional faintness of the line’s cross stroke combined with the serifs at either end of the stroke, which would cause the mark to appear like a diaeresis rather than a line. At times the exact opposite would be the case—there would be a slight line coming from the right side of the left-hand dot of an apparent diaeresis which would cause it to look more like an Examples of these additional phenomena are shown here (taken from the included plates): 41

42 These two forms of the diacritical mark will be referred to as “macron” and “diaeresis” respectively due to their similar appearance, not because of any grammatical association with how the terms are currently used. For examples of diacritical marks, see plates 2b, 3b, 4–5, and 7. 43 See Sanders, Epistles of Paul, 257. The shapes he proposed were (approximately) as follows: –, , ··, ∟, and ᵓ. 44 See usage throughout the transcription below. In many instances diacritical marks were seen in both the color and MSI image sets (and thus included in this edition) where Sanders had recorded none.

INTRODUCTION

17

intentional straight line. This may have been caused by the lifting motion the scribe made while moving the pen from the left dot of the diaeresis to the right. Further, there were various occasions in which it was difficult to discern whether or not an alleged marking was really the work of the scribe or whether it was decay and/or bleed-through from the opposing page. As Sanders points out, the majority of these marks appear over the letters upsilon and iota, though they also occur over alpha, epsilon, eta, and omicron (albeit with much less frequency).45 As a general rule, this new addition adds additional supralinear notations rather than removes, which is likely a result of being able to zoom in on the photographs to help determine what was transfer of ink, and what markings were intentionally written. Another trend apparent throughout the manuscript is the scribe’s tendency to slightly alter the appearance of the tau depending on its location both on the page itself and in relation to other letters. When a tau appears along the left-hand margin of a page, the scribe tends to increase the length of the left side of the cross stroke (this also occurs occasionally with the cross stroke of the delta, but far less frequently). Also, when a tau is written before a curved letter such as epsilon, omicron, or omega, the serif, which generally appears on the right side of the cross stroke, is omitted, and most of the time the cross stroke actually runs into that following letter.46 As mentioned above, there are also times when the scribe would write small letters and squeeze them together tightly at the end of a line in Sanders, Epistles of Paul, 257. A few examples are shown here (taken from the included plates): 45

See plates 2b, 3b, 4-7 for examples. In the following examples, the first two images show taus on the left margin with elongated cross strokes, both of which also run into curved letters. The second two also show taus running into curved letters but they were not located on the left margin and, thus, have cross strokes of regular length. The last two show regular taus as the appear when they are not followed by curved letters as in the first two pairs of examples. All of these examples come from plate 2: 46

18

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016)

order to avoid writing into the right-hand margin while at the same time adhering to a general standard of how to split words between lines. In such instances, when a tau was one of the letters squeezed into the line’s ending it would generally appear taller than the adjacent letters so that its cross stroke could extend above them and thus take up less space.47 Titles throughout the manuscript occur (at least in part) for every extant book except for 1 Corinthians and Ephesians, in which cases the beginnings of the epistles (and their corresponding titles) are lost. They are generally written in light brown ink, whereas the main text is written in dark brown ink, with letters slightly smaller than those found in the main text.48 The scribe always decorated the titles with a series of short horizontal lines both above and below the text, identical in fashion to the quire numbers.49 The scribe also included staurograms or ornamental crosses along the outer margin of the page on the same line on which the titles are found. A short form of the titles (πρός followed by the name of the book) is employed throughout, which excludes the name of Paul. In one instance (on the title for 2 Timothy), a ligature is used for πρός, which thus resembles a staurogram. In this abbreviation, the cross stroke of the pi intersects the downstroke of the rho.50 A regular staurogram also appears on the same line, as per convention. The following table includes a list of all of the titles which occur in the manuscript, as well

47

The following examples are taken from plates 3b and 6:

See Sanders, Epistles of Paul, 256. See plates 3a, 6, and 8 for examples (see also plate 8, which contains a reproduction of all extant titles). 50 See Sanders, Epistles of Paul, 256. This is the ligature being described (taken from plate 6): 48 49

INTRODUCTION

19

as their corresponding folio page numbers as found in the transcription below, which follow the pagination of Sanders’ edition: 51 Book Title [Πρὸς Κορινθίους Α] † Προς Κοριν[θίους Β] Πρὸς Γαλάτας † [Πρὸς Ἐφεσίους] † Πρὸς Φιλιππισίους † Πρὸς Κολασσαείς † Πρὸς Θεσσαλονικε̣ί̣ς̣ Α̣ † Πρὸς Θεσσαλονικείς̣ Β̣ Πρὸς Ἐβραίους † † Πρὸς Τιµόθεον [Α] † † Τιµόθεον Β52 [Π]ρ̣ὸ̣ς̣ Τίτον † † Π̣ρ̣ὸς̣ ̣ Φ̣[ιλήµονα]

Manuscript Page Number lost (prior to page 1) 20 49 lost (prior to page 59) 70 80 90 100 105 140 152 161 166

The only punctuation used throughout Codex I is a middle dot. It almost always denotes a strong break (albeit in some cases not as strong as the ekthesis/paragraphos combinations mentioned earlier), though Sanders notes two exceptions to this: “It rarely equals a very weak division mark, like a comma, notably in Hebrews 11:32, where a succession of proper names is separated by punctuation marks, and at 1 Timothy 4:12, where a succession of prepositional phrases is so separated.”53 The middle dot is occasionally followed by a blank space, which ranges anywhere between one or two characters up to several words in length. For the most part, the longer space usually

51 The words in the “Book Title” column are depicted as they appear in the transcription section below (with bracketed letters, underdots, etc.) with the addition of accents and breathing marks so as to give the reader a better visual portrayal of how they appear in the manuscript. Additionally, all of the titles in Codex I have been reproduced on plate 8. 52 The second staurogram or cross symbol is the ligature for πρός, as noted above. 53 Sanders, Epistles of Paul, 256 (punctuation and abbreviations modernized).

20

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016)

only occurs when the rest of a line is left blank before the beginning of a new paragraph.

PROVENANCE: IMMEDIATE ORIGIN Despite many efforts to discover the provenance of the Freer biblical manuscripts, the details remain somewhat uncertain. When Charles Freer originally purchased the four biblical manuscripts in Egypt, the dealer (Ali Arabi) told him that they had been found in Akmim (ancient Panopolis) about a month earlier. This information was supported by the fact that other manuscripts had recently been discovered which had come from the White Monastery near Sohag (across the river from Akmim), thus affirming the area as a relevant source for such texts.54 At first there was little resistance to this account as there was no reliable evidence to the contrary. However, in 1908 Freer made another journey to Egypt, intent on discovering more information regarding both the ancient and immediate provenance of the manuscripts he had purchased in 1906. One of the primary reasons for this was the hope that there were more manuscripts to be found and potentially acquired from the same region. With this goal in mind, Freer met again with Arabi and asked him for more details surrounding the discovery of the manuscripts. The dealer then produced an additional “Greek” text (which was later determined instead to be a Coptic Psalter) as well as some other small fragments and artifacts which were purported to have come from the same location as the biblical manuscripts. Freer purchased them all. Arabi went on to tell him that the digger, who had found the original biblical manuscripts, still had a few smaller fragments in his possession, as well as the table upon which they had been found. Freer agreed to purchase them all, and arrangements were made through another dealer named Haggi to retrieve the items from the digger.55 In the course of this transaction, Freer was made aware, both through Arabi and Haggi, that the items had been discovered not in Akmim, but rather in “Medinet Dimay (Soonopaei Nesus) on the edge of the Libyan desert, in the mountains rising from Lake 54 55

See Clarke, Paleography and Philanthropy, 46–49. Clarke, Paleography and Philanthropy, 52–53.

INTRODUCTION

21

Karoun in the Fayoum district.”56 Not wanting to spoil any good relations with Arabi, Freer deemed it best to simply ignore the inconsistencies between his conflicting accounts. In his own words, he wrote to Kelsey saying, “In working to get information, I deemed it unwise to refer to Arabi’s statement of last year that the MSS were discovered at Akhmim. My dragoman warned me against facing an Arab with an untruth, fearing the majority of that class would enjoy telling another even worse. He should know, being himself Arab.”57 Clarke points out that, despite the contradictions in the accounts, there is arguably good reason to accept Dimai as the manuscripts’ place of discovery, although Nongbri is less convinced about Dimai.58 Clarke states, “Many of the details pertaining to both the general region and specific location where the Washington Manuscripts were supposedly discovered reveal close similarities to independent descriptions of Dimai and its environs.” He then summarizes many of those details and observes that neither the “digger,” Arabi, nor Haggi were likely to have manufactured the particulars of their account with such detail and accuracy.59 It was agreed upon between Freer, Kelsey, and Sanders that this new information ought to be kept a closely guarded secret until such a time as they were convinced that there were no more manuscripts 56 Letter from Freer to Kelsey dated May 23, 1908 as found in the Charles Lang Freer Papers, Freer Gallery of Art and Arthur M. Sackler Gallery Archives (Smithsonian Institution, Washington, D.C. Gift of the Estate of Charles Lang Freer), hereafter cited as CLFP; quoted in Clarke, Paleography and Philanthropy, 53. “Medinet Dimay” is also known as Dimai, Dime, Dimê, Dimei, Dimey, Dimia, Dimeh al-Siba (ancient Soknopaiou Nesos) and is located about 90 kilometers southwest of Cairo on the Northern shore of Birket Qarun in the Fayoum. See Clarke, Paleography and Philanthropy, 53, 58. 57 Freer to Kelsey, May 23, 1908 as found in the CLFP; cited in Clarke, Paleography and Philanthropy, 54. The “dragoman,” Ibrahim Aly, served as Freer’s guide and translator, whom he employed on each of his excursions to Egypt. See Clarke, Paleography and Philanthropy, 25, 27. 58 Brent Nongbri, God’s Library: The Archaeology of the Earliest Christian Manuscripts (New Haven and London: Yale University Press, 2018), 1–6. 59 Clarke, Paleography and Philanthropy, 57–58.

22

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016)

to be found at Dimai. Many efforts were made both to find additional manuscripts at Dimai, and to confirm Dimai as the place of origin for the manuscripts already in their possession. In the end, however, neither Freer, Kelsey, nor Sanders appeared to be completely convinced of the manuscripts’ provenance without at least a small amount of hesitancy. Clarke observes that, “Despite the certainty expressed by individuals such as Freer, Kelsey, and Sanders regarding the veracity of Dimai as the long-time resting place of the Washington Manuscripts, it is interesting to note that at every opportunity verification of this ‘fact’ was sought.”60 Clarke describes several examples of this, including the fact that the testimonies of Sanders and Kelsey did not always align, despite brief visits to Dimai, which they had each conducted independently of one another.61

SANDERS’ QUEST TO DETERMINE AN ANCIENT ORIGIN In 1909, the year following Freer’s second visit to Egypt (during which he had learned about Dimai from Arabi), Sanders lamented: “To trace out and interpret the stories of Arab dealers is such a hopeless task that in despair I turned to the MSS. themselves.”62 In the manuscripts, he found a prayer for a certain individual named Timothy in the subscription which ended the Gospel of Mark. He speculated that this was a reference not to a private owner, but rather to St. Timothy, and that the manuscripts “once formed parts of a Bible in use in Upper Egypt.”63 Based on the thirteenth-century writings of Abu Salih which Sanders asserted “doubtless once contained all

Clarke, Paleography and Philanthropy, 60. See Clarke, Paleography and Philanthropy, 60–65. 62 Henry A. Sanders, “Age and Ancient Home of Biblical Manuscripts in the Freer Collection,” AJA 13/2 (1909), 137. 63 Sanders, “New Manuscripts of the Bible from Egypt,” 55. In support of his theory that the manuscripts comprised component parts of a single Bible he notes, “The four manuscripts contain portions of the Bible, in no case duplicating each other, and nothing of a different nature is contained in the collection.” See Henry A. Sanders, “Four Newly Discovered Biblical Manuscripts,” BW 31/2 (1908), 138. 60 61

INTRODUCTION

23

the monasteries and churches known to him,”64 he ventured that the only plausible option based on this evidence was the Church of Timothy in the Monastery of the Vinedresser near the pyramids.65 He hypothesized that “either during or soon after the Moslem conquests in 636 a.d., this Bible ceased to be needed because of the withdrawal of the Greek Christians, and so was either buried or lost. The manuscripts are in consequence free from interpolations and corrections of later times.”66 Given the fact that there was still sand in the pages of the manuscripts when he began his work of transcription, Sanders postulated that they had most likely remained “buried or lost” until their discovery in 1906.67 While many of Sanders’ assertions and conjectures cannot be proved, his connection to the “Church of Timothy in the Monastery of the Vinedresser” seems tenuous at best. To Sanders, it would appear that his interest in seeing the Freer manuscripts as belonging to a single Bible, and the date of the conquest of Egypt in the seventh century as leading him to develop a rather romantic picture of a manuscript hidden away only to be discovered in the modern era. Clarke’s study of the origin of the text remains the most persuasive evidence unless and until new information becomes available.

PHYSICAL CHARACTER Before Sanders picked up his dinner knife to begin separating the pages of this “blackened, decayed lump of parchment,” it measured a maximum of 16.5 cm long by 10.2 cm wide by 3.8 cm thick.68 The 64 Sanders, Deuteronomy and Joshua, 3. See also Abu Salih, The Churches and Monasteries of Egypt and Some Neighboring Countries (trans. B.T. A. Evetts and A. J. Butler; Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1895), 186–90. 65 See Clarke, Paleography and Philanthropy, 44–45. For opposing arguments, see Caspar R. Gregory, Das Freer-Logion, (Leipzig: Hinrichs, 1908), 22; and also Edgar J. Goodspeed, “Notes on the Freer Gospels,” AJT 13 (1909), 597–60. 66 Sanders, “New Manuscripts of the Bible,” 55. 67 Sanders, Deuteronomy and Joshua, 3. 68 Sanders, Epistles of Paul, 251. The process of separating the leaves of the manuscript (which did, indeed, involve an actual dinner knife) is summarized on pages 251–52, but a more detailed account is offered in Henry

24

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016)

pages, in their damaged state, were wider at one end than the other and were progressively larger and better preserved from the beginning to the end. Only about a third or less of each original page has survived. Sanders managed to separate a total of 84 leaves. There was little hope of finding any extant text on the remainder of the leaves (toward the front of the manuscript) since the damage was too severe and the small area of those leaves which might have contained writing fell within the area of the margin. As a result, Sanders deemed it best to leave that portion of the manuscript (about 1.25 cm thick) intact so as to represent the original condition in which the manuscript was found.69 Two of the 168 fragmentary pages were illegible (numbered as pages 8–9 in this edition, following Sanders’ pagination), and the last page is entirely blank.70 The scribe wrote in a single column about 12.0 cm wide and, by Sanders’ estimation, each page originally contained 30 lines.71 Unfortunately, only up to eight or nine lines survive on any of the fragments. Sanders calculated that each line contained an average of 25 letters, but more recent work provides a more comprehensive calculation of 23 letters per line.72 Due to decay, which is generally worse A. Sanders, The Old Testament Manuscripts in the Freer Collection Part II: The Washington Manuscript of the Psalms (University of Michigan Studies, Humanistic Series 8/2; New York: Macmillan, 1917), 107–8. In the latter account, Sanders relates how he inquired of various scholars and libraries as to the best way to go about separating the leaves of the Psalms manuscript, but when no information was offered he was “forced to experiment. The first attempts were, however, made on a still worse decayed fragment containing portions of the Epistles of Paul. The recovery of any considerable portion of this fragment seemed so hopeless that no great damage could result, if the first experiments did not succeed” (pg. 108). 69 Sanders, Epistles of Paul, 252. 70 See footnote 17 above. 71 Sanders, Epistles of Paul, 254–55. 72 Thomas A. Wayment, “Two New Textual Variants from the Freer Pauline Codex (I),” JBL 123 (2004), 738. Here Wayment notes that there is “significant variation between the epistles. The lowest average is 2 Timothy, with twenty-one letters per line, and Galatians has the highest average, at twenty-six letters per line.”

INTRODUCTION

25

on the shorter side of each fragment, many of the lines do not extend all the way from one margin to the other. It is fairly straightforward in most cases, however, to ascertain the probable number of missing characters and thus obtain an accurate estimation. The letters (written in dark brown ink) are very neat and consistent throughout the manuscript, suggesting a well-practiced scribe.73 Further evidence of this is manifest in the scribe’s ruling system wherein vertical lines are marked lightly about 3.8 cm in from the edge of each page. Three horizontal lines at the top of each page were then marked between the vertical ones and additional rulings were only made for every other line following that.74 Sanders calculated, based on his measurements of the line rulings, that the original columns of writing were about 1.78 cm tall on pages that would have been approximately 25.4 cm tall by about 20 cm wide (Turner’s Type 4 codex).75

73 Sanders notes that although the titles are also written in dark brown ink, the first few lines of each of the epistles except one appear to have been traced over with red ink, though this was hardly discernible in the color image set used for this edition (perhaps this might be more clearly apparent upon examination of the actual leaves themselves). Sanders did point out that “red ink fades worse with decay than brown ink, so that the faintness of the color is natural.” See Sanders, Epistles of Paul, 254. 74 As in the case of the red ink mentioned above, the lightly drawn ruling marks seem to be less apparent on the image set used for this edition than they must have been for Sanders. On a number of the images, however, the compass prick marks where the rulings were made are quite visible, thus confirming his observation. He indicates that this “same style of ruling is found in the Washington manuscript of Deuteronomy and Joshua” (Sanders, Epistles of Paul, 254). He also lists a number of other manuscripts which follow this same ruling pattern. See Sanders, Deuteronomy and Joshua, 12. 75 According to its size, the manuscript would be classified as a Type 4 codex in Eric G. Turner, The Typology of the Early Codex (Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press, 1977), 16.

26

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016)

VARIANTS As mentioned above, the scribe of Codex I was very adept and produced a text relatively free of nonsense readings, though they do occur on occasion.76 An earlier study pointed out that “if orthographic differences are excluded… the ratio of nonsense readings in comparison to the total number of singular readings is less than one in twenty.”77 In reference to a comparative study of 𝔓45, 𝔓66, and 𝔓75 made by Ernest C. Colwell, James R. Royse notes that the density of nonsense readings in a text is a good indicator of a scribe’s “care and attention to his task.”78 Colwell tells us that “when the scribe of P45 creates a singular reading, it almost always makes sense; when the scribes of P66 and P75 create singular readings, they frequently do not make sense and are obvious errors.”79 In the context of the studies by both Colwell and Royse, the scribe of Codex I is similar to the scribe of 𝔓45: when guilty of making errors, both tended to make them in an intelligible manner.80 By far the most common variations found throughout Codex I are those dealing with spelling and orthography. When compared against NA28 (the base text used for this edition), quite a few itacistic variations appear. The four most frequently occurring examples are αι for ε (42 instances), ε for αι (10 instances), ι for ει (78 instances), and ει for ι (16 instances).81 There are also a fair number of other 76 See, for example, Heb 5:7 where the scribe gives ικετηραις for ικετηριας; Heb 6:2 where βαπτισθενν is given for βαπτισµων; and possibly also Heb 2:4 where µερισµοι is given for µερισµοις. In this last example, the final sigma of µερισµοις is simply omitted resulting in a nominative where there should be a dative. This, of course makes no sense in context. See Wayment, Scribal Characteristics, 259. 77 Wayment, Scribal Characteristics, 259. 78 James R. Royse, Scribal Habits in Early Greek New Testament Papyri, (New Testament Tools, Studies and Documents 36; Leiden: Brill, 2009), 91. 79 Ernest C. Colwell, “Method in Evaluating Scribal Habits: A Study of P45, P66, P75,” in Studies in Methodology in Textual Criticism of the New Testament (Leiden: Brill, 1969), 112. 80 Wayment, Scribal Characteristics, 259. 81 These numbers vary slightly from what Sanders recorded. In the case of αι for ε he also found 42 instances, but in the case of ε for αι he

INTRODUCTION

27

variants which appear to be the result of the interchange of homophones, including the following vowel pairings: ει/η, ε/ει, α/η, ου/ο, ε/η, ε/ο, η/ι, η/ει, ι/ε, ου/εο, α/ο, ο/ου, ου/ω; and the following consonant pairings: γ/ν, ν/µ. The scribe wrote ὑµῶν for ἡµῶν twice (2 Cor 7:13, 1 Thess 3:11), and also αν for ἐάν twice (2 Cor 3:16, Col 3:17). On two occasions the scribe included the alpha of δια instead of eliding it (Gal 1:12, Heb 7:9). An earlier study argued for the production of the manuscript through dictation, which is one possible explanation for the significant interchange of homophones, although dictation is not the only explanation for this phenomenon.82 Included at the end of the transcription of the fragments is Appendix 5 that comprehensively lists all of the variants between Codex I and the text of NA28.

SELECTED NOTABLE VARIANTS A series of significant readings in the text of Codex I is presented here, as a preliminary study in anticipation of the transcription itself. 1. Ephesians 5:22 At Eph 5:22, “Wives, submit yourselves unto your own husbands, as unto the Lord” (NRSV), Codex I reads: αἱ γυναῖκες τοῖς ἰδίοις ἀνδράσιν ὑποτασσέσθωσαν ὡς τῷ κυρίῳ.83 The text includes the addition of ὑποτασσέσθωσαν, absent from the editorial text of NA28, but present in numerous witnesses in the critical apparatus (ℵ A I P (Ψ) 0278. 6. 33. 81. 104. 365. 1175. 1241s. 1505. 1739. 1881.

found 8 (instead of 10); in the case of ι for ει he found 71 (instead of 78); and in the case of ει for ι he found 17 (instead of 16). See Sanders, Epistles of Paul, 257. 82 See Wayment, Scribal Characteristics, 252–56, 261–62. 83 For this example as well as all others to follow in the “Selected Notable Variants” section, the Greek text is taken from the transcription below and maintains the square brackets, underdots, abbreviated forms, etc. from the transcribed text in order to give the reader a better visual portrayal of how it appears in the manuscript. The English translations in parentheses following the Greek verses are the authors’ own unless otherwise noted.

28

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016)

2464 lat syhmg co). In the editorial text of NA28, the phrase in question lacks a main verb and, hence, hails back to the participle of the preceding verse, ὑποτασσόµενοι. A possible explanation for the variant could be that an editor tried to clarify the text by repeating the verb from the previous phrase. This suggestion is supported by the fact that in other manuscripts the variant reading ὑποτάσσεσθε is found (which can be accounted for on the same grounds).84 The NA28 text is both the lectio brevior and lectio difficilior. In Metzger’s Textual Commentary on the Greek New Testament he writes, “A majority of the Committee preferred the shorter reading, which accords with the succinct style of the author’s admonitions, and explained the other readings as expansions introduced for the sake of clarity, the main verb being required especially when the words αἱ γυναῖκες stood at the beginning of a scripture lesson.”85 2. Philippians 2:2 This verse offers another instance of text present in Codex I but absent from the editorial text of NA28. The manuscript reads: πληρώσατέ µου τὴν χαράν ἵνα τὸ αὐτὸ φρονῆτε,86 πάντες τὴν αὐτὴν ἀγάπην ἔχοντες, σύνψυχοι, τὸ αὐτὸ φρονοῦντες (“Fulfil my joy, in order that you all be of the same mind, having the same love, being in full accord and of one mind”). Codex I adds the otherwise unattested word πάντες following the verb, and thereby strengthens the concept of unity and shared purpose. The meaning of the text is not significantly altered by the addition, but perhaps it was included to offer clarification. The addition of πάντες is a gloss that underlines the overarching interest to build a community of shared interests.87 If this was, indeed, the case, it is difficult to know whether or not the change originated in the production of this manuscript or whether it was present in its Vorlage. 84 Witnesses which adopt the reading ὑποτάσσεσθε include the following: (D F G) K L 630 𝔐 sy. 85 Bruce M. Metzger, A Textual Commentary on the Greek New Testament, (2nd ed., London and New York: United Bible Societies, 1994), 541. 86 The text reads φρονηται, an itacism for φρονῆτε. 87 Wayment, Scribal Characteristics, 260.

INTRODUCTION

29

3. Longer omissions: Colossians 2:17–18, 1 Thessalonians 2:15, 2 Timothy 4:8 Although there are several occasions in which one or two small (and usually insignificant) words are omitted throughout Codex I, there are three instances in which the missing sections are three or more words long. These are likely all visual errors resulting from parablepsis.88 The first and most substantial omission is in Col 2:17–18 where 15 words are omitted. The text in Codex I reads: ἅ ἐστιν σκιὰ τῶν µελλόντων ἃ ἑόρακεν ἐµβατεύων, εἰκῇ φυσιούµενος ὑπὸ τοῦ νοὸς τῆς σαρκὸς αὐτοῦ (“Which things are a shadow of those to come, entering into those things which he has seen, being vainly puffed up by his mind after the flesh”). The missing section occurs between µελλόντων and ἃ ἑόρακεν, and in NA28 reads: τὸ δὲ σῶµα τοῦ Χριστοῦ µηδεὶς ὑµᾶς καταβραβευέτω θέλων ἐν ταπεινοφροσύνῃ καὶ θρησκείᾳ τῶν ἀγγέλων (“But the substance belongs to Christ. Do not let anyone disqualify you, insisting on self-abasement and worship of angels” [NRSV]). It is quite probable that this leap forward was occasioned by homoeoteleuton as both µελλόντων and ἀγγέλων end in the same way and both are preceded by the article τῶν. The second omission is found in 1 Thess 2:15, which in NA28 reads: τῶν καὶ τὸν κύριον ἀποκτεινάντων Ἰησοῦν καὶ τοὺς προφήτας καὶ ἡµᾶς ἐκδιωξάντων καὶ θεῷ µὴ ἀρεσκόντων καὶ πᾶσιν ἀνθρώποις ἐναντίων (“who killed both the Lord Jesus and the prophets, and drove us out, and displease God and oppose everyone”). In Codex I, the words καὶ θεῷ µὴ ἀρεσκόντων (“and displease God”) were omitted between ἐκδιωξάντων and καὶ πᾶσιν. The eye of the scribe likely skipped forward from ἐκδιωξάντων to ἀρεσκόντων due to homoeoteleuton (or possibly also homoeoarcton, since both ἐκδιωξάντων and ἀρεσκόντων are followed by the word καί). The third example is in 2 Tim 4:8, where NA28 reads ὃν ἀποδώσει µοι ὁ κύριος ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡµέρᾳ, ὁ δίκαιος κριτής, οὐ µόνον δὲ ἐµοὶ ἀλλὰ καὶ πᾶσιν τοῖς ἠγαπηκόσι τὴν ἐπιφάνειαν αὐτοῦ (“which the Lord, the righteous judge, will give me on that day, and not only me, but also all those who have lovingly awaited his appearance”). The appositive phrase ὁ δίκαιος κριτής (“the 88

Wayment, Scribal Characteristics, 255.

30

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016)

righteous judge”) was inadvertently omitted, thus creating a singular reading.89 The lack of other attestation suggests that the error may have been due to the scribe or Codex I. 4. Harmonization (1): Philippians 2:2, Colossians 2:16, 2 Corinthians 8:6 A number of the more significant variants in the manuscript appear to be the result of harmonization, whether to remote parallels or to the immediate context.90 In Phil 2:2 the reader is told to “be of the same (αὐτό) mind, having the same (αὐτήν) love…and of one (ἕν) mind” (NRSV).91 In Codex I, ἕν is replaced by αὐτό, likely harmonizing it to the first half of the verse. In similar fashion, in Col 2:16, ἤ is substituted for καί between ἐν βρώσει and ἐν πόσει. Codex I reads: Μὴ οὖν τις ὑµᾶς κρινέτω ἐν βρώσει ἢ ἐν πόσει ἢ ἐν µέρει ἑορτῆς ἢ νεοµηνίας ἢ σαββάτων, (“Therefore let no one judge you regarding food or drink or in relation to a festival, or a new moon, or sabbaths”). This is probably a harmonization to the other three occurrences of eta in the same verse. Also, in 2 Cor 8:6 Codex I reads: εἰς τὸ παρακαλέσαι ἡµᾶς Τίτον ἵνα καθὼς προενηρξάσθαι οὕτως καὶ ἐπιτελέσῃ εἰς ὑµᾶς καὶ τὴν χάριν ταύτην. (“In order that we might urge Titus that, just as he began, so also he might complete this same grace unto you”). The word προενηρξάσθαι is used in Codex I, whereas NA28 reads προενήρξατο.92 It appears that the 89 Evidence taken from New Orleans Baptist Theological Seminary, “The Center for New Testament Textual Studies NT Critical Apparatus (2004),” Bibleworks 9.0.12.512 (Bibleworks, 2013). 90 In Colwell’s study on 𝔓46, 𝔓66, and 𝔓75 he points out that “although they are not frequent, harmonizations to remote parallels do occur” (Colwell, Method in Evaluating Scribal Habits, 113). He goes on to point out that the more frequent types of harmonization are those relating to the immediate context of a variant (Colwell, Method in Evaluating Scribal Habits, 113). In Codex I there appear to be instances of both types of harmonization. 91 The Greek version of this verse from Codex I is given both in the transcription below and in the discussion of a different variant two paragraphs prior. 92 προενηρξάσθαι is simply an itacistic variant of προενήρξασθε. Sanders cites Westcott and Hort in his apparatus as containing the variant προενηξατο, though this is probably a typo for προενηρξατο, which is what

INTRODUCTION

31

scribe’s eyes jumped to the same verb in 2 Corinthians 8:10 and replaced προενήρξατο with προενήρξασθε.93 5. Harmonization (2): Hebrews 9:11, 11:13 Two examples in Hebrews feature variant readings which are harmonizations to similar passages within a proximity of one or two chapters. In Heb 9:11 Codex I reads: Χριστὸς δὲ παραγενόµενος ἀρχιερεὺς τῶν µελλόντων ἀγαθῶν διὰ τῆς µείζονος καὶ τελειοτέρας σκηνῆς οὐ χειροποιήτου, τοῦτ’ ἔστιν οὐ ταύτης τῆς κτίσεως (“But when Christ, having come as a high priest of the good things to come, through the greater and more perfect tabernacle…”). In place of τῶν µελλόντων ἀγαθῶν, NA28 reads τῶν γενοµένων ἀγαθῶν. Metzger comments, “Although both readings are well supported, γενοµενων on the whole appears to have superior attestation on the score of age and diversity of text type ([P46] B D* 1739 itd syrp, h, pal Origen al). The presence of the expression των µελλοντων αγαθων in Hebrews 10:2, where the text is firm, seems to have influenced copyists here.”94 Similarly, in Heb 11:13, Codex I reads: Κατὰ πίστιν ἀπέθανον οὗτοι πάντες, µὴ κοµισάµενοι τὰς ἐπαγγελίας (“All of these died in faith, not having received the promises”). NA28, on the other hand, reads λαβόντες instead of κοµισάµενοι, which does little (if anything) to change the meaning of the text. The harmonization may derive from either Heb 10:36 or 11:39 where the verb κοµίζω is also used with the object ἐπαγγελίαν.95 The manuscript evidence favors λαβόντες, which is the better attested reading whereas the reading of Codex I and other witnesses with it (ℵ*, P, 33, et al.) may have been influenced by memory of a near context.

the text reads in Westcott and Hort (B. F. Westcott and F. J. A. Hort, The New Testament in the Original Greek, New York: Harper & Brothers, 1881). 93 Wayment, Scribal Characteristics, 254. 94 Metzger, Textual Commentary, 598. 95 Note, however, that λάβωσιν is also employed in a nearby passage (Heb 9:15) with the object ἐπαγγελίαν, so the force of this argument is weak.

32

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016)

6. Harmonization (3): Philippians 2:3, Colossians 4:12 In a few instances, the scribe may have harmonized the text to more remote passages, though admittedly these examples are less clear and convincing. The first possibility is in Phil 2:3 where Codex I reads: µηδὲν κατ’ ἐριθείαν µηδὲ κατὰ κενοδοξίαν, ἀλλὰ τῇ ταπεινοφροσύνῃ ἀλλήλους προηγούµενοι ὑπερέχοντας ἑαυτῶν (“Do nothing in strife or vanity, but in humility regard one another above yourselves”). This text features προηγούµενοι where most witnesses have simply ἡγούµενοι. The variant makes little difference in meaning but is supported in at least one early witness (𝔓46).96 In this passage the participle has ἀλλήλους as object and is accompanied by the dative τῇ ταπεινοφροσύνῃ. A similar construction is found in Rom 12:10 where προηγούµενοι also has the object ἀλλήλους with a dative (τῇ τιµῇ). Possible familiarity with the passage in Romans could have resulted in favoring the prefixed version of the verb. A second possible example of harmonization with more remote passages is found in Col 4:12, where Codex I appears to read: πάντοτε ἀγωνιζόµενος ὑπὲρ ὑµῶν ἐν ταῖς προσευχαῖς, ἵνα ἦτε τέλειοι καὶ πεπληροφορηµένοι (“Who always labors in your behalf in his prayers, in order that you may be perfect and complete”). Sanders records ἵνα ἦτε τέλειοι in place of the NA28’s ἵνα σταθῆτε τέλειοι. Unfortunately, in the image sets for Codex I, all that remains of the variant word in question is the final τε. Sanders, however, saw ἵνα ἦτε, including neither square brackets nor underdots in his edition of this passage. Hence, in the critical apparatus of NA28, Codex I is cited as the best witness of this reading (the reading has support in 2464 and several Vulgate and Syriac witnesses). There is a possibility that this is a harmonization to James 1:4, which reads: ἵνα ἦτε τέλειοι καὶ ὁλόκληροι (NA28). Another possibility is that it could be an allusion to the better-known injunction in Matthew 5:48, ἔσεσθε οὖν ὑµεῖς τέλειοι, which couples τέλειοι with the verb εἰµί.

In both the MSI and color image sets of Codex I, this entire line appears to be broken off, and is thus no longer verifiable. As a result, the variant προηγούµενοι is based on Sanders’ edition rather than our own (Sanders, Epistles of Paul, 282). 96

INTRODUCTION

33

7. Hebrews 10:17 An example of how the text may have been misremembered as part of the copying process can be seen at Heb 10:17. Here Codex I uniquely reads καὶ τῶν ἀνοµιῶν αὐτῶν καὶ τῶν ἁµαρτιῶν αὐτῶν, transposing the two units in the standard text: καὶ τῶν ἁµαρτιῶν αὐτῶν καὶ τῶν ἀνοµιῶν αὐτῶν. This transposition of nouns suggests that the manuscript may have been written in longer sense units, of eight words or so at a time.97 There is no change in meaning to the verse as a result of the transposition: its principal significance is the light it sheds on the copying process. This seems to be confirmed also in the fact that there are very few nonsense readings in the surviving portions of Codex I, again pointing to a scribe who could remember at times significant portions of a sentence or clause. 8. Hebrews 7:27–28, 1 Timothy 5:8 Several of the variants in Codex I are simply different forms of a given word, with only slight, if any, change in the meaning of the text. Examples of this are found in three verses. At Heb 7:27, προσενέγκας is used in place of ἀνενέγκας. At Heb 7:28, ἱερεῖς is used in place of ἀρχιερεῖς. At 1 Tim 5:8, προνοεῖται is used in place of προνοεῖ (both the active and middle forms having the same basic connotation). 9. 1 Timothy 5:17 In 1 Tim 5:17, Codex I reads Οἱ καλῶς προεστῶτες πρεσβύτεροι διπλῆς τιµῆς ἀξιούσθωσαν, µάλιστα οἱ κοπιῶντες ἐν λόγῳ καὶ ἀληθείᾳ (“Let the elders who rule well be esteemed of double the honor, especially those who labor in word and truth”). The word ἀληθείᾳ is used here instead of the well-attested διδασκαλίᾳ, which is found in all other witnesses to 1 Tim 5:17. The source of the reading is not readily obvious.98 There is no clear indication of parablep-

Wayment, Scribal Characteristics, 258. Wayment, Scribal Characteristics, 260. In footnote 31 examples of the usage of both words are provided: “For διδασκαλια, see 1 Tim 1:10; 4:1, 6, 13, 16; 6:1, 3. For αληθεια, see 1 Tim 2:4, 7; 3:15; 4:3; 6:5.” 97 98

34

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016)

sis or a reading created through another type of sight-error, and instead the most reasonable solution is that the reading was used because the two nouns are employed somewhat synonymously in this epistle. Having said that, διδασκαλίᾳ is the earliest attested reading and has the most claim to be the original reading. The source of ἀληθείᾳ remains an open question.99 10. 2 Thessalonians 3:8 In 2 Thess 3:8, Codex I reads οὐδὲ δωρεὰν ἄρτον ἐφάγοµεν παρά τινος, ἀλλ’ ἐν κόπῳ καὶ µόχθῳ νύκτα καὶ ἡµέραν ἐργαζόµενοι πρὸς τὸ µὴ ἐπιβαρῆσαί τινα ὑµῶν (“And we did not eat any man’s bread without cost, but in labor and toil we worked throughout the night and day, so as to not burden any one of you”). The changing of the case of the nouns from the genitive, νυκτὸς καὶ ἡµέρας (NA28) to the accusative, νύκτα καὶ ἡµέραν (Codex I and others) slightly alters the meaning of the phrase. In his Textual Commentary on the Greek New Testament, Metzger writes, “A majority of the Committee preferred the reading with the genitives (supported by ℵ B F G 33 81 104 255 256 263 442 1611 1845 1908 2005), which is in conformity with Paul’s usage in 1 Th 2.9 and 3.10. The reading with the accusatives (supported by A D K L P most minuscules) appears to be a heightening of the apostle’s statement, by emphasizing the duration of his labors (‘throughout night and day’).”100 11. Ephesians 4:18 In addition to the changing of a noun’s case, the changing of its number can also alter the meaning of a text. In Eph 4:18, Codex I records the singular αὐτῷ in place of the NA28’s plural αὐτοῖς, reading: ἐσκοτωµένοι τῇ διανοίᾳ ὄντες, ἀπηλλοτριωµένοι τῆς ζωῆς τοῦ θεοῦ, διὰ τὴν ἄγνοιαν τὴν οὖσαν ἐν αὐτῷ, διὰ τὴν πώρωσιν τῆς καρδίας αὐτῶν (“They are darkened in understanding, and alienated from the life of God through the ignorance which is in him, because of the hardness of their hearts”). This variant reading is not attested in other witnesses, likely because it is a genuine error that corrupted There is, in fact, no manuscript support for the reading αληθεια in the apparatus for either the NA28, CNTTS, or in Tischendorf’s 8th edition (Constantine von Tischendorf, ed., Novum Testamentum Graece [8th ed., 2 vols., Leipzig: Giesecke & Devrient, 1869]). 100 Metzger, Textual Commentary, 569. 99

INTRODUCTION

35

the meaning of the original. This seemingly minor error resulted in a significant shift in meaning. The change from plural to singular meant that instead of the text reading “alienated from a life in God because of the ignorance which is in them,” the text now reads that they were “alienated from a life in God because of the ignorance that is in him.”101 This error obviously carries with it an improper theological nuance. It was likely a simple mistake which the scribe made due to the commonality of the construction ἐν αὐτῷ. 12. Transpositions A number of the variant readings in Codex I have little, if any, effect on the meaning of the text. In addition to minor spelling and orthographical variants, there are a handful that simply change the order of a few words. The following list outlines all instances of these transpositional variants:102 Page # 16 40 69 76 80 96

Verse

Codex I Reading

NA28 Reading

1 Cor 15:38 2 Cor 10:10 Eph 6:21 Phil 3:4 Col 1:1 1 Thess 4:8

126

Heb 10:17

132 140

Heb 11:32 1 Tim 1:1

148

1 Tim 5:18

152

2 Tim 1:1

αὐτῷ δίδωσιν Μὲν ἐπιστολαὶ καὶ ὑµεῖς εἰδῆτε ἄλλος δοκεῖ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τὸ ἅγιον αὐτοῦ ἀνοµιῶν αὐτῶν καὶ τῶν ἀνοµιῶν γάρ µε Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ οὐ φιµώσεις βοῦν ἀλοῶντα Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

δίδωσιν αὐτῷ ἐπιστολαὶ µέν εἰδῆτε καὶ ὑµεῖς δοκεῖ ἄλλος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ αὐτοῦ τὸ ἅγιον ἁµαρτιῶν αὐτῶν καὶ τῶν ἀνοµιῶν µε γάρ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ βοῦν ἀλοῶντα οὐ φιµώσεις Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ

TEXTUAL AFFILIATION When Sanders examined Codex I about a century ago, he “not only [took] those variants, which [fell] in the well-preserved portions of the text, but [he also] tried to determine the position of the [manuscript] regarding many others which fall in lines partly lost.”103 He Wayment, Scribal Characteristics, 258. See Wayment, Scribal Characteristics, 257. 103 Sanders, Epistles of Paul, 259. 101 102

36

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016)

did so by estimating the number of characters missing either at the beginning or end of many of the partially damaged lines, and made an educated guess as to how the text must have read in those sections. By this method, Sanders claimed that he was “able to determine the position of the [manuscript] on about 450 variants given in Tischendorf’s edition.”104 Based on this analysis, Sanders concluded, “It is plain even at first sight that there is a notable agreement with the Alexandrian group of [manuscripts], the Neutral group of Westcott and Hort.”105 Sanders then offered a number of statistics based on this data, but unfortunately he did not include much of the actual data itself (i.e. the readings themselves, whether authentic or approximated). Because of this, it is nearly impossible to confirm a number of his statistical findings. On the question of textual affiliation, we have taken a somewhat different approach in that we did not, like Sanders, estimate missing portions of the text based on line and letter spacing, but rather included only those portions of the text that actually survived in order to create a more accurate quantitative analysis.106 In Appendix 104 Sanders, Epistles of Paul, 259. In the textia; variants table in Appendix 5 there are less than 200 variants identified—a vastly smaller data pool than Sanders’ 450. Unfortunately, given that Sanders did not compile an actual list of readings, it remains improbable that one might be able to reconcile the findings with each other. 105 Sanders, Epistles of Paul, 259. Note that Sanders’ transcription was based on the Westcott and Hort text. Variants between Codex I and Westcott and Hort are included in the footnotes of his transcription. Sanders also notes in the preface to his edition, “The Alexandrian character of the text was so plain and decided that long search for parallels to the few individual variants seemed unnecessary” (Sanders, Epistles of Paul, vii). 106 Gordon D. Fee writes, “The single most important factor in establishing textual relationships of any kind is the determination of the criteria by which such relationships should be measured. Colwell (1959: 757) has suggested that ideally the only proper method is to compare a given MS completely with all other MSS. Until some refinement of computer analysis is available, however, one will have to settle for a partial method somewhere below the ideal. Nevertheless, by careful controls one should be able to derive results which would approximate those of the ideal” (Gordon D.

INTRODUCTION

37

5, a full comparison has been made between this transcription of Codex I and the text of the NA28. In that table, all of the variants between the two texts that are currently visible on the existing pages have been listed. In addition, we have compared this new transcription of Codex I to the text of the Robinson Pierpont (RP) edition, which is representative of the Byzantine tradition, and the results are also included in the same appendix.107 The manuscript also contains numerous orthographic differences, which have been laid out in Appendix 6. By evaluating the differences between Codex I, NA28, and the RP, it is clear that the text of Codex I more closely resembles the earliest textual tradition (represented by the NA28) rather than the Byzantine (represented by the RP).

ABOUT THE TRANSCRIPTION When comparing the manuscript images to Sanders’ original edition, it quickly became apparent that there were quite a few differences between what is currently visible on the images and what Sanders Fee, “Codex Sinaiticus in the Gospel of John: A Contribution to Methodology in Establishing Textual Relationships,” in Studies in the Theory and Method of New Testament Textual Criticism [ed. Eldon J. Epp and Gordon D. Fee; Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1993], 223). The work to which he refers is Ernest C. Colwell, “Method in Locating a Newly-Discovered Manuscript within the Manuscript Tradition of the Greek New Testament,” SE 1 (1959): 757, which has been reprinted in Ernest C. Colwell, Studies in Methodology in Textual Criticism of the New Testament (Leiden: Brill, 1969), 26. In his study, Fee gives a quantatative analysis between Codex Sinaiticus and other major manuscripts which include the Gospel of John through the sixth century (𝔓66 𝔓75 A B C D W TR). We differ slightly from his methodology in that we do not compare Codex I directly against any other individual manuscript, but rather to two critical editions instead (the NA28 and RP). Obviously more precise results can be expected once Codex I is compared to other manuscripts on an individual basis. However, such an endeavor has not been undertaken for this study, meaning that the results herein will simply “approximate those of the ideal” (Fee, Sinaiticus, 223). 107 The Robinson-Pierpont Greek New Testament text used for this comparison was exported from the Bibleworks 9 software, version 9.0.12.472.

38

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016)

had recorded. He notes in his preface that “somewhat more was read in the first collation than could be seen on later examination, but the fragments now seem to be keeping perfectly and so will be available for future reference.”108 The initial assumption was that there might have been further deterioration in the fragments themselves resulting in a noticeable difference between what Sanders could see and the modern images from which this transcription was made. Accordingly, a comparison was made between all of the plates in Sanders against their modern counterparts.109 Although Sanders only reproduces four folios, there are surprisingly few, if any, noticeable differences between the modern images and Sanders’ black and white images, suggesting that the manuscript has been very well preserved over the last century. In the case of the other pages, however, the question must remain unanswered as to whether differences between Sanders’ edition and this one are the result of deterioration which occurred between then and now, or between the time Sanders performed his first collation and when he published his edition in 1918.110 The general approach to transcription has been quite conservative. Any conjectural emendation has been primarily reserved to either the footnotes or commentary. The goal of the transcription has

Sanders, Epistles of Paul, vii. See plates 4–7 for examples. 110 This transcription is meant to reflect the text in its current condition as observed in the current color and MSI image sets. Such an approach varies from that adopted by Comfort and Barrett who wrote, “in the process of doing this work, we often trusted the judgment of the original editors with respect to their readings of broken letters along the margins of manuscripts inasmuch as manuscripts often break off along the edges in the process of handling them or mounting them. Thus, a manuscript in its present condition may not preserve the lettering the first editors saw. Our transcriptions, therefore, should reflect the most pristine condition of the text and not the condition of the text as it presently stands in storage.” See Philip W. Comfort and David P. Barrett, The Text of the Earliest New Testament Greek Manuscripts (Wheaton: Tyndale House, 2001), 19. It is hoped that by portraying the text in its current condition, as well as noting the differences between this edition and the editio princeps, that some light might be shed on the nature of the text’s preservation over time. 108 109

INTRODUCTION

39

been to accurately portray the text in its present condition, as depicted in the two image sets upon which the work was based. Although some of the text was easily legible, there were numerous occasions in which it was only possible to determine the text after careful and closely detailed inspection. Many times this involved tracing over all of the letters on a page in order to ascertain the spacing and characters with higher precision. As a result, some of the text may not be as readily apparent in the images without a more scrupulous examination. However, throughout the transcription either square brackets or underdots are employed in all areas which lacked a reasonable measure of certainty or confidence. Square brackets in the transcription indicate text that is either missing or no longer legible based on the images used. The text within the square brackets comes from the base text used for the transcription—the NA28. The practice of restoring the text using NA28 is limited in some instances where Sanders was able to restore more text, but which is no longer visible in the new photographs. Therefore, in some instances, the text restored in the brackets follows Sanders’ original edition, and the reader has been directed to these divergences from NA28 in the notes. In those instances, the text will clearly depart from NA28, but these divergences typically only involve a single word. Additionally, the text of NA28 has been followed in the bracketed portions by not abbreviating the nomina sacra and by capitalizing certain titles such as Χριστός. However, to help the reader anticipate whether the nomina sacra were used in the restored portions, the transcription has used parentheses to indicate the abbreviation. In Sanders’ original edition, he frequently included a line or two at the beginning and ending of the fragments in order to provide context. Those additional lines can be somewhat confusing because they give the impression that they represent text no longer legible at the beginning of a page even when the top margin and first line of that page are still extant. These additional lines have been removed from this edition, and an unnumbered additional line has been included only when a portion of a word extends onto a line following it or preceding it so the reader can have easy access to the complete word. Line 1 of each fragment is actually the first line of the text, although this was not clearly the case in Sanders’ transcription. In some instances, Sanders was able to restore a line at the end

40

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016)

of a fragment which is no longer visible. Those lines have been included in the transcription, and a note provides the letters and words that Sanders was able to see.

OBSERVATIONS ON WORKING WITH DIGITAL IMAGES There are both advantages and disadvantages to working with a digital image set of a manuscript for the work of transcription. Among the advantages are the ability to zoom in closer on the text and modify the document’s color and contrast settings. High-resolution images can also reveal detail which may be indiscernible to the naked eye. The ability to extract detail was also greatly enhanced by the images resulting from the use of multi-spectral imaging (MSI) technology. Throughout the work of transcription, it was also helpful to be able to trace over the text on a digital copy of an image and thus better familiarize ourselves with the scribe’s handwriting and the spacing of letters. This process was repeated on the majority of the images and enabled a more accurate restoration of the reading of the manuscript in places where the text was badly damaged or decayed. It was particularly helpful in determining what constituted transfer of ink from opposing pages. Despite the benefits, there are also several challenges in using digital images exclusively. Included in these is the fact that one cannot adjust the light source on a two-dimensional image in order to get a better feel for both the shadows and textures of a manuscript. Details can either be gained or lost depending on both the direction and intensity of the light source used. Eyes can also see and process information differently to a film or a digital sensor, which may be helpful in detecting certain nuances in a manuscript’s character. Another factor which can prove to be both either a pro or a con is the resolution with which an image is made. The color set of digital images used for this transcription were made at 240 dpi (dots per inch), which was good several years ago (2002–2003), but with the advances in imaging technology one could make a set of even higher resolution images today. Although it was useful to be able to zoom in on these images, this only helped up to a certain point before the images started becoming pixelated and blurry. The images captured through MSI were even more difficult in this regard, as they were only made at 72 dots per inch. These images were quite helpful for looking at “slices” or narrow light bandwidth images of the manu-

INTRODUCTION

41

script page as a whole but zooming in on them quickly proved counterproductive. Clearly the best option for transcription work would be a combination of both digital images and access to the physical manuscript pages themselves. Though it is extremely unlikely that easy access to the manuscript will soon be an option, it is hoped that digital images will be published in the future in order to allow for closer and more diverse inspection of the text as originally recorded. At the beginning of this project, it was hoped that by using both the color and especially the MSI image sets that it would have been possible to see a lot more text than Sanders originally saw a century ago. This unfortunately has not been the case. Rather, in several instances the MSI images were able to confirm text that Sanders had originally seen which was no longer visible in the color image set. The following are a selected number of passages in which the MSI images seemed to offer help above and beyond what was visible in the color images. In some cases they simply confirmed what Sanders recorded a century ago, but in other instances, few though they may be, they actually helped improve upon the editio princeps. The page (or folio) number as it appears in the transcription is listed in parentheses following each reference, along with the word or words which most benefited from the MSI images: 1 Cor 15:34 (13 – ἀπέθανεν), 1 Cor 15:27–281 (15 – υἱός, ὑποταγήσεται), 1 Cor 15:49–50 (17 – σαρξ), 2 Cor 1:1 (20 – ἐκκλησίᾳ), 2 Cor 5:8–10 (29 – αὐτῷ εἶναι), 2 Cor 8:16 (36 – ὑπέρ), 2 Cor 8:24–9:1 (37 – ὑµῶν, µὲν γάρ), Gal 1:22– 2:1 (51 – ταῖς ἐκκλησίας), Col 1:22 (82 – σαρκός), Col 2:8 (84 – βλέπετε), 1 Thess 4:18 (97 – λόγοις), Heb 3:6 (109 – ἡµεῖς), and Heb 7:10 (117 – πατρός). Additionally, in both 2 Tim 4:18–20 (160) and Titus 1:1–3 (161) the entire lower half of both respective pages was scarcely legible without the MSI images, due to severe darkening of the text over time. Further discussion on most of these examples can be found within their respective notes in the transcription below.

TRANSCRIPTION OF CODEX I [ΠΡΟΣ ΚΟΡΙΝΘΙΟΥΣ Α]

p.1 (1 Cor 10:29) 1

̣ ΔΕ ΛΕΓΩ̣ Ο̣Υ̣ [… συνειδη]Σ̣ΙΝ [χι την εαυτου αλλα] ΤΗ̣Ν Τ̣ΟΥ ̣ ̣ ΕΤΕ [ρου ινατι γαρ η ελευθε]Ρ̣ΙΑ ̣ ̣ ΜΟΥ [κρινεται υπο συνειδησεως …]

The title is given in Sanders’ edition as a signal to the reader and is therefore not counted in the line numbering. The title would have appeared at the beginning of 1 Corinthians. 4 The omission of ἄλλης was first proposed by Wayment, “Two New Textual Variants,” 738–40. The positioning of the fragment is different from Sanders, The New Testament Manuscripts in the Freer Collection, 265. The new images of the manuscript make it clear that the fragment belongs to the right-hand side of the page, thus suggesting that the text to the left has been lost, but that what is visible represents the right margin. The omission of ἄλλης is attested in F, G, ar, b, d, vgmss, but no other witnesses omit the pronoun without replacing it with ἀπίστου. The omission therefore appears to be an error. Sanders was able to read συνει]δ̣η̣[σεως in the last line.

p.2 (1 Cor 11:9–10) 1

[και γαρ ο]Υ̣Κ̣ ΕΚ̣Τ̣ΙΣ ̣ [̣ θη ανηρ δια] [την γυν]Α̣ΙΚ ̣ Α ̣ ΑΛ̣[λα γυνη δια τον] [ανδρα δια τουτο οφειλει η γυνη]

44

3

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016)

The interchange of ἄνδρα and ἄνθρωπον attested in 𝔓46 falls within the brackets of this fragment, and thus it is possible that the text should be restored with the nomen sacrum ανον as in 𝔓46. Also, the addition of the definite article ἡ before γυνή found in some minuscules cannot be confirmed or rejected. Sanders’ edition restored part of line 3 as τ]ο̣υ̣το̣ ̣ ο̣φ̣[ειλει, and so it has been included in this edition even though it is no longer legible.

p.3 (1 Cor 11:18–19) 1

] ̣ ̣ ̣ ̣ ΠΕΜΠΤΗΣ [ακουω σχισµατ]Α̣ Ε̣Ν̣ Ϋ̣ΜΙ̣ Ν ̣ ΫΠΑΡΧΕΙ [και µερος τι π]Ι̣[σ]Τ̣Ε̣ΥΩ ̣ ·̣ ΔΙ ΓΑ̣Ρ̣ Κ̣ΑΙ̣ ̣

1

2 3

There is a word at the top of this page which Sanders records as πεµπτις, which is nonsensical. In a footnote (written in Latin) he says, “There is a superscription which cannot be read before the word πεµπτις.” This edition has indicated the presence of these additional letters by the use of a single dot for each missing letter. The parchment is too faded to make any plausible suggestion for what may have been 4 letters. The word at the top of the page, however, appears confidently to be the word “fifth,” πέµπτης, and therefore the reading is provided without any underdots. The word appears to be in a different hand to that of the original scribe. The final letter of this line is a supralinear ν, thus indicating that the scribe had reached the end of a line. Sanders divided the lines differently. δι is an itacism for δει.

p.4 (1 Cor 11:26–27) 1

[τον θα]Ν̣ΑΤ ̣ ̣ΟΝ ΤΟΥ ΚΥ Κ̣ΑΤ ̣ ̣Α[̣ γελ] [λετε αχρις ου α]Ν Ε̣ΛΘ ̣ [̣ η] Ω̣Σ̣Τ̣[ε ος αν εσθιη] [τον αρτον το]Υ̣[τον η πινη το ποτηριον του …]

TRANSCRIPTION OF CODEX I 2

3

45

The adverb ἄχρι, attested in 𝔓46, ℵ*, B and others is spelled ἄχρις, following the reconstruction of Sanders’ edition, using the epic form. This reading was visible to Sanders, but it is no longer visible in the available photographs. ἄχρις appears in A, Bc, C, D, and others. Sanders read αν before ἔλθῃ, although the ν is now only partially visible. The variant is not listed in the apparatus of NA28, but it does appear in some minuscules (6, 424, 1611, et al.) as well as D2, K, and L. The manuscript almost certainly reads τοῦτον with a number of late witnesses (K, L, and P) and the Majority text. The reading is marked Ivid in the apparatus of NA28 and in the current state of the manuscript the reading is even less certain.

p.5 (1 Cor 12:3–4) 1

2

3

[λεγει αναθεµα Ι(ησου)ς και ουδεις] Δ̣[υναται] [ειπειν κ(υριο)ς Ι(ησου)ς ει µη εν πν(ευµατ)ι αγιω] Δ̣[ιαιρεσεις δε] [χαρισµατων εισιν το δε αυτο πν(ευµ)α …] Nothing can be determined regarding the shift to the accusative case, κύριον Ἰησοῦν, that is attested in D, F, G, et al. Sanders read διερέσεις, but he placed underdots beneath each letter. Lines 1–2 are restored with great hesitancy since the text is now almost completely effaced. In Sanders’ edition, he records text as having appeared on a third line. However, judging by the spacing of the first two lines, it appears as though this text must have unfortunately broken off. On the image for this manuscript page there is a small additional fragment, but it does not appear to contain any text. Sanders was able to read α]̣υ̣το̣ ̣ π̣ν̣[ευµα. This transcription follows Sanders’ practice of using lower case letters and writing out the nomen sacrum, which would have been written ΠΝ[.

46

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016)

p.6 (1 Cor 12:16)1 1

1

ΚΑΙ̣ ̣ Ε̣[αν ειπη το ους οτι ουκ ειµι ο] Φ̣[θαλµος ουκ ειµι εκ του σωµα] Τ̣Ο[̣ ς ου παρα τουτο ουκ εστιν εκ …] Ekthesis serves to designate a sense break and the beginning of a sentence.

p.7 (1 Cor 12:27–28) 1

[υµεις δε εστε] Σ̣ΩΜ ̣ Α ̣ ̣ ΧΥ ΚΑ[ι µ]Ε [λη εκ µερους κα]Ι̣ Ο̣ΥΣ ̣ ̣ Μ̣Ε̣[ν εθετο] [ο θ(εο)ς εν τη εκκλ]Η̣Σ̣[ια πρωτο]Ν̣

1 With considerable measure of reservation, we have parted entirely from Sanders regarding the reconstruction of page 6 (1 Cor 12:14 in Sanders’ edition). He records it as starting with the beginning of verse 14 and then extending half-way into verse 15 as such.

Και γαρ το̣ σ̣ωµ ̣ ̣[α ουκ εστιν εν µε] λος α̣λ̣λα ̣ ̣ π[ολλα. εαν ειπῃ ο πους,] [ο]τ̣ι̣ [ουκ ειµι χειρ, ουκ ειµι εκ του σωµατος] However, this does not appear to match what is currently visible on the manuscript image (see plate 2a). The enlarged κ that begins the first line is the only letter that is visible with certainty. A few other letters appear faintly, including an α and ι following the κ, but not nearly as much remains on the page as Sanders had originally recorded. It also bears mentioning here that Sanders does not include a supralinear stroke over the enlarged κ of the καί on the first line, which is common throughout the manuscript when beginning a new paragraph or sense break. Although it is somewhat faded, the supralinear stroke does appear to be present and thus we have included it in this edition; though the sense break beginning at verse 16 does not appear to be as strong contextually as the one beginning at verse 14.

TRANSCRIPTION OF CODEX I

47

pp.8–9 These pages are illegible.2

p.10 (1 Cor 14:12–13) ̣ Φ ̣ Η ̣ [̣ τευητε διο ο] Τ̣[ε ιν]Α̣ Π̣ΡΟ Λ̣ΑΛ ̣ [̣ ων γ]Λ̣[ω]Σ̣Σ̣[η προσευχεσθω …]

1 1

Sanders read προφηεύητ[ε] [sic] in place of περισσεύητε. This reading is attested also in A, 73, and Ambrosiaster. Sanders refers to it as an “easy scribal error.” This Western reading may be a simple confusion as Sanders asserts, but the meaning is significantly altered. Because of further darkening of the page this reading can no longer be confirmed.

p.11 (1 Cor 14:22) [εισιν ου τοις πι]Σ̣Τ̣Ε̣ΥΟ ̣ Υ ̣ Σ ̣ ̣ΙΝ ̣ ·̣ Α̣[λλα] [τοις απιστοις η δε προφητεια ου …]

1

Sanders has “. . . . . . . λ . . . . . . . . . . .” written as a superscription. The lone lambda that was at one time visible a bit higher up on the page is currently very blackened, so much so that it has not been included as a superscription. Were it to be included as part of the text it would be placed in square brackets. About it, Sanders writes “The superscription cannot be read before the letter λ.” 2 Sanders was able to read part of this line as δε] π̣ροφη̣[τεια.

Sanders estimated that page 8 contained 1 Cor 13:6–8 and that page 9 contained 1 Cor 14:3–5. In his transcription, he estimated that, had the letters been visible, there would have about 20 characters on page 8 and 22 characters on page 9 (he represented these approximated missing characters with a single line of dots). 2

48

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016)

p.12 (1 Cor 14:32–33) 1

2 3

Π̣ΝΤ ̣ ̣Α̣ Π̣Ρ[̣ οφητων προφηταις] [υποτασσεται ου γαρ εστιν] [ακαταστασιας ο θ(εο)ς αλλ’ ειρηνης …] Sanders was able to read part of this line as υπ̣οτ̣ α̣[σσεται. Sanders was able to read part of this line as [ακα]τ̣α̣σ̣[τασιας.

p.13 (1 Cor 15:3) ΙΖ 1

[παρελαβον οτι Χ(ριστο)ς] ΑΠΕΘΑΝΕΝ [υπερ των αµαρτιων ηµω]Ν̣ Κ̣ΑΤ ̣ ̣Α̣ [τας γραφας]

The quire number ΙΖ (17) appears in the upper right corner with a decorative horizontal stroke both above and below the letters.

p.14 (1 Cor 15:15) 1

1

ΕΥΡΙΣΚΟΜΕ̣Θ[̣ α δε και ψευδοµαρ] Τ̣ΥΡ ̣ Ε ̣ ̣Σ̣ Τ̣ΟΥ ̣ ̣ [θ(εο)υ οτι εµαρτυρη] [σαµεν …] Sanders omits the line over the enlarged epsilon, but it is certainly present. In this example it signifies the beginning of a sentence.

p.15 (1 Cor 15:27–28) 1

5

[οταν δε ειπ]Η̣ Ο̣ΤΙ ΠΑΝΤΑ ΫΠΟΤΕ [τακται δη]Λ̣ΟΝ ̣ ̣ Ο̣Τ̣Ι̣ ΕΚΤΟΣ ΤΟ̣Υ Ϋ [ποταξαντος αυτω] Τ̣Α̣ ΠΑΝΤΑ· [οταν δε υποταγη αυ]Τ̣Ω̣ ΤΑ ΠΑΝ [τα τοτε και αυτος ο] Υ̣ΙΟ ̣ Σ ̣ ̣ Υ̣ΠΟΤΑ [γησεται τω υποταξαντι αυτω τα παντα …]

TRANSCRIPTION OF CODEX I 1

5

49

𝔓46, B, 33 and other witnesses omit ὅτι, which is restored here with hesitation. Sanders omits the organic diaeresis over the upsilon, but he includes one over the upsilon ending the second line; the first one, however, is just as visible if not more so than the one on the second line. The length of text missing at the beginning of this line indicates that the fragment read καί against B, D*, and others. Notably, the nomen sacrum is not used for υἱός.

p.16 (1 Cor 15:38–39) 1

1 2 3 4

Τ̣Ω̣ Δ̣ΙΔ ̣ Ω ̣ Σ ̣ ̣ΙΝ ̣ ̣ Σ̣ΩΜ ̣ Α ̣ ̣ [καθως ηθελη] Σ̣Ε̣ Κ̣ΑΙ̣ ̣ [εκαστω των σπερµα] ΤΩΝ Τ̣Ο̣ Ι̣ΔΙ̣ Ο ̣ Ν ̣ ̣ [σωµα ου πασα σαρξ η] Α̣ΥΤ ̣ ̣Η̣ [σαρξ αλλ’ αλλη µεν ανθρωπων …] The fragment omits αὐτῷ following δίδωσιν. This reading is unique to I. The scribe mistakenly omits the ν of ἠθέλησεν taking it to be a moveable-ν. The fragment reads τὸ ἴδιον with ℵc, K, L, Ψ, et al. Sanders has a raised dot following αὐτή which is not currently visible with any certainty. Also, he changes the word order (ἀλλὰ ἄλλη µὲν σάρξ ἀνθρώπων), diverging from his base text of Westcott-Hort. However, the grounds on which this change is made are somewhat uncertain and, based on the manuscript page as currently represented in both the color and MSI images the manuscript is broken off after eta with only a small remant of ink that could be part of the following letter.

p.17 (1 Cor 15:49–50) 1

[εικονα του χοικ]Ο̣Υ ΦΟ̣ΡΕΣΟΜ̣Ε [και την εικονα] ΤΟΥ ΕΠΟΥΡΑΝΙΟΥ· [τουτο δε φηµι α]Δ̣Ε̣ΛΦ ̣ Ο ̣ Ι ΟΤΙ ΣΑ̣ΡΞ [και αιµα βασιλειαν θ(εο)]Υ̣ [κληρο] [νοµησαι …]

50 1 3 4

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016) 𝔓46, ℵ, A, C, D, et al. read φορέσωµεν, but the subjunctive could have been intended here through the simple interchange of ω and ο. Line length suggests that the fragment read δέ instead of γάρ (D, F, G, b, et al.). Sanders’ edition gave the ending of the line as ]θ̣υ̣ κ̣ληρο, thus clarifying that the fragment did not follow the word order (οὐ κληρονοµήσουσιν) of F, G, ar, vgms, bo, et al., which is likely a harmonization to Gal 5:21.

p.18 (1 Cor 16:1–2) 1

ΕΚΚΛΗΣΙΑΙΣ ΤΗΣ ΓΑ̣Λ[̣ ατιας ουτως] ΚΑΙ ΥΜΕ̣ΙΣ ̣ ̣ ΠΟΙ̣ΗΣ ̣ ̣[ατε κατα µιαν σαβ] ΒΑ̣Τ̣ΟΥ Ε̣Κ[̣ αστος υµων παρ εαυτω] ΤΙΘ̣Ε̣Τ̣[ω θησαυριζων ο τι εαν ευοδωται …]

2–3 The fragment preserves the genitive singular instead of the plural σαββάτων of ℵ2, K, L, et. al.

p.19 (1 Cor 16:12–13) 1

4

[ινα ελθη π]ΡΟΣ ΥΜΑ̣Σ̣ Μ̣ΕΤΑ ΤΩΝ̣ Α̣ [δελφων και παντως] ΟΥΚ ΗΝ Θ̣Ε̣ [ληµα ινα νυν ελθη ελ]Ε̣ΥΣΕΤΑΙ ΔΕ [οταν ευκαιρηση γρηγορ]ΕΙΤΑΙ l. γρηγορεῖτε.

p.20 (2 Cor 1:1) 1

5

†

ΠΡΟΣ ΚΟΡΙΝ[ΘΙΟΥΣ Β]

ΠΑΥΛΟΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΟΣ Χ̣Υ̣ [Ι(ησο)υ δια θελη] ΜΑΤΟ̣Σ̣ Θ̣[(εο)υ και] Τ̣ΙΜ ̣ [̣ οθεος ο αδελφος] ΤΗ ΕΚΚΛ̣Η[̣ σια του θ(εο)υ τη ουση εν] ΚΟΡΙΝ[θω συν τοις αγιοις πασιν τοις ουσιν …]

TRANSCRIPTION OF CODEX I

1 2

51

There is a staurogram in the upper left corner of the page. What is visible of the superscription heading (Πρὸς Κοριν[θίους β’]) has decorative lines both above and below the letters. The nomen sacrum can be restored within the brackets based on the length of the line. A supralinear stroke and ekthesis designate the beginning of 2 Cor. 1:1, and is the typical format for the opening of each epistle in Codex I.

p.21 (2 Cor 1:9) 1

4

[εαυτοις το αποκριµα] ΤΟΥ ΘΑΝΑ [του εσχηκαµεν ινα µ]Η̣ ΠΕΠΟΙΘΟ [τες ωµεν εφ’ εαυτοις αλλ’ επι τ]Ω̣ [θ(ε)ω τω εγειροντι τους νε]Κ̣ΡΟ ̣ Υ ̣ [̣ ς·] Sanders’ edition gave the end of the line as ν]εκρους·, and so the mid-point punctuation has been retained within the brackets.

p.22 (2 Cor 1:16–17) 1

5 2

ΝΑΙ ΕΙΣ Τ[ην Ιουδαιαν τουτο ουν] ΒΟΥΛΟΜ̣Ε̣[νος µητι αρα τη ελαφρια] ΕΧΡ̣Η[̣ σαµην η α βουλευοµαι κατα] ΣΑΡ[κα βουλευοµαι ινα η παρ εµοι] ΤΟ Ν̣[αι ναι και το ου ου …] βουλευόµενος is the reading of D, K, Ψ, et al. Although NA28 records Ιvid, the text confidently reads βουλόµενος with 𝔓46.99, ℵ, A, B, C, D and other early witnesses. The second line is set off by ekthesis, and the first letter is demarcated by a supralinear stroke. The word signals the sense break that occurs in the previous line with τοῦτο οὖν.

52

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016)

p.23 (2 Cor 2:3–4) 1

5

[η εµη χαρα παντων υµ]ΩΝ ΕΣΤΙ [εκ γαρ πολλης θλιψε]ΩΣ̣ ΚΑΙ ΣΥ [οχης καρδιας εγραψα υµ]Ι̣Ν̣ Δ̣ΙΑ ̣ [πολλων δακρυων ουχ ι]Ν̣Α̣ ΛΥ[πη] [θητε αλλα την αγαπην ινα] Γ̣ΝΩ ̣ [τε ην εχω περισσοτερως εις υµ]Α̣Σ̣

p.24 (2 Cor 2:14) 1

3

Π̣ΑΝ ̣ Τ ̣ ̣ΟΤ ̣ ̣Ε Θ̣[ριαµβευοντι ηµας] [εν] Τ̣Ω̣ Χ̣Ω̣ [και την οσµην της] [γνωσεως αυτου φανερουντι δι η] [µ]Ω̣[ν εν παντι τοπω …] Sanders read the beginning of this line as γ̣ν̣ωσ ̣ εω̣[ς.

p.25 (2 Cor 3:6–7) 1

4

[… το γαρ γ]Ρ̣ΑΜ ̣ Μ ̣ Α ̣ ̣ ΑΠ̣Ο [κτεννει το δε πν(ευµ)α ζ]ΩΟ̣ΠΟ ̣ Ι̣ Ε ̣ ̣Ι̣ [ει δε η διακονια του θανα]Τ̣Ο[̣ υ ε]Ν̣ [γραµµασιν εντετυπωµενη] Λ̣[ιθ]Ο̣[ις] The amount of text missing at the beginning of the line cannot definitively rule out the possibility that the fragment read γράµµατι with B, D*.c, F, G syp or the expansion ἐν λίθοις of ℵ2, D1, K, L, et al.

p.26 (2 Cor 3:16–18) 1

5

ΗΝΙΚΑ Δ Α̣Ν̣ Ε̣Π[̣ ιστρεψη προς κ(υριο)ν] ΠΕΡΙΕΡ̣[ειται το καλυµµα ο δε κ(υριο)ς] Τ̣Ο ΠΝΑ̣ Ε̣[στιν ου δε το πν(ευµ)α κ(υριο)υ] Ε̣ΛΕΥ̣ΘΕ̣[ρια ηµεις δε παντες ανα] Κ̣Ε̣Κ[̣ αλυµµενω προσωπω την δοξαν κ(υριο)υ …]

TRANSCRIPTION OF CODEX I

1 2 3

53

The scribe does not mark the elision of δέ (see Blass-Debrunner, §17, Wayment, Scribal Characteristics, 255, 258). There is potential assimilation to LXX Ex. 34:34. l. περιαιρεῖται. Some witnesses add ἐκεῖ following κυρίου (ℵ2, D1, F, G, K, L, et al.), but the line appears to be too long to include the addition of the adverb.

p.27 (2 Cor 4:6–7) 1

5 1

[… γνωσεως της δοξ]Η̣Σ̣ [το]Υ̣ ΘΥ ΕΝ ΠΡΟΣΩ [πω Ι(ησο)υ Χ(ριστο)υ εχο]Μ̣Ε̣[ν δε τ]ΟΝ ΘΗΣΑΥ [ρον τουτον εν] Ο̣Σ̣[τρακι]ΝΟΙΣ ΣΚΕΥ [εσιν ινα η υπερβολη τ]Η̣Σ̣ ΔΥΝΑ [µεως η του θ(εο)υ και µη εξ η]Μ̣ΩΝ· Sanders included another τοῦ following the nomen sacrum. However, the fragment, at least in its present state, does not appear to read that way. What he saw as the omicron and upsilon of τοῦ appears, instead, to be the θ and υ of the nomen sacrum θ(εο)ῦ. In addition, the placement of a second τοῦ would not make very good sense grammatically—adding it would appear to require an attributive pronoun modifying τοῦ θεοῦ, and there does not seem to be a good reason for doing so. Unfortunately, there are significant breaks in the preceding section of this line which prevent the confirmation of either reading with absolute certainty. It is possible that the text read τοῦ θεοῦ αὐτοῦ or something similar with C*, D*, F, G, b, r. The fragment does not omit τῆς δόξης with 33 vgms.

p.28 (2 Cor 4:16–17) 1

5

Α̣ΝΟΣ ΔΙΑΦΘ̣[ειρεται αλλ’ ο εσω] ΑΝΑΚΕΝ[ουται ηµερα και ηµερα] ΤΟ ΓΑΡ ΠΑ̣Ρ[̣ αυτικα ελαφρον της θλι] ΨΕΩΣ̣ [ηµων καθ υπερβολην εις] Υ̣[περβολην αιωνιον βαρος δοξης …]

54

2

3 4

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016)

It is impossible to determine if the fragment read ἔσωθεν with K, L, 629, et al. If the line included ἡµῶν following ἔσω, it would then be several letters too long, which would rule out the reading of ἔσωθεν ἡµῶν with D1, Ψ, 1505. l. ἀνακαινοῦται. The supralinear stroke denotes a sentence break in the text beginning with τό. The text reads παραυτίκα instead of πρόσκαιρον καί with D*, F, G, et al. Some important witnesses do not read ἡµῶν (𝔓46 and B), but the text is too fragmentary to confirm.

p.29 (2 Cor 5:8–10) ΙΗ 1

[… εκ του σωµατος και ε]Ν̣ΔΗΜΗΣΑΙ Π̣Ρ[̣ ος] [τον κ(υριο)ν διο και φιλο]ΤΙΜΟΥΜΕΘΑ [ειτε ενδηµουντες ε]ΙΤ̣Ε ΕΚΔΗ [µουντες ευαρεστοι αυ]Τ̣Ω ΕΙΝΑ̣Ι [τους]

The quire number ΙΗ (18) appears in the upper right corner with a decorative horizontal stroke both above and below the letters.

p.30 (2 Cor 5:17–19) 1

5

ΠΑΡΗΛΘΕΝ Ι̣[δυο γεγονεν καινα τα] ΔΕ ΠΑΝΤΑ [εκ του θ(εο)υ του καταλλαξαν] ΤΟΣ ΗΜΑ̣[ς εαυτω δια Χ(ριστο)υ και δοντος] ΗΜΙΝ Τ̣[ην διακονιαν της καταλ] ΛΑ[γης· ως οτι θ(εο)ς ην εν Χ(ριστ)ω κο] Σ[µον καταλλασσων εαυτω . . .]

1–2 The text preserves the word order of 𝔓46, ℵ, C, D*, F, G, et al. καινὰ τὰ δὲ πάντα, instead of τὰ πάντα καινὰ with 6, 33, 81, et al. or καινὰ τὰ πάντα with D2, K, L, P, Ψ, et al. 5 Sanders read λ̣α̣γ̣η̣ς·̣ [.

TRANSCRIPTION OF CODEX I 6

55

The supralinear stroke at the beginning of the line signals a sense break following ὡς, which is indicated in modern editions by a comma. Sanders did not include any text from verse 19. However, it seems clear from both the color and MSI images that there is an enlarged sigma extending slightly into the margin on the line following the end of verse 18. The typical paragraphos appears above the sigma, but this sense break does not appear to be quite as strong as in other occasions.

p.31 (2 Cor 6:6–8) 1

5 5

[µακροθυµια] ΕΝ Χ̣[ρ]Η̣ΣΤ̣ΟΤΗΤΙ· ΕΝ [πν(ευµατ)ι αγιω εν αγα]Π̣Η̣ ΑΝΫΠΟΚΡΙ [τω εν λογω αληθεια]Σ̣ ΕΝ ΔΥΝΑ [µει θ(εο)υ δια των οπλων] ΤΗΣ ΔΙ [καιοσυνης των δεξιων και αριστερ]Ω̣Ν̣ [δια δοξης και ατιµιας] Δ̣ΙΑ This restored line is several letters longer than those near it. Although there are no manuscripts attesting to this variant, the omission of τῶν δεξιῶν would bring the line back to the appropriate length as it actually appears on the page, where the start of the visible letters aligns with the line above it.

p.32 (2 Cor 6:16–17) 1

5 3

ΚΑΙ ΕΣΟΜΑΙ [αυτων θ(εο)ς και αυτοι] ΕΣΟΝΤΑΙ Μ̣ΟΥ ̣ ̣ [λαος διο εξελθατε] ΕΚ ΜΕΣΟΥ [αυτων και αφορισθητε] ΛΕΓΕΙ ΚΣ̣ [και ακαθαρτου µη απτε] Σ̣Θ[̣ ε καγω εισδεξοµαι υµας . . .] The supralinear stroke and ekthesis signal the sense break following ἀφορίσθητε at the end of the line, or κύριος in line 5. The LXX text of Isa. 52:11 has a stronger sense break following ἀφορίσθητε.

56

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016)

p.33 (2 Cor 7:7–8) 1

5

̣ Γ ̣ ̣ΓΕ ̣ ̣ΛΛ ̣ Ω ̣ ̣ [η παρεκληθ]Η̣ ΕΦ ΥΜΙ̣Ν̣ Α̣ΝΑ [ηµιν την υµων] ΕΠ̣ΙΠ ̣ Ο ̣ Θ ̣ Η ̣ Σ ̣ ̣ΙΝ ̣ ̣ Τ̣Ο̣ [υµων οδυρµον] Τ̣ΟΝ̣ ΥΜΩ [ζηλον υπερ εµου ωσ]Τ̣Ε ΜΕ̣ Μ̣ΑΛ ̣ ΛΟ [χαρηναι οτι ει και ελυπησα] Υ̣ΜΑ ̣ Σ ̣ ̣

p.34 (2 Cor 7:13–14) 1

5 1

[… πα] ΡΑΚΛΗΣΕΙ ΫΜΩΝ ΠΕΡ[ισσοτερως] ΜΑΛΛΟΝ ΕΧΑΡΗ̣ΜΕ[ν επι τη χαρα] ΤΙΤΟΥ ΟΤΙ ΑΝ̣[απεπαυται το πν(ευµ)α αυ] ΤΟΥ ΑΠΟ Π̣[αντων υµων οτι ει τι] ΑΥΤ̣Ω Υ̣[περ υµων κεκαυχηµαι . . .] The text reads ὑµῶν instead of ἡµῶν. The variant shifts the meaning to “your comfort,” which appears to be a simple scribal error.

p.35 (2 Cor 8:6–7) 1

5 1

[ινα καθως] Π̣ΡΟΕ̣ΝΗ̣ΡΞ ̣ Α ̣ Σ ̣ ΘΑΙ ΟΥΤΩΣ [και επιτελεσ]Η̣ ΕΙΣ ΥΜΑΣ ΚΑΙ ΤΗ [χαριν ταυτην αλλ’ ω]Σ̣ΠΕ ̣ Ρ ΕΝ ΠΑ [τι περισσευετε πιστει] Κ̣ΑΙ̣ ̣ ΛΟΓΩ [και γνωσει και παση σπ]Ο̣ΥΔΗ ΚΑΙ [τη εξ ηµων εν υµιν αγα]Π̣Η̣ [ινα και] The text contains an otherwise unnattested variant προενηρξασθαι that might be an anticipation of verse 8 (προενήρξασθε), along with the interchange of αι for ε, which occurs 42 times throughout Codex I. The form may also represent an otherwise unattested form of the present middle/passive infinitive with the accusative Τίτον as subject (see Wayment, Scribal Characteristics, 254). 𝔓99 and B preserve the reading ἐνήρξατο.

TRANSCRIPTION OF CODEX I

57

p.36 (2 Cor 8:14–17) 1

5 1 3 4

ΪΣΟΤΗΣ ΚΑΘΩΣ ΓΕΓ̣[ραπται ο το πο] ΛΥ ΟΥΚ ΕΠΛΕΟΝΑ̣Σ̣[εν και ο το ολιγον] ΟΥΚ ΕΛΑΤΤ̣[ονησεν χαρις δε τω] ΘΩ ΤΩ ΔΙ̣Δ[̣ οντι την αυτην σπου] Δ̣ΗΝ Ϋ̣Π[̣ ερ υµων εν τη καρδια Τι] Τ̣ΟΥ̣ [οτι την µεν παρακλησιν εδεξατο …] There is a diacritical mark over the iota, which Sanders does not include, but it is difficult to determine whether it is a macron or diaeresis. l. ἠλαττόνησεν. The paragraphos signals a new sense unit beginning with χάρις in the previous line. The text reads διδόντι with ℵ, B, C, K, P, et al. The reading Ivid listed in the apparatus of NA28 is confirmed in this edition.

p.37 (2 Cor 8:24–9:1) 1

5 3

6

[της αγαπης υµω]Ν ΚΑΙ ΗΜΩΝ ΚΑΥΧΗ [σεως υπερ υµ]Ω̣Ν̣ ΕΙΣ ΑΥΤΟΥΣ Ε [δειξασθε εις προσ]Ω̣ΠΟ ̣ Ν ̣ ̣ ΤΩΝ ΕΚ [κλησιων περι µ]Ε̣Ν̣ Γ̣ΑΡ ̣ ΤΗΣ [διακονιας της εις τους αγ]Ι̣ΟΥ ̣ Σ [περισσον µοι εστιν το γρα]Φ̣ΕΙ It is uncertain whether the text should be restored ἐνδείξασθε or ἐνδεικνύµενοι following B, D*, F, G, et al. The length of the line would favor the shorter reading, which is attested in ℵ, C, D1, K, L, P, et al. The fragment almost certainly did not contain the longer reading περισσότερον attested in 𝔓46 and g.

p.38 (2 Cor 9:7–8) 1

ΕΚΑΣΤΟ̣Σ̣ ΚΑΘΩΣ Π[ροηρηται τη καρ] ΔΙΑ ΜΗ ΕΚ ΛΥΠΗΣ̣ [η εξ αναγκης ιλα] ΡΟΝ ΓΑΡ ΔΟΤ[ην αγαπα ο θ(εο)ς δυνατει]

58

5 1

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016) ΔΕ Ο ΘΣ Π[ασαν χαριν περισσευσαι] ΕΙΣ Υ[µας ινα εν παντι παντοτε πασαν …] The paragraph marker signals the beginning of a new sentence with 2 Cor. 9:7. Some manuscripts read προαιρεῖται (D, K, L, Ψ), but the fragmentary nature of the text makes it impossible to determine which reading should be restored.

p.39 (2 Cor 9:15–10:2) 1

5

[… χαρις] ΔΕ ΤΩ ΘΩ ΕΠΕΙ ΤΗ ΑΝΕΚΔΙΗ [γητω αυ]Τ̣ΟΥ ̣ ̣ Δ̣ΩΡ ̣ ΕΑ ΑΥΤΟΣ ΔΕ ΕΓΩ [Παυλος παρακ]Α̣ΛΩ ̣ ΥΜΑΣ ΔΙΑ ΤΗΣ [πραυτητος και ε]Π̣ΙΕ ̣ ΙΚΙΑΣ ΤΟΥ [Χ(ριστο)υ ος κατα προσωπον µ]ΕΝ ΤΑΠΙ [νος εν υµιν απων δε θ]Α̣Ρ[̣ ρ]Ω ΕΙΣ [υµας δεοµαι δε το µη παρων θ]Α̣Ρ̣ [ρησαι …]

The addition of δέ is also attested in ℵ2. Επει is an itacism for ἐπί. 4 The spelling ἐπιεικίας is also found in ℵ. 5–6 Ταπινός is an itacism for ταπεινός. 1

p.40 (2 Cor 10:8–10) 1

5

[… ουκ αισχυν] ΘΗΣΟΜΑΙ ΙΝΑ ΜΗ ΔΟΞΩ ΩΣ [αν εκ] ΦΟΒΕΙΝ ΫΜΑΣ ΔΙΑ ΤΩ̣[ν επιστολων] ΟΤΙ ΑΙ ΜΕΝ ΕΠΙΣ̣Τ̣[ολαι φησιν βα] ΡΙΑΙ ΚΑΙ ΙΣΧΥ̣[ραι η δε παρουσια του] ΣΩΜ[ατος ασθενης και ο λογος] ΕΞ[ο]Υ̣[θενηµενος …]

3 The word order µὲν ἐπιστολαί is attested in ℵ2, D, F, G, et al. 3–4 Βαρῖαι is an itacism for βαρεῖαι.

TRANSCRIPTION OF CODEX I

59

p.41 (2 Cor 10:17–11:2) 1

5

[εν κ(υρι)ω κα]ΥΧΑΣΘΩ· Ο̣Υ̣ ΓΑΡ Ο ΕΑΥΤΟ [συνιστα]Ν̣ΩΝ ̣ ̣ ΕΚΕΙΝΟΣ ΕΣΤΙΝ [δοκιµος αλλα] Ο̣Ν̣ Ο ΚΣ ΣΥΝΪΣΤΗΣΙ [οφελον ανειχεσ]Θ̣ΑΙ̣ ̣ ΜΟΥ ΜΙΚΡΟ [τι αφροσυνης αλλα και α]ΝΕΧΕ [σθε µου ζηλω γαρ υµας θ(εο)]Υ̣ ΖΗ [λω …]

The raised dot following καυχάσθω signals the sense break between verse 17 and 18 of 2 Cor. 10. 2–3 𝔓46 and ℵ attest δόκιµός ἐστιν. 3 𝔓46 omits ὁ before κύριος. 4 l. ἀνέχεσθε. 5 The length of the line would suggest that τι before ἀφροσύνης was not omitted with F, G, H, K, L, et al. 1

p.42 (2 Cor 11:9–10) 1

5

[… το γαρ υστε] ΡΗΜΑ̣ Μ̣ΟΥ Π̣ΡΟ̣Σ̣[ανεπληρωσαν οι α] ΔΕΛΦΟΙ̣ Ε̣ΛΘ ̣ Ο ̣ Ν ̣ Τ ̣ ̣Ε̣Σ̣ Α̣[πο Μακεδο] Ν̣ΙΑ ̣ Σ ̣ ̣ Κ̣ΑΙ̣ ̣ Ε̣Ν̣ Π̣ΑΝ ̣ Τ ̣ ̣[ι αβαρη εµαυτον] ΥΜΙΝ Ε̣Τ̣ΗΡ ̣ Η ̣ [̣ σα και τηρησω] ΕΣΤ ̣ Ι̣[ν αληθεια Χ(ριστο)υ εν εµοι οτι η] [κ]Α̣Υ[̣ χησις αυτη …]

3–4 ℵ2 attests ὑµῖν ἐµαυτόν. 5 The paragraphos signals the beginning of a new sense unit with 2 Cor 11:10.

p.43 (2 Cor 11:20–21) 1

5

[ει τις υµ]Α̣Σ̣ ΚΑΤΑ̣ΔΟΥΛΟΙ· ΕΙ ΤΙΣ [κατεσθιε]Ι̣ Ε̣Ι̣ Τ̣ΙΣ ̣ ΛΑΜΒΑΝΕΙ· ΕΙ [τις επαιρεται ει] Τ̣ΙΣ ̣ ΕΙΣ ΠΡΟΣΩ [πον υµας δερει κατα α]Τ̣ΙΜΙΑΝ [λεγω ως οτι ηµεις ησθενησα]Μ̣Ε̣

60

5

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016)

Although the final word cannot be confirmed in this new edition, Sanders read ἠσθενήσαµεν instead of ἠσθενήκαµεν with 𝔓46, ℵ, B, H, et al. ℵ* omits λέγω.

p.44 (2 Cor 11:28–29) 1 5 1

ΠΑΡΕΚΤΟΣ Η̣ Ε̣ΠΙ̣ Σ ̣ ̣ΥΣ ̣ ̣ΤΑΣ[ις µοι η κα] Θ ΗΜΕΡΑΝ̣ Η̣ Μ̣[ε]Ρ̣Ι[̣ µνα πασων των] ΕΚΚΛΗΣΙΩ̣Ν [τις ασθενει και ου] Κ ΑΣΘΕ̣[νω τις σκανδαλιζεται και] ΟΥ̣Κ̣ [εγω πυρουµαι …] ἐπισύστασις is the reading of Hc, K, L, P, et al.

p.45 (2 Cor 12:6–7) ΙΘ 1

5

[αληθε]Ι̣ΑΝ ΓΑΡ ΕΡΩ· ΦΙΔΟΜΑΙ ΔΕ [µη τις ε]ΙΣ̣ Ε̣ΜΕ ΛΟΓΙΣΗΤΑΙ ΫΠΕΡ [ο βλεπει µ]Ε Η Α̣ΚΟ ̣ ΥΕΙ ΕΞ ΕΜΟΥ ΚΑΙ [τη υπερβολη των α]ΠΟΚΑΛΥΨΕΩ [διο ινα µη υπεραιρωµ]Α̣Ι ΕΔΟΘΗ [µοι σκολοψ τη σαρκι] Α̣ΓΓ ̣ ̣Ε̣ΛΟ ̣ Σ ̣ ̣ [σατανα ινα µε κολαφιζη ινα µ]Η̣

The quire number ΙΘ (19) appears in the upper right corner with a decorative horizontal stroke both above and below the letters. 1 l. φείδοµαι. 2 𝔓46 omits εἰς. 3 A number of early witnesses also omit τι following ἀκούει (ℵ*, B, D2, F, G, et al.). 5 Some witnesses omit διό, but the length of the line suggests that Codex I read διό with ℵ, A, B, F, G, et al. 7 The phrase ἵνα µὴ ὑπεραίρωµαι is absent from ℵ*, A, D, F, G, et al. The only visible letter in this line is η, which appears to

TRANSCRIPTION OF CODEX I

61

confirm the presence of the phrase, but the line is too fragmentary to restore it with confidence. Sanders’ edition read the end of the line as ] ι̣ν̣α̣ µη̣, thus offering greater support to the restoration given in this edition.

p.46 (2 Cor 12:14–15) 1

5

2 4 6

ΕΛΘΕΙΝ ΠΡΟΣ ΫΜΑ̣Σ̣ ΚΑΙ ΟΥ [καταναρ] ΚΗΣΩ ΫΜΩΝ ΟΥ ΓΑΡ [ζητω τα υµων] ΑΛΛΑ ΫΜΑΣ ΟΥ ΓΑΡ ΟΦ̣[ειλει τα τεκνα] ΤΟΙΣ ΓΟΝΕΥΣΙ̣[ν θησαυριζειν αλλα οι] ΓΟΝΕΙΣ̣ [τοις τεκνοις εγω δε ηδιστα] ΔΑΠΑΝΗ[σω και εκδαπανηθησοµαι υπερ] ΤΩ̣Ν̣ Ψ̣[υχων υµων . . .] Codex I includes ὑµῶν following καταναρκήσω with ℵ, A, B. 𝔓46 has a word order variant θησαυρίζειν τοῖς γονεῦσιν. The beginning of the line is accentuated by ekthesis, but there is not a corresponding supralinear mark. The most significant sense break is in the previous line (ἐγώ).

p.47 (2 Cor 13:1–2) 1

5

[τριτο]Ν ΤΟΥΤΟ ΕΡΧΟΜΑΙ ΠΡΟΣ ΥΜΑΣ [επι στ]Ο̣ΜΑ ̣ Τ ̣ ̣ΟΣ ̣ ̣ ΔΥΟ Η ΤΡΙΩΝ ΜΑΡ [τυρων στ]Α̣ΘΗΣΕΤΑΙ ΠΑΝ ΡΗΜΑ [προειρηκα και π]Ρ̣ΟΛΕΓΩ ΩΣ ΠΑΡΩ [το δευτερον και] Α̣ΠΩ ̣ Ν ΝΥΝ ΤΟΙΣ [προηµαρτηκοσιν] Κ̣ΑΙ̣ ΤΟΙΣ ΛΟΙ [ποις πασιν οτι εαν ελθω εις] Τ̣Ο̣

2–3 Codex I preserves a reading that is also attested in ℵ, which appears to be an abbreviation of the quotation from Deut. 19:15 δύο ἢ τριῶν µαρτύρων. The LXX’s καὶ τριῶν has been altered to “or three.” Sanders marked η with a smooth breathing, but the breathing mark is difficult to confirm in the available photographs.

62 5 7

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016) The text does not read νῦν γράφω with D2, K, L, P, et al. 𝔓46, F, and G omit εἰς τό. The fragmentary state of line 7 makes it uncertain whether the text read εἰς τό.

p.48 (2 Cor 13:10–11) 1

5

1 6

ΔΙΑ ΤΟΥΤΟ ΤΑΥΤΑ ΑΠΩΝ ΓΡ̣ΑΦ ̣ [̣ ω ινα] ΠΑΡΩΝ ΜΗ ΑΠΟΤΟΜΩ̣Σ̣ Χ̣[ρησωµαι] ΚΑΤΑ ΤΗΝ ΕΞΟΥΣΙΑ̣Ν̣ [ην ο κ(υριο)ς εδω] ΚΕΝ ΜΟΙ ΕΙΣ Ο̣[ικοδοµην και ουκ εις] ΚΑΘΑΙΡΕ̣Σ̣ΙΝ ̣ ̣ [λοιπον αδελφοι] ΧΑΙΡΕΤΕ̣ [καταρτιζεσθε παρακα] Λ̣Ε̣[ισθε το αυτο φρονειτε ειρηνευετε …] The first letter of the line with its supralinear stroke designates a sense break beginning at 2 Cor 13:10. ἀπῶν ταῦτα is the reading of 𝔓46. Ekthesis marks the beginning of a new sense unit at λοιπὸν ἀδελφοί in the previous line.

p.49 (Gal 1:1–3) 1

5

1 2

Π̣ΡΟ ̣ Σ ΓΑΛΑΤΑΣ

†

[Παυλος α]ΠΟΣΤΟΛΟΣ ΟΥΚ ΑΠ ΑΝΩΝ [ουδε δι αν(θρωπ)ο]Υ̣ ΑΛΛΑ ΔΙΑ ΙΥ ΧΥ ΚΑΙ ΘΥ [π(ατ)ρ(ο)ς του εγειραν]ΤΟΣ ΑΥΤΟΝ ΕΚ ΝΕ [κρων και οι συν] Ε̣ΜΟ ̣ Ι ΠΑΝΤΕΣ ΑΔΕΛ [φοι ταις εκκλησιαι]Σ̣ Τ̣ΗΣ ̣ ΓΑΛΑΤΙ [ας χαρις υµιν και ειρ]Η̣ΝΗ ΑΠ̣Ο̣ There is a staurogram in the upper right corner of the page. The superscription heading (ΠΡΟΣ ΓΑΛΑΤΑΣ) has decorative lines both above and below the letters. This line was almost certainly set of with ekthesis and a paragraphos.

TRANSCRIPTION OF CODEX I 3

63

Sanders’ edition does not indicate the use of the nomen sacrum for ἀνθρώπου, but the supralinear stroke above υ is visible in the new photographs.

p.50 (Gal 1:11–13) 1

5 3 3 4

ΚΑΤΑ ΑΝΟΝ ΟΥΔΕ ΓΑΡ Ε̣Γ̣Ω̣ [παρα αν(θρωπ)ου] ΠΑΡΕΛΑΒΟΝ ΑΥΤΟ ΟΥ[τε εδιδαχθην] ΑΛΛΑ ΔΙΑ ΑΠΟΚΑ̣ΛΥ̣[ψεως Ι(ησο)υ Χ(ριστο)υ] ΗΚΟΥΣΑΤΑΙ ΓΑΡ̣ [την εµην αναστρο] ΦΗΝ ΠΟΤΕ Ε̣[ν τω Ιουδαισµω οτι] ΚΑΘ ΫΠ̣[ερβολην εδιωκον την . . .] The text is too fragmentary to determine whether it read οὐδέ with ℵ, A, D*.c, F, G, et al. A also reads διὰ ἀποκαλύψεως instead of δι. Ekthesis denotes the beginning of Gal. 1:13.

p.51 (Gal 1:22–2:1) 1

5 1

[τα]Ι̣Σ̣ Ε̣ΚΚ ̣ Λ ̣ Η ̣ Σ ̣ Ι̣ Α ̣ Ι̣ Σ ̣ ̣ ΤΗΣ ΙΟΥΔΑΙΑΣ ΤΑΙΣ Ε [Χ(ριστ)ω µον]Ο̣Ν̣ Δ̣Ε̣ Α̣ΚΟΥ̣ΟΝ ̣ ΤΕΣ ΗΣΑΝ [οτι ο διωκων] Η̣ΜΑ ̣ Σ ̣ ̣ Π̣ΟΤΕ ΝΥΝ ΕΥ [αγγελιζεται την π]Ι̣Σ̣Τ̣ΙΝ ̣ ̣ Η̣Ν Π̣ΟΤ ̣ ̣Ε [επορθει και εδοξαζο]Ν̣ Ε̣Ν̣ Ε̣Μ[̣ οι] [τον θ(εο)ν επειτα δια δεκατ]Ε̣[σσα] A reads ἐκκλησίας. The letters at end of the line, ΑΣ ΤΑΙΣ Ε, are written in a cramped style and extend into the margin. The handwriting may be that of another scribe, but it may also be that the original scribe attempted to fit the letters into a smaller than usual space. The size of the τ in ταῖς is exaggerated.

p.52 (Gal 2:8–9) 1

ΤΗΣ ΠΕΡΙΤΟΜΗΣ ΕΝΗΡΓΗ[σεν και ε] ΜΟΙ ΕΙΣ ΤΑ ΕΘΝΗ· [και γνοντες την]

64

5

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016) ΧΑΡΙΝ ΤΗΝ ΔΟΘ̣Ε̣ΙΣ[αν µοι Ιακωβος] ΚΑΙ ΚΗΦΑΣ ΚΑ̣[ι Ιωαννης οι δοκουν] ΤΕΣ ΣΤΥΛ̣ΟΙ̣ [ειναι δεξιας εδωκαν] ΕΜΟ[ι και βαρναβα κοινωνιας . . .]

The mid-point punctuation following ἔθνη signals the end of a sentence. 3–4 A reads Ἰάκωβος but omits καὶ Κηφᾶς. 𝔓46 reads Ἰάκωβος καὶ Πέτρος, and D, F, G, et al. read Πέτρος καὶ Ἰάκωβος. 2

p.53 (Gal 2:16–17) 1

5 1 3 6

[εις Χ(ριστο)ν] ΙΝ ΕΠΙΣΤΕΥΣΑΜΕΝ ΙΝΑ ΔΙ [καιωθωµεν] ΕΚ ΠΙΣΤΕΩΣ ΧΥ [και ουκ εξ εργων] Ν̣ΟΜΟΥ ΟΤΙ ΕΞ ΕΡ [γων νοµου ου δικ]ΑΙΩΘΗΣΕΤΑΙ [πασα σαρξ ει δε ζητ]ΟΥΝΤΕΣ ΔΙ [καιωθηναι εν Χ(ριστ)ω ευρεθ]ΗΜΕΝ 𝔓46, Β, Η, et al. attest to the word order Ἰησοῦν Χριστόν. A number of witness read διότι in place of ὅτι (C, D2, H, K, L, et al.). 𝔓46 reads εὑρεθῶµεν.

p.54 (Gal 3:6–8) 1

5 1

ΚΑΘΩΣ ΑΒΡΑΑΜ ΕΠ̣ΙΣΤΕ[υσεν τω] ΘΩ ΚΑΙ ΕΛΟΓΙΣΘ[η αυτω εις δικαι] ΟΣΥΝΗΝ· ΓΙ[νωσκετε αρα οτι οι] ΕΚ ΠΙΣΤΕΩ̣[ς ουτοι υιοι εισιν α] ΒΡΑΑΜ· Π̣[ροιδουσα δε η γραφη] ΟΤΙ ΕΚ̣ [πιστεως δικαιοι τα εθνη …]

The ekthesis and the paragraphos signal the beginning of Gal. 3:6. 2, 5 The mid-point punctuation signals the end of a sentence in both examples. 6 Ekthesis indicates a new sense unit that begins with προϊδοῦσα.

TRANSCRIPTION OF CODEX I

65

p.55 (Gal 3:16–17) 1

5

1 5 7

̣ Ε̣ΡΡΕΘΗΣΑΝ ΑΙ ΕΠΑΓ [τω δε α]Β̣ΡΑ̣ΑΜ [γελιαι] Κ̣ΑΙ̣ ̣ Τ̣Ω ΣΠΕΡΜΑΤΙ ΑΥΤΟΥ [ου λεγει και] Τ̣ΟΙ̣ Σ ̣ ̣ Σ̣ΠΕ ̣ ΡΜΑΣΙΝ ΩΣ [επι πολλων] Α̣ΛΛ ̣ ̣ Ω̣Σ̣ Ε̣Φ ΕΝΟΣ ΚΑΙ [τω σπερµατι σου] Ο̣Σ̣ Ε̣ΣΤΙΝ ΧΣ· [τουτο δε λεγω διαθη]Κ̣ΗΝ ΠΡΟΚΕ [κυρωµενην υπο του θ(εο)υ ει]Σ̣ Χ̣Ν̣ B2 reads ἐρρήθησαν. D*, Fc, et al. read ὅ in place of ὅς, and F*, G read οὗ. The midpoint punctuation at the end of the line signals the end of a sentence. Sanders’ edition is slightly more confident in restoring the end of the line, ]ε̣ι̣ς̣ χ(ριστο)ν. The text is less legible today, and so the brackets have been moved in this edition. This is significant because Codex I is cited as a witness in NA28 for the variant εἰς Χριστόν following θεοῦ, a reading that is also attested in D, F, G, K, L, et al.

p.56 (Gal 3:24–28) 1

5

[… γε] ΓΟΝΕΝ ΕΙΣ ΧΝ ΙΝΑ ΕΚ ΠΙΣΤ[εως δι] ΚΑΙΩΘΩΜΕΝ· ΕΛΘΟΥΣΗ[ς δε της] ΠΙΣΤΕΩΣ ΟΥΚΕΤΙ ΫΠ̣Ο̣ Π̣[αιδαγωγον] ΕΣΜΕΝ ΠΑΝΤΕΣ Γ̣ΑΡ ̣ ̣ [υ(ιο)ι θ(εο)υ εστε δια] ΤΗΣ ΠΙΣΤΕΩ[ς εν Χ(ριστ)ω Ι(ησο)υ οσοι γαρ εις] ΧΝ ΕΒΑΠΤΙΣ̣[θητε Χ(ριστο)ν ενεδυσασθε] ΟΥΚ Ε̣ΝΙ̣ [Ιουδαιος ουδε Ελλην …]

1 𝔓46 and Β read ἐγένετο in place of γέγονεν. 2 The mid-point punctuation signals the end of a sentence. 3, 7 Ekthesis in the first example signals a sense break with ἐλθούσης while the second denotes the beginning of a new sentence. 5 𝔓46, P, et al. omit τῆς. 7 𝔓46 reads οὐκέτι in place of οὐκ.

66

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016)

p.57 (Gal 4:8–10) 1

5

[… εδουλευσατε τοις φυ] [σει] Μ̣Η̣ Ο̣ΥΣ ̣ Ι ΘΕΟΙΣ· ΝΥΝ ΔΕ ΓΝΟ [τες θ(εο)]Ν̣ Μ̣ΑΛΛΟ̣Ν̣ ΔΕ ΓΝΩΣΘΕΝΤΕΣ [υπο θ(εο)]Υ̣ Π̣ΩΣ ΕΠΙΣΤΡΕΦΕΤΑΙ [παλιν επι τα ασθ]Ε̣ΝΗ ΚΑΙ ΠΤΩΧΑ [στοιχεια οις παλιν α]ΝΩΘΕΝ ΔΟΥ [λευειν θελετε η]ΜΕΡΑΣ ΠΑΡΑ [τηρεισθε και µηνας και] ΚΑΙΡ̣ΟΥΣ

The scribe has omitted ν from οὖσιν, although Sanders included it in his edition. The mid-point dot signals the end of a sentence. 3 l. ἐπιστρέφετε. 5–6 ℵ, B read δουλεῦσαι. 6–7 𝔓46 reads παρατηροῦντες. 1

p.58 (Gal 4:20–23) 1

5

ΤΗΝ ΦΩΝΗΝ ΜΟΥ ΟΤΙ ΑΠ̣[ορουµαι] ΕΝ ΥΜΙΝ· ΛΕΓΕΤΑΙ ΜΟΙ ΟΙ [υπο νοµον] ΘΕΛΟΝΤΕΣ ΕΙΝΑΙ ΤΟΝ ΝΟ[µον ουκ α] ΚΟΥΕΤΑΙ· ΓΕΓΡ̣ΑΠ̣Τ̣[αι γαρ οτι Αβρα] ΑΜ ΔΥΟ ΫΪΟΥΣ [εσχεν ενα εκ της] ΠΑΙΔΙΣΚΗΣ [και ενα εκ της ελευ] ΘΕΡΑΣ ΑΛ̣Λ̣ [ο µεν εκ της παιδισκης] ΚΑ̣Τ̣[α σαρκα γεγεννηται …]

l. λέγετε. The mid-point punctuation signals the end of a paragraph and sentence. 3–4 l. ἀκούετε. D, F, G, et al. read ἀναγινώσκετε. 5 A nomen sacrum is not used in this non-sacred usage. Ekthesis indicates a new sense unit beginning with γέγραπται. 2

TRANSCRIPTION OF CODEX I

67

[There are four missing leaves here, including the beginning of the letter to the Ephesians]

p.59 (Eph 2:15–18) 1

5

3 4

[αν(θρωπ)ον] ΠΟΙΩΝ ΕΙΡΗΝΗΝ ΚΑΙ ΑΠΟΚΑ [ταλλ]Α̣ΞΗ ̣ ̣ ΤΟΥΣ ΑΜΦΟΤΕΡΟΥΣ ΕΝ [ενι σω]ΜΑΤΙ ΤΩ ΘΩ ΔΙΑ ΤΟΥ ΣΤΑΥ [ρου] Α̣ΠΟΚΤΙΝΑΣ ΤΗΝ ΕΧΘΡΑ [εν αυτω κα]Ι̣ Ε̣ΛΘ ̣ ΩΝ ΕΥΗΓΓΕΛΙΣΑ [το ειρηνην υµι]Ν ΤΟΙΣ ΜΑΚΡΑΝ ΚΑΙ [ειρηνην τοις εγγυς] ΟΤΙ ΔΙ ΑΥΤΟΥ [εχοµεν την προσαγωγην οι αµ]Φ̣Ο̣ [τεροι …] Sanders recorded the reading ιου in place of του, but the horizontal bar of tau is now visible in the multispectral images. l. ἀποκτείνας.

p.60 (Eph 3:6–8) 1

5

3 3–4 4 5 6

[… ευαγγε] ΛΙΟΥ ΟΥ ΕΓΕΝΗΘΗΝ ΔΙΑΚΟΝ̣[ος κατα] ΤΗΝ ΔΩΡΕΑΝ ΤΗΣ ΧΑΡΙΤΟΣ [του θ(εο)υ] ΤΗΣ ΔΟΘΕΙΣΗΣ ΜΟΙ ΚΑΤΑ Τ[ην ενερ] ΓΙΑΝ ΤΗΣ ΔΥΝΑΜΕΩΣ Α[υτου] ΕΜΟΙ ΤΩ ΕΛΑΧΙΣΤ̣ΟΤ ̣ ̣[ερω παντων] ΑΓΙΩΝ ΕΔΟΘΗ [η χαρις αυτη τοις] ΕΘΝΕΣΙΝ [ευαγγελισασθαι το ανε] ΞΙΧΝ[ιαστον πλουτος του Χ(ριστο)υ …] τὴν δοθεῖσαν is the reading of D2, K, L, Ψ, et al. l. ἐνέργειαν. 𝔓46 reads αὐτοῦ in place of τοῦ θεοῦ. Ekthesis here signals a break in the text to create a new paragraph. The previous line is slighly shorter as a result. ἁγίων is absent from 𝔓46.

68

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016)

p.61 (Eph 3:17–20) 1

5

[εξισχυσ]ΗΤΑΙ ΚΑΤΑΛΑΒΕΣΘΑΙ ΣΥΝ ΠΑΣΙ [τοις α]ΓΙΟΙΣ· ΤΙ ΤΟ ΠΛΑΤΟΣ ΚΑΙ ΜΗ [κος και] ΫΨΟΣ ΚΑΙ ΒΑΘΟΣ ΓΝΩΝΑΙ ΤΕ [την υπερ]Β̣ΑΛΛΟΥΣΑΝ ΤΗΣ ΓΝΩΣΕ [ως αγαπην του] ΧΥ ΙΝΑ ΠΛΗΡΩΘΗ [τε εις παν το πλη]Ρ̣ΩΜΑ ΤΟΥ ΘΥ· [τω δε δυναµενω υπερ] ΠΑΝΤΑ ΠΟΙ [ησαι υπερεκπερισσου ω]Ν ΑΙΤΟΥ [µεθα η νοουµεν κατα την] Δ̣ΥΝ ̣ Α ̣ ̣ [µιν …]

1 l. ἐξισχύσητε. 𝔓46 reads καταλαµβάνεσθαι. 2–3 The word order of µῆκος καὶ ὕψος καὶ βάθος follows that of 𝔓46, B, C, D, et al. against ℵ, A, K, L, et al. 4–5 Sanders read the end of the line as γνωσε·. The raised dot here (and there does, indeed, appear to be one) is most likely bleedover from the facing page. The correct reading would be γνώσεως and not γνωσε· ως. A reads ἀγάπην τῆς γνώσεως. 5 Sanders read γληρωθη, which is likely a typo in his edition rather than an alternate reading. 𝔓46 reads πληρωθῇ. 6 The mid-point punctuation signals the end of a sentence and paragraph, and therefore likely excludes the addition of εἰς ὑµᾶς attested in 33. The following line likely began with ekthesis and a paragraphos.

p.62 (Eph 4:9–11) 1

5

[ . . .το δε ανε] ΒΗ ΤΙ ΕΣΤΙΝ ΕΙ ΜΗ ΟΤΙ ΚΑΙ ΚΑ[τεβη εις] ΤΑ ΚΑΤΩΤΕΡΑ ΜΕΡΗ ΤΗΣ Γ̣Η[̣ ς] Ο ΚΑΤΑΒΑΣ ΑΥΤΟΣ ΕΣΤΙΝ Κ̣[αι ο αναβας] ΫΠΕΡΑΝΩ ΠΑΝΤΩΝ Τ[ων ουρανων] ΙΝΑ ΠΛΗΡΩΣΗ Τ̣[α παντα και αυτος] ΕΔΩΚΕΝ ΤΟΥΣ̣ [µεν αποστολους] ΤΟΥΣ ΔΕ [προφητας τους δε ευ] Α̣Γ̣Γ̣Ε̣Λ[̣ ιστας τους δε ποιµενας και …]

TRANSCRIPTION OF CODEX I 1 2 3 6

69

ℵ2, B, C3, K, L, et al. add πρῶτον after κατέβη. 𝔓46, D*, F, G, omit µέρη. 𝔓46 omits τά. Ekthesis signals the beginning of a new sense unit. 𝔓46 reads δέδωκεν.

p.63 (Eph 4:17–19) 1

5

[µηκετι υµ]Α̣Σ̣ Π̣ΕΡΙΠΑΤΕΙΝ ΚΑΘΩΣ ΚΑΙ [τα εθ]Ν̣Η̣ ΠΕΡΙΠΑΤΕΙ ΕΝ ΜΑΤΑΙΟΤΗ [τι του] Ν̣ΟΟΣ ΑΥΤΩΝ ΕΣΚΟΤΩΜΕ [νοι τη δι]Α̣ΝΟ ̣ Ι̣ Α ̣ ̣ ΟΝΤΕΣ ΑΠΗΛΛΟΤΡΙ [ωµενοι της] Ζ̣ΩΗΣ ΤΟΥ ΘΥ ΔΙΑ ΤΗ [αγνοιαν την ου]ΣΑΝ ΕΝ ΑΥΤΩ· ΔΙ [α την πωρωσιν της κ]Α̣ΡΔ ̣ Ι̣ ΑΣ ΑΥ [των οιτινες απηλγηκοτες ε]Α̣Υ̣

2 τὰ λοιπὰ ἔθνη ℵ2, D1, K, L, P, et al. 3–4 ἐσκοτισµένοι D, F, G, K, L, et al. 6 All other manuscripts read αὐτοῖς. The change creates a dramatic alteration in meaning by shifting the idea of the “ignorance that is in them” to “the ignorance that is in him.” See Wayment, Scribal Characteristics, 258.

p.64 (Eph 4:28–30) 1

5

1

ΤΟ ΑΓΑΘΟΝ ΙΝΑ ΕΧΗΤΑΙ ΜΕΤΑΔΙ̣[δοναι] ΤΩ ΧΡΙΑΝ ΕΧΟΝΤΙ· ΠΑΣ ΛΟΓ[ος σα] ΠΡΟΣ ΕΚ ΤΟΥ ΣΤΟΜΑΤΟΣ ΥΜ[ων µη] ΕΚΠΟΡΕΥΕΣΘΩ ΑΛΛΑ̣ Ε̣[ι τις αγαθος προς] ΟΙΚΟΔΟΜΗΝ ΤΗΣ̣ Χ̣ΡΕ ̣ ̣[ιας ινα δω χα] ΡΙΝ ΤΟΙΣ ΑΚΟΥΟ̣[υσιν και µη λυπει] ΤΑΙ ΤΟ ΠΝ[̣ (ευµ)α το αγιον του θ(εο)υ εν ω ε] Σ̣Φ[̣ ραγισθητε εις ηµεραν απολυτρωσεως …] The text appears to follow the word order of ℵ*, A, D, F, G, et al. ταῖς ἰδίαις χερσὶν τὸ ἀγαθόν, although ταῖς χερσὶν τὸ ἀγαθόν 𝔓46. 49vid, ℵ2, and B is possible. The reading of I changes

70

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016)

a third person present subjunctive active (ἔχῃ) to a third singular present middle/passive (ἔχεται), which is also the reading found in ℵ*. 2 l. χρείαν. D*, F, G, et al. read πίστεως. The mid-point punctuation signals the end of a sentence, followed by ekthesis in the following line. 6–7 l. λυπεῖτε.

p.65 (Eph 5:6–11) 1

5

10

[του θ(εο)υ] Ε̣ΠΙ̣ ΤΟΥΣ ΫΙΟΥΣ ΤΗΣ ΑΠΙΘΙΑΣ [µη ου]Ν̣ Γ̣ΙΝΕΣΘΑΙ ΣΥΜΜΕΤΟΧΟΙ ΑΥ [των η]Τ̣Ε ΓΑΡ ΠΟΤΕ ΣΚΟΤΟΣ ΝΥΝ ΔΕ [φως εν κ(υρι)]Ω ΩΣ ΤΕΚΝΑ ΦΩΤΟΣ [περιπατε]Ι̣ΤΕ Ο ΓΑΡ ΚΑΡΠΟΣ ΤΟΥ [φωτος εν πα]ΣΗ ΑΓΑΘΩΣΥΝΗ ΚΑΙ [δικαιοσυνη και α]ΛΗ̣ΘΕΙΑ· ΔΟΚΕΙ [µαζοντες τι εστιν ευαρ]Ε̣Σ̣ΤΟΝ [τω κ(υρι)ω και µη συγκοινωνει]Τ̣ΑΙ̣ ̣ [τοις εργοις τοις ακαρποις του …]

l. ἀπειθείας. 𝔓49 reads ἀπιστίας. υἱούς is left uncontracted, likely because it is used as a reference to “children of disobedience” and not to God’s son. Sanders read ]θ̣υ επι, thus confirming the use of the nomen sacrum. 2 l. γίνεσθε (𝔓49 preserves the same reading as I). 6 𝔓49, ℵ, A, B, D*, et al. read πνεύµατος in place of φωτός. 7 The mid-point punctuation signals a sense break in the text. 7–8 l. δοκιµάζοντες. 9 l. συγκοινωνεῖτε. D*, F, G, et al. read θεῷ in place of κυρίῳ. 10 Sanders was able to read part of this line as τ]ο̣[υ. 1

p.66 (Eph 5:20–24) 1

ΗΜΩΝ ΙΥ ΧΥ ΤΩ ΘΩ ΚΑΙ ΠΡ̣[ι υποτασ] ΣΟΜΕΝΟΙ ΑΛΛΗΛΟΙΣ ΕΝ ΦΟ̣[βω Χ(ριστο)υ] ΑΙ ΓΥΝΑΙΚΕΣ ΤΟΙΣ ΪΔΙΟΙΣ Α[νδρασιν] ΥΠΟΤΑΣΣΕΣΘΩΣΑΝ Ω[ς τω κ(υρι)ω οτι]

TRANSCRIPTION OF CODEX I

71

5

ΑΝΗΡ ΕΣΤΙΝ ΚΕΦΑΛ[η της γυναι] ΚΟΣ· ΩΣ ΚΑΙ Ο ΧΣ [κεφαλη της εκ] ΚΛΗΣΙΑΣ ΑΥΤΟ̣[ς σωτηρ του σωµατος] ΑΛΛΑ̣ Ω̣[ς η εκκλησια υποτασσεται] Τ̣[ω Χ(ριστ)ω …]

1 3 4

B reads Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ. 𝔓46, D*.2, F, G, et al. πατρὶ καὶ θεῷ. Ekthesis signals the beginning of a new sense unit. ὑποτασσόµενοι is the reading of 𝔓46 and B. The text here is supported by ℵ, A, P, et al., while D, F, G, K, L, et al. read ὑποτάσσεσθε. κεφαλή ἐστιν B, 0278, et al. καὶ αὐτός ἐστιν ℵ2, D1, K, L, P, et al. Ekthesis signals the beginning of a new sense unit. ὡς is absent from B, Ψ, et al.

5 7 8

p.67 (Eph 5:32–6:1) 1

5

2 6 7 8

[… το µυστη] [ριον] ΤΟΥΤΟ ΜΕΓΑ ΕΣΤΙΝ ΕΓΩ ΔΕ [λεγ]Ω̣ ΕΙΣ ΧΝ ΚΑΙ ΕΙΣ ΤΗΝ ΕΚΚΛΗ [σια]Ν̣ ΠΛΗΝ ΚΑΙ ΫΜΕΙΣ ΟΙ ΚΑΘ ΕΝΑ [εκαστο]Σ ΤΗΝ ΕΑΥΤΟΥ ΓΥΝΑΙΚΑ ΟΥ [τως αγαπ]Α̣ΤΩ ΩΣ ΕΑΥΤΟΝ Η ΔΕ ΓΥ [νη ινα φοβη]Τ̣ΑΙ̣ ̣ ΤΟΝ ΑΝΔΡΑ· ΤΑ ΤΕ [κνα υπακουετα]Ι̣ ΤΟΙΣ̣ [γ]Ο̣ΝΕΥΣΙΝ [υµων εν κ(υρι)ω τουτο γαρ ε]Σ̣[τ]Ι̣Ν̣ Δ̣[ι] [καιον …] B omits εἰς. The mid-point punctuation signals the end of a paragraph and sentence. l. ὑπακούετε. B, D*, F, G, et al. omit ἐν κυρίῳ, but the length of this line here would be unexpectedly short without the prepositional phrase.

72

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016)

p.68 (Eph 6:10–12) 1

5

1

2 3 4 5 6

ΤΟΥ ΛΟΙΠΟΥ ΕΝΔΥΝΑΜΟΥΣΘΕ̣ [εν κ(υρι)ω] ΚΑΙ ΕΝ ΤΩ ΚΡΑΤΙ ΤΗΣ ΪΣΧΥΟ̣[ς αυτου] ΕΝΔΥΣΑΣΘΑΙ ΤΗΝ ΠΑΝΟΠΛ̣ΙΑΝ̣ [του] ΘΥ ΠΡΟΣ ΤΟ ΔΥΝΑΣΘΑΙ Ϋ̣[µας στηναι] ΠΡΟΣ ΤΑΣ ΜΕΘΟΔΙΑΣ Τ̣Ο[̣ υ διαβολου] ΟΤΙ ΟΥΚ ΕΣΤΙΝ Η̣ΜΙ̣ [̣ ν η παλη προς] ΑΙΜΑ ΚΑΙ̣ Σ̣ΑΡ ̣ Κ ̣ Α ̣ ̣ [αλλα προς τας] Α̣ΡΧ ̣ Α ̣ [̣ ς προς τας εξουσιας …] The tau is not enlarged, but ekthesis signals a new paragraph. τὸ λοιπόν ℵ2, D, F, G, et al. Following τοῦ λοιποῦ, ℵ2, K, L, P, et al. add ἀδελφοί µου (ἀδελφοί F, G, Ψ). δυναµοῦσθε 𝔓46, Β, 33, et al. l. κράτει. l. ἐνδύσασθε. 𝔓46 omits ὑµᾶς. l. µεθοδείας. Codex I shares the spelling µεθοδίας with 𝔓46, ℵ, A, and B*. Ekthesis signals a sense break. 𝔓46, B, D*, F, G, et al. read ὑµῖν.

p.69 (Eph 6:19–21) ΚΑ 1

5

[και]̣ Ϋ̣ΠΕΡ ΕΜΟΥ· ΪΝΑ ΜΟΙ ΔΟΘΗ ΛΟΓΟΣ [εν] Α̣ΝΟΙΞΕΙ ΤΟΥ ΣΤΟΜΑΤΟΣ ΜΟΥ Ε [παρ]Ρ̣ΗΣ ̣ ΙΑ ΓΝΩΡΙΣΑΙ ΤΟ ΜΥΣΤΗΡΙ [ον του ε]ΥΑΓΓΕΛΙΟΥ ΫΠΕΡ ΟΥ ΠΡΕ [σβευω εν] Α̣ΛΥ ̣ Σ ̣ ΕΙ ΪΝΑ ΕΝ ΑΥΤΩ ΠΑΡ [ρησιασωµαι ω]Σ ΔΙ ΜΕ ΛΑΛΗΣΑΙ [ινα δε και υµεις] Ε̣ΙΔΗΤΕ ΤΑ ΚΑΤ Ε [µε τι πρασσω παντα γν]Ω̣ΡΙ̣ Σ ̣ ̣Ε̣Ι̣

The quire number ΚΑ (21) appears in the upper right corner with a decorative horizontal stroke both above and below the letters. The previous quire number (Κ or 20) was preserved on a page that is now missing.

TRANSCRIPTION OF CODEX I 1 4 6 7

73

ℵ* µοι δοθῇ. B, F, G, et al. omit τοῦ εὐαγγελίου. l. δεῖ. καὶ ὑµεῖς εἰδῆτε, the reading of Codex I, is also supported by ℵ, A, D, F, G, et al. B, K, L, et al. read εἰδῆτε καὶ ὑµεῖς.

p.70 (Phil 1:1–4) 1

5

†

ΠΡΟΣ ΦΙΛΙΠΠΙΣΙΟΥ̣Σ̣

ΠΑΥΛΟΣ ΚΑΙ ΤΙΜΟΘΕΟΣ ΔΟΥΛΟΙ Χ̣[(ριστο)υ Ι(ησο)υ] ΠΑΣΙΝ ΤΟΙΣ ΑΓΙΟΙΣ ΕΝ ΧΩ ΙΥ ΤΟ[ις ου] ΣΙΝ ΕΝ ΦΙΛΙΠΠΟΙΣ ΣΥΝ ΕΠ[ισκο] ΠΟΙΣ ΚΑΙ ΔΙΑΚΟΝΟΙΣ· ΧΑ̣[ρις υµιν] ΚΑΙ ΕΙΡΗΝΗ ΑΠΟ ΘΥ ΠΡ̣Σ̣ [ηµων και] ΚΥ ΙΥ ΧΥ· ΕΥΧΑΡ[ιστω τω θ(ε)ω µου] ΕΠΙ ΠΑΣΗ ΤΗ Μ̣[νεια υµων παντο] ΤΕ ΕΝ Π̣[αση δεησει µου υπερ παντων …]

The superscription heading (ΠΡΟΣ ΠΙΛΙΠΠΗΣΙΟΥΣ) has decorative lines both above and below the letters. The variation in spelling of the recipients of the letter is unique to this codex. 2, 6 Ekthesis signals a new sense unit. In line 6, the new sense unit begins following the mid-point dot in line 5. 4–5 συνεπισκόποις B2, D2, K, et al. 7 ἐγὼ µὲν εὐχαριστῶ τῷ κυρίῳ ἡµῶν is the reading of D*, F, G, et al. 1

p.71 (Phil 1:11–13) 1

5

[… πεπληρωµε] [νοι] ΚΑΡΠΟΝ ΔΙΚΑΙΟΣΥΝΗΣ ΤΟΝ ΔΙ [α Ι(ησο)υ Χ(ριστο)]Υ ΕΙΣ ΔΟΞΑΝ ΚΑΙ ΕΠΑΙΝΟΝ ΘΥ· [γινωσ]ΚΙΝ ΔΕ ΫΜΑΣ ΒΟΥΛΟΜΑΙ ΑΔΕΛ [φοι οτ]Ι̣ ΤΑ ΚΑΤ ΕΜΕ ΜΑΛΛΟΝ ΕΙΣ [προκοπ]ΗΝ ΤΟΥ ΕΥΑΓΓΕΛΙΟΥ ΕΛΗ [λυθεν ωστε τ]Ο̣ΥΣ ΔΕΣΜΟΥΣ ΜΟΥ [φανερους εν Χ(ριστ)ω] ΓΕΝΕΣΘΑΙ ΕΝ

74

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016) [ολω τω πραιτωριω και το]ΙΣ Λ[οι] [ποις πασιν …]

1 2

καρπῶν δικαιοσυνης τῶν P, Ψ, 365, et al. καὶ ἔπαινον χριστοῦ D*; καὶ ἔπαινόν µοι F, G; θεοῦ καὶ ἔπαινον ἐµοί 𝔓46. The mid-point punctuation signals the end of a sentence, and the following line almost certainly began with ekthesis.

p.72 (Phil 1:20–23) 1

5

2 3 4 5 7

ΣΩΜΑΤΙ ΜΟΥ ΕΙΤΕ ΔΙΑ ΖΩ̣ΗΣ ̣ ̣ [ειτε δι] Α ΘΑΝΑΤΟΥ ΕΜΟΙ ΓΑΡ ΤΟ ΖΗΝ Χ̣[(ριστο)ς και το] ΑΠΟΘΑΝΕΙΝ ΚΕΡΔΟΣ· ΕΙ ΔΕ̣ Τ̣[ο ζην εν] ΣΑΡΚΙ ΤΟΥΤΟ ΜΟΙ ΚΑΡΠΟΣ Ε̣[ργου και] ΤΙ ΑΙΡΗΣΟΜΑΙ ΟΥ ΓΝΩΡ[ιζω συνεχο] ΜΑΙ ΔΕ ΕΚ ΤΩΝ Δ̣Υ[̣ ο την επιθυµιαν] ΕΧΩΝ Ε̣ΙΣ ̣ ̣ Τ̣[ο αναλυσαι και συν Χ(ριστ)ω …] The supralinear stroke is a diacritical mark and not a paragraphos. 𝔓46 has εἴτε in place of εἰ δέ. The mid-point punctuation signals the end of a sentence. Ekthesis signals a sense break on the previous line following κέρδος. αἱρήσωµαι 𝔓46, B, et al. 𝔓46, D, F, G, omit εἰς. 𝔓46 reads ἔχων ἐν χριστῷ.

p.73 (Phil 2:1–3) 1

5

[αγαπ]ΗΣ· ΕΙ ΤΙΣ ΚΟΙΝΩΝΙΑ ΠΝΣ ΕΙ ΤΙΣ [σπλα]ΓΧ̣ΝΑ ΚΑΙ ΟΙΚΤΙΡΜΟΙ· ΠΛΗΡΩ [σατε µ]Ο̣Υ ΤΗΝ ΧΑΡΑΝ ΙΝΑ ΤΟ ΑΥΤΟ [φρονητα]Ι̣ ΠΑΝΤΕΣ ΤΗΝ ΑΥΤΗΝ ΑΓΑ [πην εχοντες] ΣΥΝ̣ΨΥΧΟΙ ΤΟ ΑΥΤΟ [φρονουντες] Μ̣ΗΔ ̣ ΕΝ ΚΑΤ ΕΡΙΘΙΑ [µηδε κατα κεν]Ο̣Δ[̣ οξιαν α]Λ̣ΛΑ ̣ ̣ ΤΗ̣ [ταπεινοφροσυνη αλληλους προη] [γουµενοι …]

TRANSCRIPTION OF CODEX I

1 2 4 5

6 7 8

75

The mid-point dot signals a minor break in the text. The mid-point dot signals a significant break in the text, but not the end of a sentence. l. φρονῆτε. The addition of πάντες “may be the result of a scribal gloss that envisions the kingdom of God thriving in utopian harmony” (Wayment, Scribal Characteristics, 260). The new images confirm that the text should read σύνψυχοι (𝔓46, A, B*) instead of σύµψυχοι, the reading of Sanders’ edition. The confusion appears to have been caused by the transfer of ink from the opposing page. A number of important witnesses read ἐν in place of αὐτό (𝔓46, ℵ2, B, D, F, G, et al.) l. ἐριθείαν. The text probably did not omit κατά with 𝔓46 and ℵ2. The line would be several letters too short. The reading of D, F, G, K, L, et al., ἤ in place of µηδὲ κατά, is very unlikely. At the time Sanders completed his edition, the final two lines were still partially visible, which he gave as αλληλ]ους προη̣. The variant προηγούµενοι in place of ἠγούµενοι was restored with some confidence. Sanders’ restoration, προηγούµενοι, is also attested in 𝔓46, D*.c, K, et al.

p.74 (Phil 2:12–15) 1

5

2 4 5 6

ΚΑΙ ΤΡΟΜΟΥ ΤΗΝ ΕΑΥΤΩΝ̣ Σ̣[ωτηριαν] ΚΑΤΕΡΓΑΖΕΣΘΑΙ· ΘΣ ΓΑΡ Ε̣Σ̣[τιν ο ε] ΝΕΡΓΩΝ ΕΝ ΫΜΙΝ ΚΑΙ ΤΟ [θελειν και] ΤΟ ΕΝΕΡΓΙΝ ΫΠΕΡ ΤΗΣ [ευδοκιας] ΠΑΝΤΑ ΠΟΙΕΙΤΑΙ Χ̣[ωρις γογγυσµων] ΚΑΙ ΔΙΑΛΟΓΙΣΜΩ̣[ν ινα γενησθε] Α̣ΜΕΜΠ̣Τ̣ΟΙ̣ [̣ ι κα]Ι̣ [ακεραιοι …] l. κατεργάζεσθε. κατεργάζεσθαι is the reading of A. ὁ θεός D1, L, Ψ, et al. The mid-point punctuation signals a significant sense break in the text, followed by ekthesis in the next line. ἐνεργῶν δυνάµεις is a singular reading of A. l. ἐνεργεῖν. l. ποιεῖτε. ἦτε in place of γένησθε is the reading of 𝔓46 and A.

76

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016)

p.75 (Phil 2:25–27) 1

5

[αναγ]Κ̣ΑΙΟΝ ΔΕ ΗΓΗΣΑΜΗΝ ΕΠΑΦΡΟ [δι]Τ̣ΟΝ ΤΟΝ ΑΔΕΛΦΟΝ ΚΑΙ ΣΥΝΕΡ [γο]Ν̣ Κ̣ΑΙ ΣΥΝΣΤΡΑΤΙΩΤΗΝ ΜΟΥ Ϋ [µων δε] Α̣ΠΟΣΤΟΛΟΝ ΚΑΙ ΛΙΤΟΥΡΓΟ [της χρειας µ]ΟΥ ΠΕΜΨΑΙ ΠΡΟΣ ΫΜΑΣ [επειδη επιπο]Θ̣ΩΝ ΗΝ ΠΑΝΤΑΣ Υ [µας ιδειν και α]Δ̣ΗΜ ̣ Ο ̣ Ν ̣ ΩΝ ΔΙΟΤΙ̣ [ηκουσατε οτι ησθενησεν και …]

l. συστρατιώτην. 𝔓46 and A have the same spelling (συνστρατιωτην) as I. 4 l. λειτουργόν. 6–7 The reading of ℵ*, A, C, D is πάντας ὑµᾶς ἰδεῖν. Given the spacing of the surviving letters, it is nearly certain that this was also the reading of Codex I. 8 Sanders was able to read part of this line as ησ]θενησεν̣ κ[αι].

3

p.76 (Phil 3:4–6) 1

5

2

ΕΓΩ ΕΧΩΝ ΠΕΠΟΙΘΗΣΙΝ ΚΑΙ̣ Ε̣[ν σαρ] ΚΙ· ΕΙ ΤΙΣ ΑΛΛΟΣ ΔΟΚΕΙ ΠΕΠΟΙ̣[θεναι] ΕΝ ΣΑΡΚΙ ΕΓΩ ΜΑΛΛΟΝ ΠΕΡΙ̣Τ̣ΟΜ ̣ [̣ η ο] ΚΤΑΗΜΕΡΟΣ ΕΚ ΓΕΝΟΥ̣Σ̣ Ι̣ΣΛ Φ[υλης] Β̣ΕΝΙΑΜΕΙΝ· ΕΒΡΑΙ[ος εξ Εβραιων] ΚΑΤΑ ΝΟΜΟΝ ΦΑ̣[ρισαιος κατα ζη] ΛΟΣ Δ̣[ιωκ]Ω̣Ν̣ [την εκκλησιαν] [κατα δικαιοσυνην την εν νοµω …]

The mid-point dot signals the end of a sentence. The word order ἄλλος δοκεῖ is otherwise unattested. In other witnesses the order is reversed. 5 l. βενιαµίν. This spelling is also attested in 𝔓46, ℵ, A, B. 6–7 ζῆλον is the reading of 𝔓46. 8 Sanders was able to read part of this line as κατα [δικαιοσυνην…

TRANSCRIPTION OF CODEX I

77

p.77 (Phil 3:13–17) 1

5

[… επε] [κ]Τ̣ΙΝ ̣ ΟΜΕΝΟΣ ΚΑΤΑ ΣΚΟΠΟΝ ΔΙ [ωκων] ΕΙΣ ΤΟ ΒΡΑΒΙΟΝ ΤΗΣ ΑΝΩ [κλησεω]Σ̣ ΤΟΥ ΘΥ ΕΝ ΧΩ ΙΥ· [οσοι ουν] Τ̣Ε̣ΛΕΙΟΙ ΤΟΥΤΟ ΦΡΟΝΩΜΕ [και ει τι ετ]Ε̣ΡΩ ̣ Σ ̣ ̣ ΦΡΟΝΗΤΑΙ ΚΑΙ [τουτο ο θ(εο)ς υµιν] Α̣ΠΟΚΑΛΥΨΕΙ ΠΛΗ [εις ο εφθασαµε]Ν̣ Τ̣Ω̣ Α̣ΥΤ ̣ Ω ΣΤΟΙ [χειν συµµιµηται µου γινεσθε αδελ] [φοι …]

1 l. ἐπεκτεινόµενος. 1–2 διώκων is the reading of I and Ψ. The finite verb διώκω is changed to a participle, which Sanders suggests is, perhaps, an error caused by attraction to the two previous participles (Sanders, Epistles of Paul, 263). Sanders was able to see ]κ̣ων, which made this reading more secure. It is no longer visible in the new images, but it has been restored here in the brackets following Sanders’ edition. 2 l. βραβεῖον. ἐπί for εἰς is the reading of D, F, G, K, L, et al. 3 τοῦ is absent from 𝔓46. The mid-point punctuation signals the end of a sentence. 4 φρονοῦµεν is the reading of ℵ, L, et al. 5 l. φρονεῖτε. 7 There are a number of different endings following αὐτῷ. Following στοιχεῖν, ℵ2, K, L, P, Ψ add κανόνι, while a number of witnesses (D, F, G, 81, 104, et al.) add φρονεῖν. Each of these witnesses adds additonal words as well, but the fragmentary nature of I makes it impossible to determine anything past στοιχεῖν. Sanders was able to read the end of line 10 as γι]νεσθε̣ αδελ̣, thus suggesting that the restoration, as provided here, followed the text of 𝔓16.46, ℵ*, A, B, et al. The text does not appear to read εφθασατε with 𝔓46vid.

78

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016)

p.78 (Phil 4:3–6) 1

5

1 2 4 5

[… συνη] ΘΛΗΣΑΝ ΜΟΙ ΜΕΤΑ ΚΕ ΚΛΗΜ̣[εντος] ΚΑΙ ΤΩΝ ΛΟΙΠΩΝ ΣΥΝΕΡΓ̣ΩΝ ̣ ̣ [µου] ΩΝ ΤΑ ΟΝΟΜΑΤΑ ΕΝ ΒΙΒΛΩ̣ [ζωης] ΧΑΙΡΕΤΑΙ ΕΝ ΚΩ ΠΑΝΤΟΤ̣Ε̣ Π̣[αλιν ερω] ΧΑΙΡΕΤΑΙ ΤΟ ΕΠΙΕ̣ΙΚ ̣ Ε ̣ ̣[ς υµων γνωσ] Θ̣ΗΤ ̣ ̣Ω̣ Π̣ΑΣ ̣ ̣ΙΝ ̣ ̣ Α̣ΝΘ ̣ [̣ ρωποις ο κ(υριο)ς εγγυς] Μ̣ΗΔ ̣ Ε ̣ ̣Ν̣ Μ̣[εριµνατε …] κε for καί. συνεργῶν µου καὶ τῶν λοιπῶν is the reading of 𝔓16vid and ℵ*. l. χαίρετε. Ekthesis at the beginning of this line signals a paragraph break. l. χαίρετε.

p.79 (Phil 4:13–15) 1

5

1 2 3 4 8

[εν τω] Ε̣ΝΔΥΝΑΜΟΥΝΤΙ ΜΕ ΠΛΗΝ [κα]ΛΩ̣Σ ΕΠΟΙΗΣΑΤΑΙ ΣΥΝΚΟΙΝΩΝΗ [σαντ]Ε̣Σ̣ Μ̣ΟΥ ̣ ̣ Τ̣Η ΘΛΙΨΙ· ΟΙΔΑΤΑΙ [δε και] Υ̣ΜΕ ̣ ̣ΙΣ ̣ ̣ ΦΙΛΙΠΠΗΣΙΟΙ ΟΤΙ Ε [αρχη του] Ε̣ΥΑ ̣ Γ ̣ ̣Γ̣Ε̣ΛΙΟΥ ΟΤΕ ΕΞΗΛΘΟ [απο Μακεδονι]̣ΑΣ ̣ ̣ Ο̣ΥΔ ̣ Ε ̣ Μ ̣ Ι̣ Α ̣ ̣ Μ̣Ο[̣ ι εκ] [κλησια εκοινω]Ν̣ΗΣ ̣ ̣Ε̣Ν̣ ΕΙΣ ΛΟ̣Γ̣[ον] [δοσεως και ληµψεως ει µη υµεις …] ℵ2, D2, F, G, K, L, et al. add Χριστῷ after µε. l. ἐποιήσατε. l. θλίψει, οἴδατε. The mid-point punctuation signals the end of a sentence. 𝔓46, D*, 1505 omit δέ. Sanders was able to read part of this line as µ]η̣ υ̣µε̣ ι̣ ̣ς.̣

TRANSCRIPTION OF CODEX I

79

p.80 (Col 1:1–4) 1

5

10 1 2 4 5 7 8 9

†

ΠΡΟΣ ΚΟΛΑΣΣΑΕΙΣ

ΠΑΥΛΟΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΟΣ ΙΥ ΧΥ ΔΙΑ ΘΕ̣[λη] ΜΑΤΟΣ ΘΥ ΚΑΙ ΤΙΜΟΘΕΟΣ Ο ΑΔΕΛΦ̣[ος] ΤΟΙΣ ΕΝ ΚΟΛΑΣΣΑΙΣ ΑΓΙΟΙΣ ΚΑΙ Π[ιστοις] ΑΔΕΛΦΟΙΣ ΕΝ ΧΩ· ΧΑΡΙΣ ΫΜΙΝ ΚΑΙ ΕΙΡΗΝΗ ΑΠΟ̣ Θ̣[(εο)υ π(ατ)ρ(ο)ς η] ΜΩΝ ΚΑΙ ΚΥ ΙΥ ΧΥ [ευχαριστουµεν] ΤΩ ΘΩ ΚΑΙ ΠΡΙ ΤΟΥ [κ(υριο)υ ηµων Ι(ησο)υ Χ(ριστο)υ παν] ΤΟΤΕ ΠΕΡΙ ΥΜ[ων προσευχοµενοι] [α]Κ̣Ο[̣ υσαντες την πιστιν υµων εν Χ(ριστ)ω Ι(ησο)υ …] The superscription heading has decorative lines both above and below the letters. Codex I reverses standard the word order of Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ attested elsewhere. Κολοσσαῖς ℵ, B, D, F, G, et al. The mid-point punctuation signals the end of a sentence, which is followed by a larger blank space that signals a paragraph break. Following Χριστῷ, A, D*, F, G, add Ἰησοῦ. ℵ, A, C, F, G, et al. also add καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ after ἡµῶν. 𝔓61vid, B, C* omit καί. τῷ πατρί is the reading of D*, F, G. ὑπέρ for περί in B, D*, F, G, et al.

p.81 (Col 1:10–12) 1

5

[αγαθ]Ω̣ ΚΑΡΠΟΦΟΡΟΥΝΤΕΣ ΚΑΙ ΑΥ [ξανο]ΜΕΝΟΙ ΤΗ ΕΠΙΓΝΩΣΕΙ ΤΟΥ ΘΥ [εν π]ΑΣΗ ΔΥΝΑΜΕΙ ΔΥΝΑΜΟΥΜΕΝΟΙ [κατα] ΤΟ Κ̣ΡΑΤΟΣ ΤΗΣ ΔΟΞΗΣ ΑΥΤΟΥ [εις πα]Σ̣ΑΝ ̣ ̣ ΥΠΟΜΟΝΗΝ ΚΑΙ ΜΑΚΡΟ [θυµιαν µε]Τ̣Α̣ Χ̣ΑΡΑΣ ΕΥΧΑΡΙΣΤΟΥΝ [τες τω θ(ε)ω και π(ατ)]Ρ̣Ι̣ Τ̣Ω̣ Ι̣ΚΑ ̣ Ν ̣ Ω ̣ Σ ̣ ̣ΑΝ ̣ ̣ [τι υµας εις την µεριδα] Τ̣ΟΥ ̣ ̣ Κ̣ΛΗ ̣ ̣ [ρου …]

80

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016)

2 ἐν τῇ ἐπιγνώσει ℵ2, Ψ, et al. 6–7 καὶ εὐχαριστοῦντες 𝔓46. 7 ἅµα τῷ πατρί 𝔓46 and B. τῷ θεῷ πατρί ℵ, F, G. τῷ θεῷ καὶ πατρί C3, 075, et al. καλέσαντι καὶ ἱκανώσαντι B. καλέσαντι in place of ἱκανώσαντι D*.c, F, and G.

p.82 (Col 1:20–22) 1

5

1 3 6 8

ΤΟΥ ΣΤΑΥΡΟΥ ΑΥΤΟΥ ΕΙΤΕ ΤΑ ΕΠ̣[ι] ΤΗΣ ΓΗΣ ΕΙΤΕ ΤΑ ΕΝ ΤΟΙΣ ΟΥΝ̣ΟΙΣ ΚΑΙ ΫΜΑΣ ΠΟΤΕ ΟΝΤΑΣ ΑΠΗΛΛΟ[τρι] ΩΜΕΝΟΥΣ ΚΑΙ ΕΧΘΡΟΥΣ ΤΗ̣ Δ̣[ιανοι] Α̣ Ε̣Ν ΤΟΙΣ ΕΡΓΟΙΣ ΤΟΙΣ ΠΟΝ̣Η[̣ ροις] ΝΥΝΙ ΔΕ ΑΠΟΚΑΤΗΛ̣Λ[̣ αξεν εν τω] ΣΩΜΑΤΙ ΤΗΣ Σ̣ΑΡ ̣ Κ ̣ [̣ ος αυτου δια] Τ̣ΟΥ ̣ ̣ Θ̣ΑΝ ̣ Α ̣ Τ ̣ ̣ΟΥ ̣ ̣ Π̣[αραστησαι υµας . . .] δι’ αὐτοῦ is added following αὐτοῦ by 𝔓46, ℵ, A, C, D1, K, et al. Ekthesis signals the beginning of a new paragraph. Ekthesis represents the beginning of a new sense unit but not a major break in the text. τοῦ θανάτου αὐτοῦ ℵ and A.

p.83 (Col 1:27–29) 1

5

1 3 6

[εν τ]Ο̣ΙΣ ̣ ̣ Ε̣ΘΝ ̣ ΕΣΙΝ ΟΣ ΕΣΤΙΝ ΧΣ ΕΝ [υµ]ΙΝ Η ΕΛΠΙΣ ΤΗΣ ΔΟΞΗΣ ΟΝ ΗΜΕΙΣ [κα]Τ̣ΑΓΓΕΛΛΟΜΕΝ ΝΟΥΘΕΤΟΥΝΤΕΣ [παντ]Α̣ ΑΝΟΝ ΚΑΙ ΔΙΔΑΣΚΟΝΤΕΣ ΠΑ [τα αν(θρωπ)]ΟΝ Ε̣Ν̣ Π̣ΑΣ ̣ Η ΣΟΦΙΑ ΪΝΑ ΠΑ [ραστησωµε]Ν ΠΑΝΤΑ ΑΝΟΝ ΤΕ [λειον εν Χ(ριστ)ω ει]Σ̣ Ο̣ ΚΑΙ ΚΟΠΙΩ ΑΓΩ [νιζοµενος κατα την] Ε̣ΝΕΡ̣ΓΙ[αν] ὅ in place of ὅς 𝔓46, A, B, F, G, et al. καταγγέλλοντες 𝔓46. πάντα ἄνθρωπον is absent from D*, F, G, et al.

TRANSCRIPTION OF CODEX I 7 8

81

Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ ℵ2, D1, H, K, L, P, et al. l. ἐνέργειαν.

p.84 (Col 2:7–9) 1

5

ΒΕΒΑΙΟΥΜΕΝΟΙ ΕΝ ΠΙΣΤΕΙ ΚΑ̣[θως] ΕΔΙΔΑΧΘΗΤΑΙ ΠΕΡΙΣΣΕΥΟΝΤ̣[ες εν ευ] ΧΑΡΙΣΤΙΑ· ΒΛΕΠΕΤΕ ΜΗ ΤΙ̣[ς υµας] ΕΣΤΕ Ο ΣΥΛΑΓΩΓΩΝ ΔΙΑ ΤΗ[ς φιλο] ΣΟΦΙΑΣ ΚΑΙ ΚΕΝΗΣ ΑΠΑ̣[της κατα] ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡΑΔΟΣΙΝ Τ̣[ων αν(θρωπω)ν κατα] ΤΑ ΣΤΟΙΧΙΑ ΤΟΥ Κ̣[οσµου και ου κα] ΤΑ ΧΝ ΟΤ̣Ι̣ [εν αυτω κατοικει παν] [το πληρωµα της θεοτητος σωµατικως …]

Metzger points out that “the reading τῇ πίστει, strongly supported by B D* H 33 81 al, best accounts for the rise of the other readings.” See Metzger, Textual Commentary, 555. 2 l. ἐδιδάχθητε. 2–3 ἐν αὐτῇ ἐν εὐχαριστίᾳ B, D2, Hc, K, L, et al. ἐν αὐτῷ ἐν εὐχαριστίᾳ ℵ2, D*, et al. 3 Sanders read βλεπεται. 4 l. ἔσται. 7 l. στοιχεῖα. 9 Sanders was able to read the beginning of this line as [τ]ο̣ π̣λη ̣ ̣[ρωµα.

1

p.85 (Col 2:16–19) ΚΒ 1

5

[µη] ΟΥΝ ΤΙΣ ΫΜΑΣ ΚΡΙΝΕΤΩ ΕΝ ΒΡΩ [σε]Ι Η ΕΝ ΠΟΣΕΙ Η ΕΝ ΜΕΡΙ ΕΟΡΤΗΣ [η ν]Ο̣ΥΜΗΝΙΑΣ Η ΣΑΒΒΑΤΩΝ Α ΕΣΤΙ [σκια τ]ΩΝ ΜΕΛΛΟΝΤΩΝ Α ΕΟΡΑΚΕ [εµβα]Τ̣ΕΥΩΝ ΕΙΚΗ ΦΥΣΙΟΥΜΕΝΟΣ [υπο του νοο]Σ̣ ΤΗΣ ΣΑΡΚΟΣ ΑΥΤΟΥ [και ου κρατων τ]Η̣Ν ΚΕΦΑΛΗΝ ΕΞ ΟΥ

82

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016) [παν το σωµα δια των α]Φ̣ΩΝ ΚΑΙ [συνδεσµων επιχορηγουµεν]Ο̣

The quire number ΚΒ (22) appears in the upper right corner with a decorative horizontal stroke both above and below the letters. 2 καί for ἤ is the reading of 𝔓46, B, 1739, et al. l. µέρει. 3 l. νεοµηνίας. νουµηνίας is the spelling of ℵ and A. 4 A fair amount of text has been skipped over here. This is likely an instance of parablepsis occasioned by homoeoteleuton, when the scribe’s eyes jumped from the end of µελλόντων in verse 17 to ἀγγέλων in verse 18. Compare Wayment, Scribal Characteristics, 255. 6 αὐτῶν for αὐτοῦ ℵ*. 7 κεφαλὴν Χριστόν D*, 1505, et al. 9 Sanders puts ἐπιχορηγούµενον completely within the square brackets, but on the end of the line one can see a partial omicron followed by a line which could easily be taken as a terminal nu, and thus it has been adopted as such here.

p.86 (Col 3:5–8) 1

5

ΤΗΣ ΓΗΣ ΠΟΡΝΙΑΝ ΑΚΑΘΑΡΣΙΑΝ Π̣[αθος] ΕΠΙΘΥΜΙΑΝ ΚΑΚΗΝ ΚΑΙ ΤΗΝ [πλεο] ΝΕΞΙΑΝ ΗΤΙΣ ΕΣΤΙΝ ΕΙΔΩΛΟΛ̣[ατρια] ΔΙ Α ΕΡΧΕΤΑΙ Η ΟΡΓΗ ΤΟΥ ΘΥ [επι τους] ΫΙΟΥΣ ΤΗΣ ΑΠΙΘΕΙΑΣ ΕΝ Ο̣[ις και υ] ΜΕΙΣ ΠΕΡΙΕΠΑΤ[ησατε ποτε οτε] ΕΖΗΤΕ ΕΝ ΤΟΥΤ̣[οις νυνι δε απο] ΘΕΣΘΑΙ ΚΑΙ Υ̣Μ[̣ εις τα παντα οργην] [θυµον κακιαν βλασφηµιαν …]

l. πορνείαν. κακήν absent from 𝔓46. ὅ in place of ἅ is the reading of C*vid, D*, F, G, and διὰ ταῦτα γάρ in place of δι’ ἅ is the reading of 𝔓46. 4–5 l. ἀπειθείας. ἐπὶ τοὺς υἱοὺς τῆς ἀπειθείας is ommitted by 𝔓46, B, et al. υἱούς is left uncontracted in a non-sacred context. 7–8 l. ἀπόθεσθε. Α also reads αποθεσθαι.

1 2 4

TRANSCRIPTION OF CODEX I 8 9

83

The supralinear stroke is only faintly visible and therefore is restored with some hesitation. It signals a sense break in the previous line beginning with νυνί. Sanders was able to read the beginning of this line as θ̣υ̣µ[̣ .

p.87 (Col 3:15–17) 1

5

[καρ]ΔΙΑΙΣ ΫΜΩΝ ΕΙΣ ΗΝ ΚΑΙ ΕΚΛΗ [θ]Η̣ΤΑΙ ΕΝ ΕΝΙ ΣΩΜΑΤΙ ΚΑΙ ΕΥΧΑ [ρι]Σ̣ΤΟΙ ΓΙΝΕΣΘΑΙ Ο ΛΟΓΟΣ ΤΟΥ ΚΥ [εν]Ο̣ΙΚ ̣ Ε ̣ ΙΤΩ ΕΝ ΫΜΙΝ ΠΛΟΥΣΙΩΣ [εν πα]Σ̣Η̣ ΣΟΦΙΑ ΔΙΔΑΣΚΟΝΤΕΣ ΚΑΙ [νουθετο]Υ̣ΝΤ ̣ ΕΣ ΕΑΥΤΟΥΣ ΨΑΛ [µοις και υµνοι]Σ ΚΑΙ ΩΔΑΙΣ ΠΝΙ [καις εν χαριτι αδον]Τ̣Ε̣Σ̣ Ε̣Ν̣ Τ̣Η̣ Κ̣ΑΡ ̣ ̣ [δια υµων τω θ(ε)ω και παν ο]Τ̣[ι] Α̣[ν]

1–2 l. ἐκλήθητε. 2 𝔓46 and B omit ἑνί. 3 l. γίνεσθε (A also reads γινεσθαι). 𝔓46, ℵ2, B, C2, D, F, G, read Χριστοῦ in place of Κυρίου. A reads θεοῦ. 7 καὶ ὕµνοις καί is the reading of C3, D1, K, and L. It appears to be the reading of Codex I as well although the first καί is not visible. 7–8 𝔓46 reads πνευµατικοῖς. Spacing suggests that the line began with καις, thus completing the nomen sacrum from the previous line. 8 ℵ*, A, C, D2, et al. omit τῇ before χάριτι, but it is impossible to determine whether Codex I preserved the definite article. 8–9 ταῖς καρδίαις is the reading of 𝔓46, ℵ, A, B, C, D*, et al. 9 Sanders read ο]τ̣ι̣ α̣ν̣, the reading of ℵ and A.

p.88 (Col 3:25–4:2) 1

[… κοµισ] ΕΙΤΑΙ Ο ΗΔΙΚΗΣΕΝ ΚΑΙ ΟΥΚ ΕΣ̣Τ̣[ιν] ΠΡΟΣΩΠΟΛΗΜΨΙΑ ΠΑΡΑ ΤΩ ΘΩ̣ ΟΙ ΚΥΡΙΟΙ ΤΟ ΔΙΚΑΙΟΝ ΚΑΙ ΤΗΝ ΙΣ[οτη]

84

5

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016) ΤΑ ΤΟΙΣ ΔΟΥΛΟΙΣ ΠΑΡΕΧΕΣΘΕ̣ [ειδο] ΤΕΣ ΟΤΙ ΚΑΙ ΫΜΕΙΣ ΕΧΕΤΕ Κ[(υριο)ν εν] ΟΥΝΩ· ΤΗ ΠΡΟΣΕΥΧΗ̣ [προσκαρτε] ΡΟΥΝΤΕΣ ΓΡΗΓΟ[ρουντες εν αυτη] ΕΝ ΕΥΧΑ[ριστια …]

NA28 reads κοµίσεται, the reading of ℵc, B, D, E, F, G, et al. κοµιεῖται is the reading of ℵ* and A. 2 The addition of παρὰ τῷ θεῷ following προσωποληµψία is attested in F, G, 629, et al. 3 Ekthesis signals the beginning of a new sentence as well as a major sense break. 6 Some witnesses preserve the plural οὐρανοῖς ℵ2, D, F, G, K, L, et al. The mid-point dot indicates the end of a sentence followed by a new sense unit. 7 Ekthesis signals a sense break in the previous line following the mid-point dot. 6–7 Only a few late witnesses preserve the participle προσκαρτεροῦντες (33, 1241*, vgmss) instead of προσκαρτερεῖτε. 8 D* omits ἐν εὐχαριστίᾳ. 1

p.89 (Col 4:11–13) 1

5

[οντες] Ε̣Κ ΠΕΡΙΤΟΜΗΣ ΟΥΤΟΙ ΜΟΝΟΙ ΣΥ [εργ]ΟΙ ΕΙΣ ΤΗΝ ΒΑΣΙΛΕΙΑΝ ΤΟΥ ΘΥ ΟΙ [τι]ΝΕΣ ΕΓΕΝΗΘΗΣΑΝ ΜΟΙ ΠΑΡΗΓΟ [ρι]Α ΑΣΠΑΖΕΤΑΙ ΫΜΑΣ ΕΠΑΦΡΑΣ [ο εξ υµω]Ν̣ ΔΟΥΛΟΣ ΧΥ ΙΥ ΠΑΝΤΟΤΕ Α [γωνιζοµε]ΝΟΣ ΫΠΕΡ ΫΜΩΝ ΕΝ ΤΑΙΣ [προσευχαις ινα η]ΤΕ Τ̣ΕΛΙΟΙ ΚΑΙ ΠΕ [πληροφορηµενοι εν] Π̣ΑΝ ̣ Τ ̣ Ι ΘΕ [ληµατι του θ(εο)υ µαρτυρω γαρ αυτω]

𝔓46 attests τῆς περιτοµῆς. Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ is the reading of P, 1241s, vgmss. l. τέλειοι. Sanders was able to read part of the line as ]ινα ητε τελιοι και πε. The form ἦτε is attested in 2464, ar, m, vgmss, syhmg, et al. where other witnesses read σταθῆτε. 7–8 𝔓46, D1, K, L, P, et al. read πεπληρωµένοι.

1 5 7

TRANSCRIPTION OF CODEX I 9

85

Sanders was able to read three letters at the end of this line that are no longer visible …] α̣υ̣τ[̣ ῳ.

p.90 (1 Thess 1:1–2) 1

5

†

ΠΡΟΣ ΘΕΣΣΑΛΟΝΙΚΕ̣ΙΣ ̣ ̣Α

ΠΑΥΛΟΣ ΚΑΙ ΣΙΛΟΥΑΝΟΣ ΚΑΙ ΤΙ[µο] ΘΕΟΣ ΤΗ ΕΚΚΛΗΣΙΑ ΘΕΣΣΑΛΟΝ[ικεων] ΕΝ ΘΩ ΠΡΙ ΚΑΙ ΚΥ ΙΥ ΧΥ ΧΑΡΙΣ [υµιν] ΚΑΙ ΕΙΡΗΝΗ ΑΠΟ ΘΥ ΠΡΣ Η̣Μ[̣ ων και] ΚΥ ΙΥ ΧΥ· ΕΥΧΑΡΙΣΤ[ουµεν τω] ΘΩ ΠΑΝΤΟΤΕ ΠΕΡΙ ΠΑ̣[ντων υµων] ΜΝΙΑΝ ΠΟΙΟΥ[µενοι επι των προσ] ΕΥΧΩ̣[ν ηµων …]

1

There is a staurogram in the upper left corner of the page. The superscription heading (ΠΡΟΣ ΘΕΣΣΑΛΟΝΙΚΕΙΣ) has decorative lines both above and below the letters. 2 Ekthesis signals the beginning of the epistle. 4 A, 81, (621), et al. read πατρὶ ἡµῶν. The majority of witnesses read κυρίῳ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ, but A agrees with Codex I in preserving the genitives. 5–6 Some witnesses read εἰρήνη εὐχαριστοῦµεν (B, F, G, Ψ, et al.), but the longer text that is preserved in Codex I is attested in ℵ, A, D, K, L, P, et al. D omits ἡµῶν. NA28 suggests that this longer reading is a harmonization to 2 Thess 1:2. 6 The mid-point punctuation signals the end of a sentence. 7 The supralinear strokes at the beginning of the line also denote the use of the nomen sacrum. Ekthesis signals a sense break, as indicated in the previous line. 8 l. µνείαν. µνείαν ὑµῶν is attested by ℵ2. 9 Sanders restored the beginning of this line as [πρ]οσευχω̣[ν.

p.91 (1 Thess 1:9–10) 1

[αυ]Τ̣ΟΙ ΓΑΡ ΠΕΡΙ ΗΜΩΝ ΑΠΑΓΓΕΛΛΟΥ [σ]Ι̣Ν ΟΠΟΙΑΝ ΕΙΣΟΔΟΝ ΕΣΧΟΜΕΝ

86

5

1 6 7 9

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016) [π]Ρ̣ΟΣ ΫΜΑΣ ΚΑΙ ΠΩΣ ΕΠΕΣΤΡΕΨΑ [τε] ΠΡΟΣ ΤΟΝ ΘΝ ΑΠΟ ΤΩΝ ΕΙΔΩΛΩ [δουλ]ΕΥΕΙΝ ΘΩ ΖΩΝΤΙ ΚΑΙ ΑΛΗΘΙ [νω και] Α̣ΝΑ ̣ ΜΕΝΕΙΝ ΤΟΝ ΥΝ ΑΥΤΟΥ [εκ των ου(ρα)]Ν̣ΩΝ ̣  ΟΝ ΗΓΕΙΡΕΝ ΕΚ ΤΩ [νεκρων Ι(ησου)ν τον ρ]Υ̣ΟΜ ̣ Ε ̣ ̣ΝΟ ̣ Ν ΗΜΑΣ [εκ της οργης της ερχοµενης …] ἡµῶν is replaced by ὑµῶν in B, 81, 323, et al. ὑποµένειν in place of ἀναµένειν is attested by 𝔓46vid. There is slight remnant of the supralinear stroke from οὐρανῶν indicating that the word was written as a nomem sacrum. τῶν is absent from 𝔓46vid, A, C, K, et al. Sanders was able to restore the end of the line as [… ερχοµ]ε̣νη̣ς·̣ The line is several letters shorter than those above it.

p.92 (1 Thess 2:7–9) 1

5

1 3 7 8

ΝΗΠΙΟΙ ΕΜ ΜΕΣΩ ΫΜΩΝ ΩΣ [εαν] ΤΡΟΦΟΣ ΘΑΛΠΗ ΤΑ ΕΑΥΤΗΣ ΤΕ[κνα] ΟΥΤΩΣ ΟΜΙΡΟΜΕΝΟΙ ΫΜΩΝ Ε[υδο] ΚΟΥΜΕΝ ΜΕΤΑΔΟΥΝΑΙ ΫΜΙΝ Ο[υ µο] ΝΟΝ ΤΟ ΕΥΑΓΓΕΛΙΟΝ ΤΟΥ ΘΥ̣ [αλλα και] ΤΑΣ ΕΑΥΤΩΝ ΨΥΧΑ̣Σ̣ Δ̣ΙΟ ̣ [̣ τι αγαπη] ΤΟΙ ΗΜΙΝ ΕΓΕΝΗΘ̣Η[̣ τε µνη] ΜΟΝ ̣ Ε ̣ ̣ΥΕ ̣ ̣Τ̣Ε̣ [γαρ αδελφοι τον κοπον ηµων …] l. ἐν. The reading ἐµ is also attested in A. ἤπιοι in place of νήπιοι is attested by ℵc, A, C2, D2, et al. l. ὁµειρόµενοι. ἱµειρόµενοι is the reading of 0278, 323, et al. γεγένησθε is the reading of K, Ψ, and the Majority Text. Ekthesis signals a significant sense break in the text that occurs in the line previous with µνηµονεύτε.

TRANSCRIPTION OF CODEX I

87

p.93 (1 Thess 2:14–16) 1

5

[Χ(ριστ)]Ω̣ ΙΥ ΟΤΙ ΤΑ ΑΥΤΑ ΕΠΑΘΕΤΑΙ ΚΑΙ [υ]Μ̣ΕΙ̣Σ ΫΠΟ ΤΩΝ ΙΔΙΩΝ ΣΥΜΦΥ [λε]Τ̣ΩΝ ΚΑΘΩΣ ΚΑΙ ΑΥΤΟΙ ΫΠΟ ΤΩ [Ιο]Υ̣ΔΑΙΩΝ ΤΩΝ ΚΑΙ ΤΟΝ ΚΝ ΑΠΟ [κτειν]ΑΝΤΩΝ ΙΝ ΚΑΙ ΤΟΥΣ ΠΡΟΦΗ [τας και ηµ]Α̣Σ ΕΚΔΙΩΞΑΝΤΩΝ ΚΑΙ [πασιν αν(θρωπ)οις] ΕΝΑΝΤΙΩΝ ΚΩΛΥ [οντων ηµας τοι]Σ ΕΘ̣ΝΗΣΙΝ ΛΑ [λησαι ινα σωθωσιν εις το αναπλη] [ρωσαι …]

1 ταύτα in place of τὰ αὐτά is the reading of A. l. ἐπάθετε. 5–6 τοὺς ἰδίους προφήτας is attested by D1, K, L, Ψ, et al. 6 καὶ θεῷ µὴ ἀρεσκόντων is omitted following ἐκδιωξάντων due to parablepsis. 9 Sanders was able to restore the end of the line as [… ανα]π̣λ̣η̣.

p.94 (1 Thess 3:2–5) 1

5

1 2 8 9

[… παρακα] ΛΕΣΑΙ ΫΠΕΡ ΤΗΣ ΠΙΣΤΕΩΣ ΫΜ̣[ων] ΤΟ ΜΗΔΕΝΑ ΣΕΝΕΣΘΑΙ ΕΝ ΤΑΙΣ [θλι] ΨΕΣΙΝ ΤΑΥΤΑΙΣ ΑΥΤΟΙ ΓΑΡ ΟΙΔΑ̣[τε] ΟΤΙ ΕΙΣ ΤΟΥΤΟ ΚΕΙΜΕΘΑ ΚΑΙ [γαρ ο] ΤΕ ΠΡΟΣ ΫΜΑΣ ΗΜΕΝ ΠΡΟΕΛ̣Ε̣[γοµεν] ΫΜΙΝ ΟΤΙ ΜΕΛΛΟΜΕΝ [θλιβεσθαι] ΚΑΘΩΣ ΚΑΙ ΕΓΕΝΕΤΟ̣ [και οιδατε] ΔΙΑ ΤΟΥΤΟ ΚΑΓ[ω µηκετι στεγων] [επεµψα εις το γνωναι την πιστιν …] παρακαλέσαι ὑµᾶς is attested by D2, K, L, et al. περί for ὑπέρ D2, L, 365, et al. l. σαίνεσθαι. Ekthesis signals the beginning of a new sentence. Sanders was able to read the beginning of the line as επεµ̣ψ[̣ α …].

88

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016)

p.95 (1 Thess 3:11–13) 1

5

[ηµ]ΩΝ ΚΑΙ Ο ΚΣ ΗΜΩΝ ΙΣ ΚΑΤΕΥΘΥ [να]Ι̣ ΤΗΝ ΟΔΟΝ ΫΜΩΝ ΠΡΟΣ ΫΜΑΣ [υµα]Σ ΔΕ Ο ΚΣ ΠΛΕΟΝΑΣΑΙ ΚΑΙ ΠΕΡΙΣ [σευ]ΣΑΙ ΤΗΝ ΑΓΑΠΗΝ ΕΙΣ ΑΛΛΗΛΟΥΣ [και ε]ΙΣ ΠΑΝΤΑΣ ΚΑΘΑΠΕΡ ΚΑΙ ΗΜΕΙΣ [εις υ]Μ̣ΑΣ ̣ ΕΙΣ ΤΟ ΣΤΗΡΙΞΑΙ ΫΜΩΝ [τας καρδιας] Α̣ΜΕ ̣ ̣ΜΠΤΟΥΣ ΕΝ ΑΓΙ [ωσυνη εµπροσθεν] Τ̣ΟΥ ̣ ΘΥ Κ̣ΑΙ̣ ̣ [π(ατ)ρ(ο)ς ηµων εν τη παρουσια το]Υ̣ Κ̣Υ̣

All other witnesses read ἡµῶν in place of ὑµῶν. A reads θεός in place of κυρίος. Other witnesses use a dative (τῇ ἀγάπῃ) or the genitive (F and G) following the verb. Cf. Wayment, Scribal Characteristics, 258. 7 ἀµέµπτως is the reading of B, L, 0278, et al. 7–8 A reads δικαιοσύνη in place of ἁγιωσύνη. 9 The length of the line makes the nomen sacrum likely.

2 3 4

p.96 (1 Thess 4:7–10) 1

5

1 2 3

[ . . .ακα] ΘΑΡΣΙΑ ΑΛΛ ΕΝ ΑΓΙΑΣΜΩ· ΤΟΙΓΑ̣[ρουν] Ο ΑΘΕΤΩΝ ΟΥΚ ΑΝΟΝ ΑΘΕΤΑΙ ΑΛ̣[λα τον] ΘΝ ΤΟΝ ΔΙΔΟΝΤΑ ΤΟ ΠΝΑ ΤΟ ΑΓ[ιον] ΑΥΤΟΥ ΕΙΣ ΫΜΑΣ· ΠΕΡΙ ΔΕ Τ̣[ης φι] ΛΑΔΕΛΦΙΑΣ ΟΥ ΧΡΙΑΝ ΕΙΧΟ[µεν γρα] ΦΙΝ ΫΜΙΝ ΑΥΤΟΙ ΓΑΡ ΫΜ̣Ε̣[ις θεοδι] ΔΑΚΤΟΙ ΕΣΤΕ ΕΙΣ [το αγαπαν αλλη] ΛΟΥΣ ΚΑΙ̣ Γ̣Α[̣ ρ ποιειτε αυτο εις παν] ΤΑ[ς τους αδελφους τους εν ολη τη …] The mid-point dot signals the end of a sentence. Ekthesis signals a sense break that is noted in the previous line with a mid-point dot. τὸν καὶ διδόντα is attested by ℵ, D*.c, F, G, K, L, et al. while δόντα is the reading of ℵ2, A, K, L, et al.

TRANSCRIPTION OF CODEX I

89

3–4 The word order τὸ πνεῦµα τὸ ἅγιον αὐτοῦ is unattested in other witnesses. The usual word order is τὸ πνεῦµα αὐτοῦ τὸ ἅγιον. 4 ἡµᾶς for ὑµᾶς is attested in A, 6, 365, et al. The mid-point dot signals a significant sense break and the end of a sentence. Ekthesis in the following line also relates to this sense break. 5 l. χρείαν. ℵ2, D*, F, G, et al., read ἔχοµεν in place of εἴχοµεν. ℵ*, A, D1, H, K, L, et al. read ἔχετε. 5–6 l. γράφειν. H, 81, et al. read γράφεσθαι. 8 B reads αὐτὸ καί.

p.97 (1 Thess 4:16–5:1) 1

5

2 3–4 5 6–7 7 9

[απ] ΟΥΝΟΥ ΚΑΙ ΟΙ ΝΕΚΡΟΙ ΕΝ ΧΩ ΑΝΑ [στ]ΗΣΟΝΤΑΙ ΠΡΩΤΟΝ ΕΠΕΙΤΑ Η [µει]Σ ΟΙ ΖΩΝΤΕΣ ΟΙ ΠΕΡΙΛΙΠΟΜΕ [νοι] ΑΜΑ ΣΥΝ ΑΥΤΟΙΣ ΑΡΠΑΓΗΣΟΜΕ [θα ε]Ν̣ ΝΕΦΕΛΑΙΣ ΕΙΣ ΑΠΑΝΤΗΣΙ [του κ(υριο)υ] ΕΙΣ ΑΕΡΑ ΚΑΙ ΟΥΤΩΣ ΠΑΝΤΟ [τε συν κ(υρι)ω ε]ΣΟΜΕΘΑ· ΩΣΤΕ ΠΑΡΑ [καλειτε αλληλ]Ο̣ΥΣ ̣ ̣ Ε̣Ν̣ ΤΟΙΣ ΛΟΓΟΙΣ [τουτοις περι δε των χρον]Ω̣ D*, F, G, et al. read πρῶτοι. l. περιλειπόµενοι. F, G, et al. omit οἱ περιλειπόµενοι. ὑπάντησιν for ἀπάντησιν is the reading of D*, F, G. Given the length of the lines, it is certain that the nomen sacrum was used. The mid-point dot signals the end of a sentence. Sanders restored the end of the line as χρ]ο̣ν̣ων̣ ̣ κ̣α̣ι̣, but the new images indicate that the line ended with an omega with a terminal nu. Given the length of the line, the final omega must be the ending of χρόνων and not τῶν.

90

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016)

p.98 (1 Thess 5:9–12) 1

5

[… ε] ΘΕΤΟ ΗΜΑΣ Ο ΘΣ ΕΙΣ ΟΡΓΗΝ ΑΛΛ [εις πε] ΡΙΠΟΙΗΣΙΝ ΣΩΤΗΡΙΑΣ ΔΙΑ ΤΟΥ [κ(υριο)υ η] ΜΩΝ ΙΥ ΧΥ ΤΟΥ ΑΠΟΘΑΝΟΝΤΟ[ς υπερ] ΗΜΩΝ ΙΝΑ ΕΙΤΕ ΓΡΗΓΟΡΩΜ[εν ει] ΤΕ ΚΑΘΕΥΔΩΜΕΝ ΑΜΑ ΣΥΝ Α[υτω ζη] ΣΩΜΕΝ· ΔΙΟ ΠΑΡΑΚΑΛΕΙΤ[ε αλληλους] ΚΑΙ ΟΙΚΟΔΟΜΕΙΤ̣Ε̣ [εις τον ενα] Κ̣ΑΘ ̣ Ω ̣ Σ ̣ ̣ Κ̣[αι ποιετε ερωτωµεν] [δε υµας αδελφοι ειδεναι τους κοπιωντας …]

𝔓30 reads ὁ θεὸς ἡµᾶς. 𝔓30vid, B, et al. omit Χριστοῦ. περί in place of ὑπέρ is the reading of ℵ*, B, 33, et al., while 𝔓30, ℵ2, A, D, F, G, et al. read ὑπέρ. 5–6 ζῶµεν is the reading of D*, and ζήσοµεν is the reading of A. 6 The mid-point dot signals the end of a sentence. 9 Sanders read the beginning of the line as δ̣ε̣ υ̣µα ̣ ̣ς [. 1 3

p.99 (1 Thess 5:23–27) 1

5

4

[… ο] [λο]ΚΛΗΡΟΝ ΫΜΩΝ ΤΟ ΠΝΑ ΚΑΙ Η ΨΥ [χη] Κ̣ΑΙ ΤΟ ΣΩΜΑ ΑΜΕΜΠΤΩΣ ΕΝ [τη] Π̣ΑΡΟΥΣΙΑ ΤΟΥ ΚΥ ΗΜΩΝ ΙΥ ΧΥ [τηρ]ΗΘΕΙΗ· [πιστ]ΟΣ Ο ΚΑΛΩΝ ΫΜΑΣ ΟΣ ΚΑΙ ΠΟΙ [ησει] Α̣ΔΕΛΦΟΙ ΠΡΟΣΕΥΧΕΣΘΑΙ [περι ηµ]ΩΝ· [ασπασασθε τ]Ο̣ΥΣ ̣ ̣ ΑΔΕΛΦΟΥΣ ΠΑΝ [τας εν φιληµατι αγιω ενορκι]Ζ̣Ω̣ Υ̣Μ[ας] It is worth noting that the blank space here, which extends to the end of the line, is a somewhat rare phenomenon. It is more often the case that major sense breaks are noted by mid-point dots and by the combination of ekthesis in the following line. The same applies for the second space which occurs in line 7. Lines 4 and 7 likely began with ekthesis.

TRANSCRIPTION OF CODEX I 5 6 7

9

91

ἡµᾶς for ὑµᾶς in A. l. προσεύχεσθε. The fragment appears to omit καί before περί, a restoration that is made based on the space available. The omission of καί is also attested in ℵ, A, D1, F, G, et al. The sense break signals the end of a sentence. Sanders read part of the line […ορκι]ζω, which is also the reading of ℵ, D1, F, G, K, L, et al.

p.100 (2 Thess 1:1–3) 1

5

10 1

†

ΠΡΟΣ ΘΕΣΣΑΛΟΝΙΚΕΙΣ̣ Β̣

ΠΑΥΛΟΣ ΚΑΙ ΣΙΛΟΥΑΝΟΣ ΚΑΙ ΤΙ̣Μ[̣ ο] ΘΕΟΣ ΤΗ ΕΚΚΛΗΣΙΑ ΘΕΣΣΑΛ̣ΟΝ ̣ [̣ ικε] ΩΝ ΕΝ ΘΩ ΠΡΙ ΗΜΩΝ ΚΑΙ ΚΥ [Ι(ησο)υ Χ(ριστ)ω] ΧΑΡΙΣ ΫΜΙΝ ΚΑΙ ΕΙΡΗΝΗ ΑΠΟ Θ[(εο)υ π(ατ)ρ(ο)ς] ΗΜΩΝ ΚΑΙ ΚΥ ΙΥ ΧΥ· ΕΥΧΑ[ριστειν] ΟΦΙΛΟΜΕΝ ΤΩ ΘΩ ΠΑΝΤ[οτε περι] ΫΜΩΝ ΑΔΕΛΦΟΙ ΚΑΘ[ως αξιον ε] ΣΤΙΝ ΟΤΙ ΫΠΕ̣Ρ[̣ αυξανει η πιστις] Ϋ̣ΜΩ ̣ [̣ ν …]

There is a staurogram in the upper left corner of the page. The superscription heading (ΠΡΟΣ ΘΕΣΣΑΛΟΝΙΚΕΙΣ Β) has decorative lines both above and below the letters. 2, 5, 7 These lines are all set off by ekthesis, signaling significant sense breaks in the text. 4 Other witnesses read κυρίῳ. κυρίῳ is the correct reading with the preposition ἐν, but the error may have arisen through attraction to the noun Ἰησοῦ. It is possible that the due to the genitive ending of κυρίου that the text should also be restored Χ(ριστ)οῦ. See Wayment, Scribal Characteristics, 258. ἐν θεῷ καὶ πατρί is the reading of ℵ*. 6 B, D, P, et al. omit ἡµῶν. 7 l. ὀφείλοµεν.

92

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016)

p.101 (2 Thess 1:10–11) ΚΓ 1

5

[… ενδο] [ξ]ΑΣΘ̣ΗΝΑΙ ΕΝ ΤΟΙΣ ΑΓΙΟΙΣ ΑΥΤΟΥ ΚΑΙ [θ]Α̣ΥΜΑΣΘΗΝΑΙ ΕΝ ΠΑΣΙΝ ΤΟΙΣ ΠΙ [στ]ΕΥΣΑΣΙΝ· ΟΤΙ ΕΠΙΣΤΕΥΘΗ ΤΟ [µαρ]ΤΥΡΙΟΝ ΗΜΩΝ ΕΦ ΫΜΑΣ ΕΝ ΤΗ [ηµε]ΡΑ ΕΚΕΙΝΗ ΕΙΣ Ο ΚΑΙ ΠΡΟΣΕΥ [χοµ]ΕΘΑ ΠΑΝΤΟΤΕ ΠΕΡΙ ΫΜΩΝ [ινα υ]ΜΑΣ ΑΞΙΩΣΗ ΤΗΣ ΚΛΗΣΕΩΣ [ο θ(εο)ς ηµων] Κ̣ΑΙ ΠΛΗΡΩΣΗ ΠΑΣΑΝ [ευδοκιαν αγαθωσυνης και] ΕΡ [γον …]

The quire number ΚΓ (23) appears in the upper right corner with a decorative horizontal stroke both above and below the letters. 2–3 πιστεύσασιν εἰς αὐτόν 0278; πιστεύουσιν Ψ, 33, 630, et al. ἐπιστώθη 104. The mid-point dot signals a minor break in the middle of a sentence, akin to a comma. 8 πληρώσει A, K, P, Ψ, et al.

p.102 (2 Thess 2:5–8) 1

5

1 3 4

ΟΥ ΜΝΗΜΟΝΕΥΕΤΕ ΟΤΙ ΕΤΙ ΩΝ Π̣[ρος] ΫΜΑΣ ΤΑΥΤΑ ΕΛΕΓΟΝ ΫΜΙΝ ΚΑΙ [νυν] ΤΟ ΚΑΤΕΧΟΝ ΟΙΔΑΤΑΙ ΕΙΣ ΤΟ ΑΠ[οκα] ΛΥΦΘΗΝΑΙ ΑΥΤΟΝ ΕΝ ΤΩ ΑΥΤ̣ΟΥ ̣ ̣ [και] ΡΩ ΤΟ ΓΑΡ ΜΥΣΤΗΡΙΟΝ ΗΔΗ Ε̣ΝΕ ̣ ̣[ρ] ΓΕΙΤΑΙ ΤΗΣ ΑΝΟΜΙΑΣ ΜΟΝΟ[ν ο κα] ΤΕΧΩΝ ΑΡΤΙ ΕΩΣ ΕΚ Μ̣Ε̣[σου γενη] ΤΑΙ ΚΑΙ ΤΟΤΕ ΑΠ[οκαλυφθησεται] Ο Α̣ΝΟ ̣ Μ ̣ Ο ̣ Σ ̣ ̣ Ο̣Ν̣ Ο̣ Κ̣[(υριο)ς Ι(ησου)ς . . .] ἐµοῦ ὄντος in place of ὤν in D*, 33, 81, et al. l. οἴδατε. ℵ2, B, D, F, G, L, et al. read ἑαυτοῦ for αὐτοῦ.

TRANSCRIPTION OF CODEX I

93

p.103 (2 Thess 2:14–17) 1

5

[δο]ΞΗΣ ΤΟΥ ΚΥ ΗΜΩΝ ΙΥ ΧΥ· [αρα] ΟΥΝ ΑΔΕΛΦΟΙ ΣΤΗΚΕΤΑΙ ΚΑΙ [κρ]ΑΤΕΙΤΕ ΤΑΣ ΠΑΡΑΔΟΣΕΙΣ ΑΣ Ε [διδ]ΑΧΘΗΤΑΙ ΕΙΤΕ ΔΙΑ ΛΟΓΟΥ ΕΙΤΕ [δι ε]ΠΙΣΤΟΛΗΣ ΗΜΩΝ· ΑΥΤΟΣ ΔΕ Ο [κ(υριο)ς η]Μ̣ΩΝ ΙΣ ΧΣ ΚΑΙ Ο ΘΣ ΚΑΙ ΠΗΡ ΗΜΩ [ο αγαπη]Σ̣ΑΣ ΗΜΑΣ̣ ΚΑΙ ΔΟΥΣ ΠΑΡΑΚΛΗ [σιν αιωνιαν και ε]ΛΠΙΔΑ ΑΓΑΘΗΝ ΕΝ [χαριτι παρακαλεσαι] Ϋ̣ΜΩ ̣ Ν ̣ ̣ ΤΑΣ

1

The mid-point dot signals the end of a sentence and a major sense break. 2 l. στήκετε. 3–4 l. ἐδιδάχθητε. 5 The mid-point dot designates a sense break, although the spacing of the following line makes it unclear whether it began with ekthesis. 6 ℵ2a, B, D*, K, et al. omit ὁ before θεός. Instead of καὶ πατήρ, ℵ*, B, D*, F, G, read ὁ πατήρ.

p.104 (2 Thess 3:8–10) 1

5

2 6

ΑΡΤΟΝ ΕΦΑΓΟΜΕΝ ΠΑΡΑ ΤΙΝΟΣ [αλλ εν] ΚΟΠΩ ΚΑΙ ΜΟΧΘΩ ΝΥΚΤΑ ΚΑΙ ΗΜ̣[εραν] ΕΡΓΑΖΟΜΕΝΟΙ ΠΡΟΣ ΤΟ ΜΗ ΕΠΙΒ[αρησαι] ΤΙΝΑ ΫΜΩΝ ΟΥΧ ΟΤΙ ΟΥΚ Ε̣ΧΟ ̣ Μ ̣ [̣ εν εξου] ΣΙΑΝ ΑΛΛ ΙΝΑ ΕΑΥΤΟΥΣ ΤΥΠΟΝ Δ̣[ωµεν] UΜΙΝ ΕΙΣ ΤΟ ΜΙΜΙΣΘ̣ΑΙ̣ Η̣ΜΑ ̣ Σ ̣ Κ̣[αι γαρ ο] ΤΕ ΗΜΕΝ ΠΡΟΣ ΫΜ̣ΑΣ ΤΟ̣ΥΤ̣[ο παρηγγελ] ΛΟΜΕΝ ΥΜΙΝ ΟΤ̣[ι ει τις ου θελει ερ] Γ̣Α[̣ ζεσθαι µηδε εσθιετω …] νυκτὸς καὶ ἡµέρας is the reading of ℵ, B, F, G, et al. l. µιµεῖσθαι.

94

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016)

p.105 (Heb 1:1–3) 1

5

ΠΡΟΣ ΕΒΡΑΙΟΥΣ

†

[πο]ΛΥΜΕΡΩΣ ΚΑΙ ΠΟΛΥΤΡΟΠΩΣ [πα]ΛΑΙ Ο ΘΣ ΛΑΛΗΣΑΣ ΤΟΙΣ ΠΑΤΡΑΣΙΝ [εν] ΤΟΙΣ ΠΡΟΦΗΤΑΙΣ ΕΠ ΕΣΧΑΤΟΥ [τω]Ν ΗΜΕΡΩΝ ΤΟΥΤΩΝ ΕΛΑΛΗΣΕΝ [ηµ]ΙΝ ΕΝ ΥΙΩ ΟΝ ΕΘΗΚΕΝ ΚΛΗΡΟΝΟ [µον] ΠΑΝΤΩΝ ΔΙ ΟΥ ΚΑΙ ΕΠΟΙΗΣΕΝ [τους αι]Ω̣ΝΑΣ ΟΣ̣ ΩΝ ΑΠΑΥ[γ]Α̣Σ̣ΜΑ ̣ ̣ Τ̣ΗΣ [δοξης και χαρακ]Τ̣ΗΡ ̣ ̣ Τ̣Η[̣ ς υ]Π̣ΟΣ ̣ ̣Τ̣Α̣ [σεως …]

1

There is a staurogram in the upper right corner of the page. The superscription heading (ΠΡΟΣ ΕΒΡΑΙΟΥΣ) has decorative lines both above and below the letters. 2 Interestingly, the ρ of πολυµερῶς is very small, and its tail does not extend down into the following line unlike almost every other ρ throughout the manuscript. There are some instances elsewhere of smaller ρ at the end of the line, but this does not apply here; instead, it is possible that it may be a correction. 3 τοῖς πατράσιν ἡµῶν is supported by 𝔓12vid.46c, ar, t, et al. πατράσιν is not written as a nomen sacrum, a notable occurrence for Codex I. 4 ἐσχάτων is attested by Ψ, 629, 1505, et al. 6 The scribe did not use the nomen sacrum for υἱῷ (see note for line 3 also). 7 𝔓46, 0150, samss., et al. omit καί. 7–8 τοὺς αἰῶνας ἐποίησεν is the reading of D1, K, L, P, Ψ, et al.

p.106 (Heb 1:9–12) 1

5

ΔΙΑ ΤΟΥΤΟ ΕΧΡΙΣΕΝ ΣΕ Ο ΘΣ Ο ΘΣ Σ̣[ου] ΕΛΑΙΟΝ ΑΓΑΛΛΙΑΣΕΩΣ ΠΑΡΑ ΤΟΥ[ς µε] ΤΟΧΟΥΣ ΣΟΥ ΚΑΙ ΣΥ ΚΑΤ ΑΡΧΑΣ Κ̣[(υρι)ε την] ΓΗΝ ΕΘΕΜΕΛΙΩΣΑΣ ΚΑΙ ΕΡΓΑ̣ [των] ΧΕΙΡΩΝ ΣΟΥ ΕΙΣΙΝ ΟΙ ΟΥΝΟΙ Α[υτοι] ΑΠΟΛΟΥΝΤΑΙ ΣΥ ΔΕ ΔΙΑΜΕΝΕ[ις και]

TRANSCRIPTION OF CODEX I

95

ΠΑΝΤΕ̣Σ ΩΣ ΙΜΑΤ̣ΙΟΝ ΠΑΛ̣[αιωθησον] ΤΑ̣Ι̣ Κ̣[αι] ΩΣΕΙ Π̣[εριβολαιον ελιξεις …] 1 6

Ekthesis signals a minor sense break in the middle of a sentence. διαµενεῖς is attested by D2, 0243, et al.

p.107 (Heb 2:4–7) 1

5

[µε]ΡΙΣΜΟΙ ΚΑΤΑ ΤΗΝ ΑΥΤΟΥ ΘΕΛΗ [σι]Ν· ΟΥ ΓΑΡ ΑΓΓΕΛΟΙΣ ΥΠΕΤΑΞΕΝ [την] ΟΙΚΟΥΜΕΝΗΝ ΤΗΝ ΜΕΛΛΟΥΣΑ [πε]Ρ̣Ι ΗΣ ΛΑΛΟΥΜΕΝ ΔΙΕΜΑΡΤΥΡΑ [το δ]Ε ΠΟΥ ΤΙΣ ΛΕΓΩΝ ΤΙ ΕΣΤΙΝ ΑΝ [θρω]Π̣ΟΣ ̣ ̣ ΟΤΙ ΜΙΜΝΗΣΚΗ ΑΥΤΟΥ [η υ(ιο)ς α]ΝΟΥ Ο̣ΤΙ ΕΠΙΣΚΕΠΤΗ ΑΥ [τον ηλαττωσ]Α̣Σ̣ Α̣ΥΤΟΝ ΒΡ̣ΑΧ ̣ Υ ΤΙ

µερισµοι is one of very few genuine errors found in Codex I, which creates a nonsense reading (Wayment, Scribal Characteristics, 259). The omission of the final sigma, creating a nominative plural in place of the dative plural, makes little sense. τοῦ θεοῦ replaces αὐτοῦ in D*. 2 The mid-point dot signals a sense break, and was likely followed by ekthesis in the next line. 5–6 It is notable that ἄνθρωπος is not written as a nomen sacrum even though it used in that form in line 8. 5 A number of early witnesses add a significant amount of additional material to the beginning of the quotation from Psalms, which is absent from this manuscript and 𝔓46, B, D2, K, L, et al. 7 The length of the line indicates that the nomen sacrum was used for υἱός.

1

p.108 (Heb 2:12–14) 1

[… εκκλη] ΣΙΑΣ ΥΜΝΗΣΩ ΣΕ· ΚΑΙ ΠΑΛΙΝ Ε̣[γω]

96

5

1 4 5 7

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016) ΕΣΟΜΑΙ ΠΕΠΟΙΘΩΣ ΕΠ ΑΥΤΩ Κ̣[αι] ΠΑΛΙΝ ΙΔΟΥ ΕΓΩ ΚΑΙ ΤΑ ΠΑΙΔ̣ΙΑ ̣ ̣ [α µοι] ΕΔΩΚΕΝ Ο ΘΣ· ΕΠΙ ΟΥΝ ΤΑ [παιδια] ΚΕΚΟΙΝΩΝΗΚΕΝ ΑΙΜΑΤΟΣ Κ̣ΑΙ̣ ̣ [σαρ] ΚΟΣ ΚΑΙ ΑΥΤΟΣ ΠΑΡΑΠΛΗΣΙΩ[ς µετε] Σ̣ΧΕ ̣ ̣Ν̣ Τ̣ΩΝ ̣ ̣ Α̣ΥΤ ̣ ̣ΩΝ ̣ ̣ Ι̣ΝΑ ̣ ̣ Δ̣ΙΑ ̣ ̣ [του θα] Ν̣ΑΤ ̣ ̣ΟΥ ̣ ̣ Κ̣ΑΤ ̣ ̣ΑΡ ̣ Γ ̣ [̣ ηση τον το κρατος . . .] The mid-point punctuation signals a significant sense break. l. ἐπεί. The mid-point punctuation signals the end of a sentence. Ekthesis signals the new sense unit that began in the previous line following the mid-point dot. αὐτῶν παθηµάτων is attested by D*, b, et al.

p.109 (Heb 3:4–6) 1

5

2 3 7 9

[κα]ΤΑΣΚΕΥΑΖΕΤΑΙ ΫΠΟ ΤΙΝΟΣ Ο ΔΕ [πα]ΝΤΑ ΚΑΤΑΣΚΕΥΑΣΑΣ ΘΣ· [Και] Μ̣ΩΥΣΗΣ ΜΕΝ ΠΙΣΤΟΣ ΕΝ ΟΛΩ [τω ο]ΙΚΩ ΑΥΤΟΥ ΩΣ ΘΕΡΑΠΩΝ ΕΙΣ [µαρ]Τ̣ΥΡΙΟΝ ΤΩΝ ΛΑΛΗΘΗΣΟΜΕ [νων] ΧΣ ΔΕ ΩΣ ΥΣ ΕΠΙ ΤΟΝ ΟΙΚΟ [αυτου] Ο̣Υ ΟΙΚΟΣ ΕΣΜΕΝ ΗΜΕ̣ΙΣ ̣ ̣ [εανπερ την πα]Ρ̣ΡΗ ̣ ΣΙΑ̣Ν̣ Κ̣ΑΙ̣ ̣ [το] τὰ πάντα C3, D2, L, P, Ψ, et al. The mid-point punctuation signals the end of a sentence. This line likely began with ekthesis, which is also evident in the relative position of the beginning of the line with respect to the lines above it and below it. ὅς for οὗ in 𝔓46, D*, 0243, et al. Considerations of line length and spacing of letters indicate that the text should be restored ἐάνπερ (𝔓46, ℵ2, A, C, et al.) instead of ἐάν 𝔓13, ℵ1, B, D*, et al.).

TRANSCRIPTION OF CODEX I

97

p.110 (Heb 3:14–16) 1

5

2 3 4 5

ΓΑΡ ΤΟΥ ΧΥ ΓΕΓΟΝΑΜΕΝ ΕΑΝΠΕΡ̣ [την] ΑΡΧΗΝ ΤΗΣ ΫΠΟΣΤΑΣΕΩΣ ΜΕ[χρι τε] ΛΟΥΣ ΒΑΙΒΕΑΝ ΚΑΤΑΣΧΩΜΕΝ· ΕΝ ΤΩ ΛΕΓΕΣΘΑΙ ΣΗΜΕΡΟΝ Ε[αν της] ΦΩΝΗΣ ΑΥΤΟΥ ΑΚΟΥΣΗΤΑΙ [µη σκλη] ΡΥΝΗΤΑΙ ΤΑΣ ΚΑΡΔΙΑΣ ΫΜ[ων ως] Ε̣Ν̣ ΤΩ ΠΑΡΑΠΙΚ̣ΡΑ ̣ Σ ̣ ΜΩ [τινες γαρ] ΑΚΟΥΣΑΝΤΕΣ Π[αρεπικραναν αλ] Λ ΟΥ Π̣[αντες οι εξελθοντες εξ . . .] ὑποστάσεως αὐτοῦ is the reading of A, 629, 1505, et al. l. βεβαίαν. The mid-point dot signals a sense break preceding the quotation from Ps 95:7. Ekthesis indicates the beginning of a new sense unit beginning with ἐν. l. ἀκούσητε, σκληρύνητε.

p.111 (Heb 4:3–6) 1

5

[κα]ΤΑΒΟΛΗΣ ΚΟΣΜΟΥ ΓΕΝΗΘΕΝΤΩ [ει]ΡΗΚΕΝ ΓΑΡ ΠΟΥ ΠΕΡΙ ΤΗΣ ΕΒΔΟ Μ̣ΗΣ ΟΥΤΩΣ ΚΑΙ ΚΑΤΕΠΑΥΣΕΝ Ο ΘΣ [ε]Ν ΤΗ ΗΜΕΡΑ ΤΗ ΕΒΔΟΜΗ ΑΠΟ ΠΑ [τ]Ω̣Ν ΤΩΝ ΕΡΓΩΝ ΑΥΤΟΥ ΚΑΙ ΕΝ ΤΟΥ [τω π]Α̣ΛΙΝ Η ΕΙΣΕΛΕΥΣΟΝΤΑΙ ΕΙΣ ΤΗ [κα]Τ̣ΑΠ̣[α]Υ̣ΣΙΝ ΜΟΥ· ΕΠΙ ΟΥΝ ΑΠΟ [λειπεται τινας] ΕΙΣΕΛΘΕΙΝ ΕΙΣ [αυτην και οι προτερο]Ν̣ Ε̣ΥΗ̣ΓΓ ̣ ̣Ε̣ΛΙ̣ [σθεντες …]

𝔓13, vgmss, syp omit γάρ. l. ἐπεί. The mid-point dot signals the end of a sentence, and the line following may have begun with ekthesis. 9–10 l. εὐαγγελισθέντες.

2 7

98

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016)

p.112 (Heb 4:12–14) 1

5

1 4 6

[… κριτι] ΚΟΣ ΕΝΘΥΜΗΣΕΩΣ ΚΑΙ ΕΝΝΟΙ̣[ων] ΚΑΡΔΙΑΣ ΚΑΙ ΟΥΚ ΕΣΤΙΝ ΚΤΙΣΙΣ̣ [αφα] ΝΗΣ ΕΝΩΠΙΟΝ ΑΥΤΟΥ ΠΑΝΤΑ ΔΕ̣ [γυ] ΜΝΑ ΚΑΙ ΤΕΤΡΑΧΙΛΙΣΜΕΝΑ̣ Τ̣ΟΙ̣ Σ̣ Ο̣[φθαλ] ΜΟΙΣ ΑΥΤΟΥ ΠΡΟΣ ΟΝ ΗΜΙ̣Ν̣ Ο ΛΟΓ[ος] ΕΧΟΝΤΕΣ ΟΥΝ ΑΡΧΙΕΡΕΑ ΜΕΓ[αν διε] ΛΗΛΥΘΟΤΑ ΤΟΥΣ ΟΥΝΟ ̣ ̣Υ̣Σ̣ Ι̣[(ησου)ν τον] Υ̣Ν̣ Τ̣ΟΥ ̣ ̣ Θ̣Υ Κ̣ΡΑΤΩΜΕ̣Ν̣ [της οµολογιας] The shift to the genitive singular ἐνθυµήσεως instead of the genitive plural ἐνθυµήσεων is supported by d, e, and several patristic sources. l. τετραχηλισµένα. Ekthesis signals the beginning of a new sense unit.

p.113 (Heb 5:5–7) 1

5

[γε]ΓΕΝΝΗΚΑ ΣΕ· ΚΑΘΩΣ ΚΑΙ ΕΝ Ε [τερ]Ω ΛΕΓΕΙ ΣΥ ΙΕΡΕΥΣ ΕΙΣ ΤΟΝ ΑΙΩ [να] Κ̣ΑΤΑ ΤΗΝ ΤΑΞΙΝ ΜΕΛΧΙΣΕΔΕΚ· [ο]Σ̣ Ε̣Ν ΤΑΙΣ ΗΜΕΡΑΙΣ ΤΗΣ ΣΑΡΚΟΣ [αυ]ΤΟΥ Δ̣Ε̣ΗΣ ̣ ̣ΕΙΣ ΤΕ ΚΑΙ ΙΚΕΙΣΙΑΣ [προς τον δυ]Ν̣ΑΜ ̣ Ε ̣ ΝΟΝ ΣΩΖΕΙΝ [αυτον] [εκ θανατου µετα] Κ̣ΡΑ ̣ Υ ̣ ΓΗΣ Ε̣ΙΣ ̣ ̣ΧΥ ̣ ̣ [ρας και δακρυων προ]Σ̣Ε̣ΝΕ ̣ ̣[γκας]

σὺ εἶ is the reading of 𝔓13, P, 629. The mid-point dot signals a minor sense break. l. ἱκετηρίας. The reading of the text makes little sense and is a genuine scribal error and not an alternate reading. Wayment, Scribal Characteristics, 259. 7–8 l. ἰσχυρᾶς. 2 3 5

TRANSCRIPTION OF CODEX I

99

p.114 (Heb 6:1–3) 1

5

1 5

6 8

ΧΥ ΛΟΓΟΝ ΕΠΙ ΤΗΝ ΤΕΛΙΟΤΗΤΑ̣ [φε] ΡΩΜΕΘΑ ΜΗ ΠΑΛΙΝ ΘΕΜΕΛΙΟΝ̣ [κα] ΤΑΒΑΛΛΟΜΕΝΟΙ ΜΕΤΑΝΟΙΑΣ ΑΠ̣[ο νε] ΚΡΩΝ ΕΡΓΩΝ ΚΑΙ ΠΙΣΤΕΩΣ ΕΠ̣Ι Θ̣[(εο)ν] ΒΑΠΤΙΣΘΕΝΝ ΔΙΔΑΧΗΣ ΕΠΙΘ̣Ε̣Σ̣[εως] ΤΕ ΧΕΙΡΩΝ ΑΝΑΣΤΑΣΕΩΣ [τε] Ν̣[εκρων] ΚΑΙ ΚΡΙΜΑΤΟΣ ΑΙΩΝ̣ΙΟΥ [και το] ΥΤΟ Π̣ΟΙΗΣΟ̣ΜΕ ̣ ̣Ν̣ [εανπερ επιτρεπη ο θ(εο)ς …] l. τελειότητα. βαπτισθενν is an error for βαπτισµῶν. Sanders notes “vel βαπτισθενη.” The reading with two nu’s makes little sense and is a scribal error. Some manuscripts 𝔓46, B, 0150, d read διδαχήν. The second τε, which was visible to Sanders, is absent from a few witnesses, including B, D*, P, 365, et al. ποιήσωµεν is attested in A, C, D, P, Ψ, et al. Ekthesis signals a new sense unit beginning with the second καί in the previous line.

p.115 (Heb 6:10–13) 1

5

3

[… διακονη] [σα]ΝΤΕΣ ΤΟΙΣ ΑΓΙΟΙΣ ΚΑΙ ΔΙΑΚΟΝΟΥ [τ]Ε̣Σ· ΕΠΙΘΥΜΟΥΜΕΝ ΔΕ ΕΚΑΣΤΟ [υ]Μ̣ΩΝ ΤΗΝ ΑΥΤΗΝ ΕΝΔΙΚΝΥΣΘΑΙ Σ̣ΠΟΥΔΗΝ ΠΡΟΣ ΤΗΝ ΠΛΗΡΟΦΟΡΙΑ Τ̣ΗΣ ΠΙΣΤΕΩΣ ΑΧΡΙ ΤΕΛΟΥΣ ΙΝΑ ΜΗ [ν]ΩΘΡΟΙ ΓΕΝΗΣΘΑΙ ΜΙΜΗΤΕ ΔΕ ΤΩ [δια π]Ι̣Σ̣Τ̣ΕΩΣ ΚΑΙ ΜΑΚΡΟΘΥΜΙΑΣ [κληρον]Ο̣[µ]Ο̣ΥΝΤ̣ΩΝ ΤΑΣ ΕΠΑΓΓΕ [λιας τω γαρ] Α̣Β̣[ρ]Α̣ΑΜ ̣ ̣ Ε̣ΠΑΓ̣Γ̣ΙΛΑ [µενος ͅ …] l. ἐνδείκνυσθαι.

100 5 6 9

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016) Codex I alone reads πίστεως, supported by ar*; most other witnesses read ἐλπίδος, although there is a conflation of the two in 33. l. γένησθε, µιµηταί. l. ἐπαγγειλάµενος.

p.116 (Heb 6:20–7:2) 1

5

5 6

[… προ] ΔΡΟΜΟΣ ΫΠΕΡ ΗΜΩΝ ΕΙΣΗΛΘΕ̣[ν Ι(ησου)ς] ΚΑΤΑ ΤΗΝ ΤΑΞΙΝ ΜΕΛΧΙΣΕΔΕ̣Κ̣ [αρ] ΧΙΕΡΕΥΣ ΓΕΝΟΜΕΝΟΣ ΕΙΣ ΤΟΝ Α̣[ι] ΩΝΑ· ΟΥΤΟΣ ΓΑΡ Ο ΜΕΛΧΙΣΕΔ̣Ε̣[κ] ΒΑΣΙΛΕΥΣ ΣΑΛΗΜ ΙΕΡΕΥΣ ΤΟΥ ΘΥ̣ [του] ΫΨΙΣΤΟΥ ΟΣ Σ̣ΥΝ ̣ Α ̣ Ν ̣ Τ̣ΗΣ ̣ Α̣Σ Α̣[βρααµ] Υ̣ΠΟ ̣ Σ ̣ Τ ̣ ̣Ρ Ε ̣ ̣Φ Ο ̣ Ν ̣ Τ ̣ ̣Ι̣ Α̣ΠΟ ̣ ̣ Τ̣ΗΣ ̣ ̣ Κ̣ΟΠ ̣ [̣ ης] ΤΩΝ Β̣ΑΣ ̣ Ι̣ Λ ̣ [̣ εων και ευλογησας] Α̣ΥΤ ̣ ̣ΟΝ ̣ ̣ [ω και δεκατην απο παντων …] Ekthesis indicates the sense break in the previous line, which is indicated by a mid-point dot. ὁ, in place of ὅς, is the reading of 𝔓46vid, C*, L, P, Ψ, et al. Metzger and Ehrman note, “In this case one can see how the primitive error entered both the Alexandrian and Western traditions: the following word begins with the letter sigma (συναντήσας), so the correct ο came to be pronounced and spelled ος.” Bruce M. Metzger and Bart D. Ehrman, The Text of the New Testament: Its Transmission, Corruption, and Restoration, 4th ed., (New York: Oxford, 2005), 336–37.

p.117 (Heb 7:7–11) ΚΔ 1

[ευ]ΛΟΓΕΙΤΑΙ· ΚΑΙ ΩΔΕ ΜΕΝ ΔΕΚΑΤΑΣ [α]Π̣ΟΘΝΗΣΚΟΝΤΕΣ ΑΝΟΙ ΛΑΜΒΑΝΟΥ [σ]ΙΝ ΕΚΕΙ ΔΕ ΜΑΡΤΥΡΟΜΕΝΟΣ ΟΤΙ ΖΗ ΚΑΙ ΩΣ ΕΠΟΣ ΕΙΠΕΙΝ ΔΙΑ̣ ΑΒΡΑΑΜ

TRANSCRIPTION OF CODEX I 5

101

̣ ̣ΙΣ ̣ ̣ Ο ΔΕΚΑΤΑΣ ΛΑΜΒΑΝΩ [κα]Ι̣ ΛΕ̣ΥΕ [δε]Δ̣Ε̣ΚΑ ̣ Τ ̣ ̣ΩΤ ̣ ̣ΑΙ̣ ̣ ΕΤΙ ΓΑΡ ΕΝ Τ̣Η̣ Ο̣ΣΦ ̣ Υ ̣ Ι̣ ̣ [του πα]Τ̣ΡΟ ̣ Σ ̣ ̣ Η̣[ν οτ]Ε Σ̣ΥΝ ̣ Η ̣ Ν ̣ Τ ̣ ̣ΗΣ̣Ε̣Ν̣ [αυτω Μελχισ]Ε̣ΔΕ ̣ ̣Κ̣ Ε̣Ι̣ Μ̣Ε̣[ν] [ουν τελειωσις δια] Τ̣ΗΣ ̣ ̣ ΛΕ̣[υιτι] [κης …]

The quire number ΚΔ (24) appears in the upper right corner with a decorative horizontal stroke both above and below the letters. 1 The mid-point dot indicates the end of a sentence. 3 l. µαρτυρούµενος. 5 Λευί is the spelling of ℵ*, C2, D, K, L, P, et al. Λευεις is a Hellenized version of the indeclinable Λευι. 7 The letters ]τ̣ρ̣ο̣ς̣ would signal that the scribe did not use the nomen sacrum in this instance, although they are restored with hesitancy, and Sanders was unable to see them when he completed his edition. 8–9 These two lines are significantly shorter than those above, but the reasons for leaving them shorter are uncertain.

p.118 (Heb 7:18–20) 1

5

9 1 4 5 7

ΑΘΕΤΗΣΕΙΣ ΜΕΝ ΓΑΡ ΓΕΙΝΕΤΑΙ ΠΡ[οα] ΓΟΥΣΗΣ ΕΝΤΟΛΗΣ ΔΙΑ ΤΟ ΑΥΤΗΣ [α] ΣΘΕΝΕΣ ΚΑΙ ΑΝΩΦΕΛΕΣ ΟΥ ΔΕΝ ΓΑΡ ΕΤΕΛΙΩΣΕΝ Ο ΝΟΜΟΣ Ε̣Π̣ Ε̣ΙΣΑΓΩΓΗ ΔΕ ΚΡΙΤΤΟΝΟΣ ΕΛΠΙΔ̣[ος] ΔΙ ΗΣ ΕΓΓΙΖΟΜΕΝ ΤΩ ΘΩ Κ̣ΑΙ ΚΑΘ ΟΣΟΝ Ο[υ χ]Ω̣ΡΙ̣ Σ ΟΡ̣[κωµ] ΟΣΙΑΣ ΟΙ ΜΕΝ̣ [γαρ χωρις ορκωµοσ] Ι̣ΑΣ ̣ ̣ ΕΙΣΙΝ ΙΕ[ρεις γεγονοτες …] Ekthesis signals the beginning of a new sentence. l. ἀθέτησις, γίνεται. µέν is the reading of 𝔓46, 1241, sa. l. ἐτελείωσεν. l. κρείττονος. Ekthesis indicates the beginning of a new sentence and paragraph, and it follows a shortened line in the line above it.

102

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016)

p.119 (Heb 7:27–8:1) 1

5

10 2 4 5 6 8

[λ]Α̣ΟΥ· ΤΟΥΤΟ ΓΑΡ ΕΠΟΙΗΣΕΝ ΕΦΑ ΠΑΞ· ΕΑΥΤΟΝ ΠΡΟΣΕΝΕΓΚΑΣ· [ο] Ν̣ΟΜΟΣ ΓΑΡ ΑΝΟΥΣ ΚΑΘΙΣΤΗΣΙΝ [ιε]Ρ̣ΕΙΣ ΕΧΟΝΤΑΣ ΑΣΘΕΝΙΑΝ· [ο λογ]ΟΣ ΔΕ ΤΗΣ ΟΡΚΩΜΟΣΙΑΣ ΤΗΣ [µετα] ΤΟΝ ΝΟΜΟΝ ΫΙΟΝ ΕΙΣ ΤΟΝ [αιωνα] Τ̣Ε̣Τ̣[ελειω]Μ̣ΕΝΟΝ ΚΕΦΑΛ [αιον δε επι τοις λε]ΓΟΜΕΝΟΙΣ ΤΟΙ [ουτον εχοµεν α]ΡΧ̣ΙΕ ̣ ΡΕΑ ΟΣ̣ Ε̣ΚΑ ̣ ̣ [θισεν εν δεξια του θρονου] Τ̣ΗΣ ̣ ̣ ἀνενέγκας is the reading of 𝔓46, B, D, K, L, et al. The first midpoint dot may be a case of transfer of ink from the opposing page. The second denotes the end of a sentence. l. ἀσθένειαν. ℵ, A, B, C, et al. read ἀρχιερεῖς. This line likely began with ekthesis following the sense break in the previous line. Notably, the scribe did not use the nomen sacrum. It is uncertain whether the text should be restored as ἐν with A, b, vgmss, or ἐπί with 𝔓46, ℵ, A, B, et al.

p.120 (Heb 8:7–9) 1

5

ΕΚΕΙΝΗ ΗΝ ΑΜΕΜΠΤΟΣ ΟΥΚ ΑΝ Δ̣[ευ] ΤΕΡΑΣ ΕΖΗΤΕΙΤΟ ΤΟΠΟΣ· ΜΕΜΦΟΜΕΝΟΣ ΓΑΡ ΑΥΤΟΥΣ Λ[εγει] ΙΔΟΥ ΗΜΕΡΑΙ ΕΡΧΟΝΤΑΙ ΛΕΓΕΙ̣ [κ(υριο)ς] ΚΑΙ ΣΥΝΤΕΛΕΣΩ ΕΠΕΙ ΤΟΝ Ο[ικον] ΙΣΛ· ΚΑΙ ΕΠΕΙ ΤΟ̣[ν] Ο̣ΙΚ ̣ Ο ̣ Ν ̣ ̣ Ι̣ΟΥ ̣ [̣ δα] ΔΙΑΘΗΚΗΝ ΚΑΙΝ̣[ην ου κ]Α̣Τ̣[α την] Δ̣ΙΑ ̣ Θ ̣ ΗΚΗΝ ΗΝ̣ [εποιησα τοις πατρασιν] Α̣ΥΤ ̣ ̣ΩΝ ̣ ̣ Ε̣Ν̣ Η̣Μ[̣ ερα επιλαβοµενου µου …]

1–2 B reads ἑτέρας in place of δευτέρας. 2 The mid-point dot signals the end of a sentence. The scribe has also left an unexpectedly large blank space at the end of the line,

TRANSCRIPTION OF CODEX I

103

likely to signal a new paragraph in the line following that is designated by ekthesis. 3 Some witnesses read αὐτοῖς instead of αὐτούς (𝔓46, ℵ2, B, D2, L, et al.). 5, 6 l. ἐπί.

p.121 (Heb 9:1–4) 1

5

1 5

7 8

[τ]Η̣ ΔΙΚΑΙΩΜΑΤΑ ΛΑΤΡΙΑΣ ΤΟ ΤΕ ΑΓΙ [ο]Ν ΚΟΣΜΙΚΟΝ ΣΚΗΝΗ ΓΑΡ ΚΑΤΑΣΚΕΥ Α̣ΣΘΗ Η ΠΡΩΤΗ ΕΝ Η Η ΤΕ ΛΥΧΝΙΑ Κ̣ΑΙ Η ΤΡΑΠΕΖΑ ΚΑΙ Η ΠΡΟΘΕΣΙΣ ΤΩ ΑΡΤΩΝ ΗΤΙΣ ΛΕΓΕΤΑΙ ΑΓΙΑ· [µε]Τ̣Α̣ ΔΕ ΤΟ ΔΕ̣ΥΤ ̣ ΕΡΟΝ ΚΑΤΑΠΕΤΑ [σµα] Σ̣ΚΗ ̣ Ν ̣ Η ̣ ̣ Η̣ Λ̣Ε̣Γ̣ΟΜΕΝΗ ΑΓΙΑ̣ [αγιων χρυσουν] Ε̣ΧΟΥΣΑ ΘΥΜΙΑ [τηριον και την κιβωτον] Τ̣ΗΣ ̣ ̣ Δ̣ΙΑ ̣ ̣ [θηκης …] l. λατρείας. A few later witnesses add σκηνή before δικαιώµατα (6mg, 81, 104, et al.), a reading that cannot be ruled out based on the faint traces of η at the beginning of the line. Following ἄρτων, B and a few other witnesses (samss), add καὶ τὸ χρυσοῦν θυµιατήριον from Heb 9:4. Four different readings are attested for ἅγια (a neuter nominative/vocative), which is attested in D2, K, L, 0278, et al., ἁγία (a feminine nominative/vocative), which is attested in 365, 629, vgmss, et al., ἅγια ἁγίων (𝔓46, A, D*, et al.), and τὰ ἅγια (B). τὰ ἅγια ἁγίων is the reading of ℵ2, B, D2, K, L, et al., while ἅγια τῶν ἁγίων is the reading of P and 1739. B, samss move a portion of the text beginning with χρυσοῦν to verse 2 (see note for line 5 above). Those texts read ἁγίων ἔχουσα.

104

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016)

p.122 (Heb 9:9–11) 1

5

10

[… δω] ΡΑ ΤΕ ΚΑΙ ΘΥΣΙΑΙ ΠΡΟΣΦΕΡΟΝΤΑ[ι µη] ΔΥΝΑΜΕΝΑΙ ΚΑΤΑ ΣΥΝΕΙΔΗΣΙΝ [τε] ΛΙΩΣΑΙ ΤΟΝ ΛΑΤΡΕΥΟΝΤΑ ΜΟΝΟ[ν] ΕΠΙ ΒΡΩΜΑΣΙΝ ΚΑΙ ΠΟΜΑΣΙΝ Κ̣[αι] ΔΙΑΦΟΡΟΙΣ ΒΑΠΤΙΣΜΟΙΣ ΔΙΚΑ[ιω] ΜΑΤΑ ΣΑΡΚΟΣ ΜΕΧΡΙ ΚΑΙΡΟΥ̣ Δ̣[ιορ] ΘΩΣΕΩΣ ΕΠΙ̣ΚΕ ̣ ̣ΙΜ ̣ Ε ̣ ΝΑ ΧΣ [δε παραγε] [ν]Ο̣ΜΕ ̣ ̣ΝΟ ̣ Σ ΑΡ̣Χ[̣ ιερευς των µελ] [λ]Ο̣ΝΤ ̣ Ω̣Ν Α̣Γ̣Α[̣ θων δια της µειζο] Ν̣Ο[̣ ς και …]

2–3 l. τελειῶσαι. 5–6 καὶ δικαιώµατα ℵ2, B; καὶ δικαιώµασιν D1, K, L, 365, et al., δικαίωµα D*. 8–9 γενοµένων in place of µελλόντων is the reading of 𝔓46, B, D*, et al.

p.123 (Heb 9:16–19) 1

5

4 6 7 8

[… ο] [π]ΟΥ ΓΑΡ ΔΙΑΘΗΚΗ ΘΑΝΑΤΟΝ ΑΝΑΓΚΗ Φ̣ΕΡΕΣΘΑΙ ΤΟΥ ΔΙΑΤΙΘΕΜΕΝΟΥ [δ]ΙΑΘΗΚΗ ΓΑΡ ΕΠΙ ΝΕΚΡΟΙΣ ΒΕΒΑΙΑ [ε]Π̣ΕΙ ΜΗΠΟΤΕ ΙΣΧΥΕΙ ΟΤΕ ΖΗ Ο ΔΙ [α]Θ̣ΕΜΕΝΟΣ ΟΘΕΝ ΟΥΔΕ Η ΠΡΩΤΗ [χω]Ρ̣ΙΣ ΑΙΜ̣[α]ΤΟΣ ΕΝΚΕΚΕΝΙΣΤΑΙ [λαλη]Θ̣ΕΙΣ̣[ης γαρ π]ΑΣΗΣ ΕΝΤΟΛΗΣ [κατα τον νοµον υπο] ΜΩΥΣΕΩΣ ΠΑ [τι …] µὴ τότε ℵ*, D*. l. ἐγκεναίνισται. τῆς ἐντολῆς is the reading of 𝔓46, D*. Given the spacing of the beginning of the line, it is unlikely that τόν was absent (contrast ℵ*, D2, K, P, 365, et al.).

TRANSCRIPTION OF CODEX I

105

p.124 (Heb 9:25–27) 1

5

[… εισ] ΕΡΧΕΤΑΙ ΕΙΣ ΤΑ ΑΓΙΑ ΚΑΤ ΕΝΙΑΥ[τον] ΕΝ ΑΙΜΑΤΙ ΑΛΛΟΤΡΙΩ ΕΠΙ ΕΔΙ Α[υτον] ΠΟΛΛΑΚΕΙΣ ΠΑΘΕΙΝ ΑΠΟ ΚΑΤΑΒ̣[ο] ΛΗΣ ΚΟΣΜΟΥ· ΝΥΝ ΔΕ ΑΠΑΞ ΕΠΙ̣ [συν] ΤΕΛΙΑ ΤΩΝ ΑΙΩΝΩΝ ΕΙΣ ΑΘΕΤΗ̣[σιν] ΤΗΣ ΑΜΑΡΤΙΑΣ ΔΙΑ ΤΗ̣Σ ΘΥΣΙ[ας αυτου] ΠΕΦΑΝΕΡΩΤ̣[αι κα]Ι̣ Κ̣ΑΘ ̣ ̣ [οσον] ΑΠΟΚΕΙΤΑΙ Τ̣[οις αν(θρωπ)οις απαξ απο] [θ]Α̣Ν[ειν µετα δε τουτο κρισις …]

τὰ ἅγια τῶν ἁγίων is the reading of ℵ2, samss. l. ἐπεὶ ἔδει. l. πολλάκις. NA28 uses the form νυνί. The mid-point dot indicates a minor sense break within a sentence. 4–5 l. συντελείᾳ. 6 Some witnesses (𝔓46, C, D2, K, L, Ψ, et al.) omit the definite article before ἁµαρτίας. D* and some patristic quotations of Heb 9:26 preserve the plural ἁµαρτιῶν. 8 Given the length of the line, the nomen sacrum was almost certainly used. Ekthesis signals a sense break in the previous line following καί. 1 2 3 4

p.125 (Heb 10:5–8) 1

5

[… κατηρ] [τισ]Ω̣ ΜΟΙ· ΟΛΟΚΑΥΤΩΜΑΤΑ ΚΑΙ ΠΕ Ρ̣Ι ΑΜΑΡΤΙΑΣ ΟΥΚ ΗΥΔΟΚΗΣΑΣ· ΤΟ [τ]Ε ΕΙΠΟΝ ΙΔΟΥ ΗΚΩ· ΕΝ ΚΕΦΑΛΙ Δ̣Ι ΒΙΒΛΙΟΥ ΓΕΓΡΑΠΤΑΙ ΠΕΡΙ ΕΜΟΥ [το]Υ̣ ΠΟΙΗΣΑΙ Ο ΘΣ ΤΟ ΘΕΛΗΜΑ ΣΟΥ [ηβου]Λ̣ΗΘΗΣ̣ΑΝ ̣ ̣ Α̣ΝΩΤΕΡΟΝ ΛΕΓΩ [οτι θυσιαν και πρ]Ο̣ΣΦΟΡΑ̣Ν̣ Κ̣ΑΙ̣ ̣ Ο̣Λ̣ [οκαυτωµατα και] Π̣Ε̣ΡΙ ΑΜ̣ΑΡ ̣ [̣ τιας] [ουκ ηθελησας ο]Υ̣ΔΕ̣ [ευδοκησας …]

106 1 2 3 4 6

7

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016) ὁλοκαύτωµα is attested by 𝔓46, D, 1881, et al. l. εὐδόκησας. The mid-point dot designates a minor sense break within a biblical quotation. γέγραπται γάρ is attested by 𝔓46, D*.c. An additional word is added to the quotation of Ps 40:9 that is not attested in other witnesses, ἠβουλήθησαν. This derives from the language of Ps 40:9, although the third person singular ἐβουλήθην of the Psalm is changed to a third-person plural (Wayment, Scribal Characteristics, 260). θυσίας καὶ προσφοράς is attested by ℵ*, A, C, D*, P, et al.

p.126 (Heb 10:16–18) 1

5

ΤΑΣ ΗΜΕΡΑΣ ΕΚΕΙΝΑΣ ΛΕΓΕΙ ΚΣ [δι] ΔΟΥΣ ΝΟΜΟΥΣ ΜΟΥ ΕΠΙ ΚΑΡΔΙΑΣ [αυ] ΤΩΝ ΚΑΙ ΕΠΙ ΤΗΝ ΔΙΑΝΟΙΑΝ ΑΥΤ[ων] ΕΠΙΓΡΑΨΩ ΑΥΤΟΥΣ ΚΑΙ ΤΩΝ ΑΝ[ο] ΜΙΩΝ ΑΥΤΩΝ ΚΑΙ ΤΩΝ ΑΜΑΡ̣[τιων] ΑΥΤΩΝ ΟΥ ΜΗ ΜΝΗΣΘΗ̣ΣΟ[µαι ετι] Ο̣ΠΟ ̣ Υ ̣ ̣ Δ̣Ε̣ Α̣ΦΕΣΙΣ Τ[ουτων ουκετι προσ] Φ̣ΟΡ ̣ Α ̣ ̣ ΠΕΡ̣[ι α]Μ̣Α[̣ ρτιας …]

Following αὐτούς, 104, 323, 945, et al. add ὕστερον λέγει or τότε εἴρηκεν in the case of 1505, syh. 4–5 The expected word order, καὶ τῶν ἁµαρτιῶν αὐτῶν καὶ τῶν ἀνοµιῶν αὐτῶν is altered. The reason may be that the scribe was copying the text in segments as long as eight words at a time. Cf. Wayment, Scribal Characteristics, 258. Following the word order of NA28, αὐτῶν following ἁµαρτιῶν is absent from 𝔓13vid, 𝔓46, D*, 33, 81, et al. 6 µνησθῶ is the reading of 𝔓46, ℵ2, D2, K, L, P, Ψvid, et al. 7 Ekthesis designates the beginning of a new sentence following a biblical quotation. 4

TRANSCRIPTION OF CODEX I

107

p.127 (Heb 10:26–29) 1

5

3 4 9

Τ̣ΗΝ ̣ ΕΠΙΓΝΩΣΙΝ ΤΗΣ ΑΛΗΘΕΙΑΣ ΟΥ Κ̣ΕΤΙ ΠΕΡΙ ΑΜΑΡΤΙΩΝ ΑΠΟΛΕΙΠΕ Τ̣ΑΙ ΘΥΣΙΑ· ΦΟΒΕΡΑ ΔΕ ΤΙΣ ΕΚΔΟ [χ]Η ΚΡΙΣΕΩΣ ΚΑΙ ΠΥΡΟΣ ΕΣΘΙΕΙΝ ΜΕΛ [λ]Ο̣ΝΤΟΣ ΤΟΥΣ ΫΠΕΝΑΝΤΙΟΥΣ· [αθ]ΕΤΗΣΑΣ ΤΙΣ ΝΟΜΟΝ ΜΩΫΣΕΩΣ [χ]Ω̣ΡΙ̣ Σ ΟΙΚΤΙ̣ΡΜ ̣ Ω ̣ Ν ΕΠΙ ΔΥΣΙΝ [η τρισιν µα]Ρ̣Τ̣ΥΣ ̣ ̣ΙΝ ̣ ̣ Α̣ΠΟΘΝΗΣΚ̣Ε̣Ι̣ [ποσω δοκειτε χειρ]Ο̣ΝΟ ̣ Σ Α̣[ξιωθη] [σεται …] The mid-point dot signals a minor sense break. ζῆλος following πυρός is omitted, likely as a result of a copying error. καταξιωθήσεται replaces ἀξιωθήσεται in 𝔓46.

p.128 (Heb 10:35–38) 1

5

3 4–5 5 6 7 8 9

ΟΥΝ ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡΡΗΣΙΑΝ ΫΜΩΝ ΗΤ̣Ι[̣ ς ε] ΧΕΙ ΜΕΓΑΛΗΝ ΜΙΣΘΑΠΟΔΟΣΙΑΝ Υ̣[πο] ΜΟΝΗΣ ΓΑΡ ΕΧΕΤΑΙ ΧΡΙΑΝ ΙΝΑ ΤΟ̣ Θ̣[ε] ΛΗΜΑ ΤΟΥ ΘΥ ΠΟΙΗΣΑΝΤΕΣ ΚΟΜΙ̣Σ̣[η] ΣΘΑΙ ΤΗΝ ΕΠΑΓΓΕΛΙΑΝ· ΕΤΙ ΓΑΡ [µι] ΚΡΟΝ ΟΣΟΝ ΟΣΟΝ Ο ΕΡΧΟΜΕΝΟ̣[ς η] ΞΕΙ ΚΑΙ ΟΥ ΧΡΟΝ̣ΙΕ ̣ ̣Ι̣ Ο̣ Δ̣[ε δ]Ι̣ΚΑ ̣ Ι̣ Ο ̣ Σ ̣ ̣ ΕΚ ΠΙΣΤΕΩΣ Ζ̣Η[̣ σε]Τ̣ΑΙ̣ ̣ [και εαν υ] Π̣ΟΣΤΙΛΗΤ[αι ουκ] Ε̣Υ[δοκει η ψυχη …] l. ἔχετε χρείαν. l. κοµίσησθε. 𝔓46, 104, vgmss omit γάρ. Ekthesis signals the sense break from the previous line where the mid-point dot indicates the end of the sentence. l. χρονίσει. µου ἐκ πίστεως is attested by 𝔓46, ℵ, A, H*, 33, et al., while ἐκ πίστεως µου is the reading of D*, sy. l. ὑποστείληται.

108

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016)

p.129 (Heb 11:6–7) 1

5

1 2 3 4 8

Τ̣ΟΝ ΠΡΟΣΕΡΧΟΜΕΝΟΝ ΘΩ ΟΤΙ [ε]Σ̣ΤΙΝ ΚΑΙ ΤΟΙΣ ΕΚΖΗΤΟΥΣΙΝ ΑΥ [τ]ΟΝ ΜΙΣΘΑΠΟΔΟΤΗΣ ΓΙΝΕΤΑΙ· [π]ΙΣΤΙ ΧΡΗΜΑΤΙΣΘΕΙΣ ΝΩΕ ΠΕΡΙ [τ]Ω̣Ν ΜΗΔΕΠΩ ΒΛΕΠΟΜΕΝΩΝ [ευ]ΛΑΒΗΘΕΙΣ ΚΑΤΑΣΚΕΥΑΣΕΝ ΚΙ [βω]Τ̣ΟΝ ΕΙΣ ΣΩΤΗ̣ΡΙ̣ Α ̣ Ν ̣ ̣ ΤΟΥ ΟΙΚΟΥ [αυτου] Δ̣Ι̣ Η̣[ς κατε]Κ̣ΡΙ̣ Ν ̣ Ε ̣ ̣ ΤΟΝ̣ ΚΟ̣ [σµον και της κατα] Π̣ΙΣ ̣ ̣ΤΙΝ ΔΙΚΑΙ [οσυνης εγενετο κληρονοµος …] τῷ θεῷ is the reading of 𝔓46, ℵ2, A, D*, K, L, P, et al. ζητοῦσιν is the reading of 𝔓13, P. The mid-point dot indicates the end of a sentence, but the spacing of the following line indicates that it did not begin with ekthesis. l. πίστει. l. κατέκρινεν.

p.130 (Heb 11:12–15) 1

5

[… ανα] ΡΙΘΜΗΤΟΣ· ΚΑΤΑ ΠΙΣΤΙΝ ΑΠΕ̣[θα] ΝΟΝ ΟΥΤΟΙ ΠΑΝΤΕΣ ΜΗ ΚΟΜΙΣ[αµε] ΝΟΙ ΤΑΣ ΕΠΑΓΓΕΛΙΑΣ ΑΛΛΑ ΠΟΡΡΩ̣ ΘΕΝ ΑΥΤΑΣ ΕΙΔΟΝΤΕΣ ΚΑΙ ΑΣΠΑΣ̣[α] ΜΕΝΟΙ ΚΑΙ ΟΜΟΛΟΓΗΣΑΝΤΕΣ ΟΤ̣[ι] ΞΕΝΟΙ ΚΑΙ ΠΑΡΕΠΙΔΗΜΟΙ ΕΙΣΙ̣[ν ε] ΠΕΙ ΤΗΣ ΓΗΣ ΟΙ ΓΑΡ ΤΟΙΑΥΤΑ ΛΕ[γον] ΤΕΣ ΕΜΦΑΝΙΖΟΥΣΙΝ ΟΤΙ̣ Π̣[ατριδα] ΕΠΙΖΗΤΟΥΣ̣ΙΝ ̣ ̣ Κ̣ΑΙ Ε̣[ι µεν εκεινης …]

1 The mid-point dot indicates a major sense break. 2–3 λαβόντες in place of κοµισάµενοι in 𝔓46, ℵ2, D, K, L, Ψ, et al. while A reads προσδεξάµενοι. 4 l. ἰδόντες. 6–7 l. ἐπί.

TRANSCRIPTION OF CODEX I 9

109

𝔓46, D, 629 attest ζητοῦσιν.

p.131 (Heb 11:22–24) 1

5

10 1 3 4 6 8

10

Τ̣ΗΣ ̣ ̣ ΕΞΟΔΟΥ ΤΩΝ ΫΪΩ ΙΣΛ· ΕΜΝΗ Μ̣ΟΝΕΥΣΕΝ ΚΑΙ ΠΕΡΙ ΤΩΝ ΟΣΤΕ ΩΝ ΑΥΤΟΥ ΕΝΕΤΙΛΑΤΟ· ΠΙΣΤΙ ΜΩΫΣΗΣ ΓΕΝΝΗΘΕΙΣ ΕΚΡΥ Β̣Η ΤΡΙΜΗΝΟΝ ΫΠΟ ΤΩΝ ΠΡΩΝ ΑΥ [τ]Ο̣Υ ΔΙΟΤΙ ΕΙΔΟΝ ΑΣΤΙΟΝ ΤΟ ΠΑΙΔΙ [ον] ΚΑΙ ΟΥΚ ΕΦΟΒΗΘΗΣΑΝ ΤΟ ΔΙ [αταγ]Μ̣Α ΤΟΥ ΒΑΣΙΛΕΩΣ· [πιστει Μω]Ϋ̣ΣΗΣ̣ ΜΕΓΑΣ ΓΕΝΟΜΕ [νος ηρνησατο λεγ]Ε̣ΣΘΑΙ Υ̣Σ̣ Θ̣Υ̣ [γατρος …] The genitive plural article indicates that a genitive was intended despite the missing nu. l. υἱῶν, which is not contracted as a nomen sacrum. l. ἐνετείλατο. The mid-point dot signals a major sense break. l. πίστει. Ekthesis denotes a sense break, but the supralinear paragraph mark is missing. l. ἀστεῖον. D*, vgms add a significant expansion to the text following βασιλέως. The addition reads πίστει µέγας γενόµενος Μωϋσῆς ἀνεῖλεν τὸν Αἴγυπτον κατανοῶν τὴν ταπείνωσιν τῶν ἀδελφῶν αὐτοῦ. There is an enlarged space at the end of the line, which are relatively uncommon in this manuscript, denoting a sense break that is also designated with a mid-point dot. The line following likely began with ekthesis. The scribe has used the nomen sacrum in a non-sacred context, whereas the same word is not rendered as a nomen sacrum on line 1 in a similar non-sacred context.

p.132 (Heb 11:31–33) 1

[… δεξαµε] ΝΗ ΤΟΥΣ ΚΑΤΑΣΚΟΠΟΥΣ ΜΕΤ̣ [ειρη]

110

5

10

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016) ΝΗΣ· ΚΑΙ ΤΙ ΕΤΙ ΛΕΓΩ ΕΠΙΛΙΨΕΙ ΓΑΡ ΜΕ̣ ΔΙΗΓΟΥΜΕΝΟΝ Ο ΧΡΟΝΟΣ ΠΕΡΙ ΓΕ̣ ΔΕΩΝ· ΒΑΡΑΚ· ΣΑΜΨΩΝ· ΙΕΦΑ̣[αε] ΔΑΔ· ΤΕ ΚΑΙ ΣΑΜΟΥΗΛ· ΚΑΙ ΤΩΝ [προ] ΦΗΤΩΝ ΟΙ ΔΙΑ ΠΙΣΤΕΩΣ Κ̣ΑΤ ̣ ̣[ηγω] ΝΙΣ̣ΑΝ ̣ ΤΟ Β̣ΑΣ ̣ ̣ΙΛ ̣ Ε ̣ ̣ΙΑ ̣ Σ ̣ ̣ Ε̣Ι[̣ ργασαν] Τ̣Ο̣ Δ̣ΙΚ ̣ Α ̣ Ι̣ Ο ̣ Σ ̣ ̣ΥΝ ̣ [̣ ην] Ε̣ΠΕ ̣ ̣Τ̣Υ[̣ χον επαγ] [γελιων εφραξαν στοµατα λεοντων …]

2

The enlarged blank space following the mid-point dot signals the most significant type of textual division found in Codex I. This is the largest in the surviving portion of the codex. 3 l. ἐπιλείψει. µε γάρ is the reading of ℵ, A, D*, 33. 5–6 The mid-point dots denote pauses between the names of individuals in a list. 6 τε καὶ Σαµψὼν καί is the reading of D*.2, K, L, P, Ψ, (D* omits the first καί). τε καὶ Σαµψών 81 (minus τε), 104, 365. 7–8 𝔓46 omits κατηγωνίσαντο and reads βασιλεις in place of βασιλείας. 10 Sanders was able to read the beginning of the line as γ̣ελ̣ ̣ιω ̣ ̣[ν.

p.133 (Heb 11:38–12:1) ΚΕ 1

5

Τ̣ΗΣ ΓΗΣ ΚΑΙ ΟΥΤΟΙ ΠΑΝΤΕΣ ΜΑΡΤΥ ΡΗΘΕΝΤΕΣ ΔΙΑ ΤΗΣ ΠΙΣΤΕΩΣ ΟΥ Κ ΕΚΟΜΙΣΑΝΤΟ ΤΑΣ ΕΠΑΓΓΕΛΙΑΣ ΤΟΥ ΘΥ ΠΕΡΙ ΗΜΩΝ ΚΡΙΤΤΟΝ ΤΙ ΠΡΟ ΒΛΕΨΑΜΕΝΟΥ ΙΝΑ ΜΗ ΧΩΡΙΣ ΗΜΩ Τ̣ΕΛΙΩΘΩΣΙΝ· ΤΟΙΓΑΡΟΥΝ ΚΑΙ [η]Μ̣Ε̣[ι]Σ ΤΗΛΙΚΟΥ̣Τ̣ΟΝ ̣ ̣ ΕΧ̣ΟΝΤΕΣ ΠΕ [ρικε]ΙΜΕΝΟΝ Η̣ΜΙ̣Ν̣ Ν̣ΕΦΟΣ ΜΑΡ [τυρων ογ]Κ̣ΟΝ ̣ ̣ Α̣ΠΟ ̣ Θ ̣ Ε ̣ ̣Μ Ε ̣ ΝΟ̣Ι̣ [παν] [τα …]

The quire number ΚΕ (25) appears in the upper right corner with a decorative horizontal stroke both above and below the letters.

TRANSCRIPTION OF CODEX I 1 3 4 6 7

111

οὗτοι is absent from 𝔓13vid, 𝔓46, 1739, 1881, sa. τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν is attested by 𝔓46, ℵ, A, B, D, et al. l. κρεῖττον. προσβλεψαµένος is the reading of 𝔓46. l. τελειωθῶσιν. The mid-point dot signals the end of a sentence. 𝔓46, A, B, D, et al. read τοσοῦτον in place of τηλικοῦτον.

p.134 (Heb 12:7–9) 1

5

10

ΕΙΣ ΠΑΙΔΙΑΝ ΫΠΟΜΕΝΕΤΑΙ ΩΣ ΫΙ̣ΟΙ̣ Σ ̣ ̣ ΫΜΙΝ ΠΡΟΣΦΕΡΕΤΑΙ Ο ΘΣ ΤΙΣ ΓΑ̣Ρ ΫΪΟΣ ΟΝ ΟΥ ΠΑΙΔΕΥΕΙ ΠΗΡ· ΕΙ ΔΕ ΚΑΙ ΧΩΡΙΣ ΕΣΤΑΙ ΠΑΙΔΙΑΣ ΗΣ ΜΕ ΤΟΧΟΙ ΓΕΓΟΝΑΣΙΝ ΠΑΝΤΕΣ ΑΡΑ ΝΟ ΘΟΙ ΚΑΙ ΟΥΧ ΫΪΟΙ ΕΣΤΑΙ· ΕΙΤΑ ΤΟΥΣ ΜΕΝ ΤΗΣ ΣΑΡΚΟΣ ΗΜΩΝ ΠΡΑΣ [ει] ΧΟΜΕΝ ΠΑΙΔΕΥΤΑΣ ΚΑΙ ΕΝ[ετρε] Π̣ΟΜ ̣ ΕΘΑ ΟΥ ΠΟΛΥ ΜΑΛ̣[λον υποτα] [γ]Η̣Σ̣[οµεθα τω π(ατ)ρι των πν(ευµατ)ων …]

l. παιδείαν, ὑποµένετε. Ekthesis signals a major sense break in the text. Ψ*, 104, 326, et al. read εἰ in place of εἰς. The nomen sacrum is not used in this non-sacred context (also lines 3 and 6). 2–3 γάρ ἐστιν is the reading of ℵ2, D, K, L, 33 et al. 3 A minor sense break is designated by the mid-point dot. 4 l. ἐστε παιδείας. Codex I uniquely adds καί before χωρίς. 6 l. ἐστε. 7 Ekthesis signals a sense break from the previous line that is designated by mid-point punctuation. 9 δὲ µᾶλλον is the reading of 𝔓13, 𝔓46, ℵ2, D*, 1739, 1881. 1

p.135 (Heb 12:16–18) 1

Μ̣Η ΤΙΣ ΠΟΡΝΟΣ Η ΒΕΒΗΛΟΣ ΩΣ Η ΣΑΥ· ΟΣ ΑΝΤΙ ΒΡΩΣΕΩΣ ΜΙΑΣ ΑΠΕ ΔΟΤΟ ΤΑ ΠΡΩΤΟΤΟΚΙΑ ΑΥΤΩΝ· ΕΙΣΤΕ ΓΑΡ ΟΤΙ ΚΑΙ ΜΕΤΕΠΙΤΑ ΘΕ

112 5

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016) ΛΩΝ ΚΛΗΡΟΝΟΜΗΣΑΙ ΤΗΝ ΕΥΛΟ ΓΙΑΝ ΑΠΕΔΟΚΙΜΑΣΘΗ ΜΕΤΑΝΟΙ [ας γ]Α̣Ρ ΤΟΠΟΝ ΟΥΧ ΕΥ̣ΡΕ ̣ ̣Ν̣ Κ̣ΑΙ̣ Π ̣ Ε ̣ ̣Ρ ̣ [µε]Τ̣Α̣ ΔΑΚΡΥΩΝ Ε̣ΚΖ̣ΗΤΗΣ̣ΑΣ ̣ ̣ [αυτην ου γαρ προσεληλυθατε …]

2 The mid-point dot indicates a minor pause in the sentence. 2–3 l. ἀπέδετο. 3 τὰς πρωτοτόκιας 𝔓46. Other witnesses read αὐτοῦ (ℵ2, D*, H, K, L, P, et al.) or ἑαυτοῦ (ℵ*, A, C, D1). Since αὐτῶν is a singular reading, Sanders suggests that the original text may have omitted the word altogether, and he noted that word in question is absent from both 𝔓46 and Clement of Alexandria. 4 l. ἴστε, µετέπειτα. Ekthesis designates a new sentence and sense unit. The previous line ends with a mid-point dot to denote the end of the previous sentence. 9 Sanders was able to restore the line as α̣υ̣[την ου γαρ π]ροσεληλυθατε̣.

p.136 (Heb 12:25–27) 1

5

ΟΥΚ ΕΞΕΦΥΓΟΝ ΕΠΙ ΓΗΣ ΠΑΡΑΙΤΗ̣ ΣΑΜΕΝΟΙ ΤΟΝ ΧΡΗΜΑΤΙΖΟΝΤΑ Π̣[ο] ΛΥ ΜΑΛΛΟΝ ΗΜΕΙΣ ΟΙ ΤΟΝ ΑΠ ΟΥΝΩ ΑΠΟΣΤΡΕΦΟΜΕΝΟΙ ΟΥ Η ΦΩΝΗ ΤΗΝ ΓΗΝ ΕΣΑΛΕΥΣΕΝ ΤΟΤΕ· ΝΥΝ ΔΕ ΕΠΗΓΓΕΛΤΑΙ ΛΕΓΩΝ ΕΤ̣Ι̣ Α̣Π[̣ αξ] ΕΓΩ̣ ΣΙΣΩ̣ Ο̣Υ ΜΟΝ̣ΟΝ ΤΗΝ Γ̣ΗΝ ̣ ̣ [αλ] Λ̣Α̣ Κ̣ΑΙ ΤΟΝ Ο̣Υ̣ΝΟΝ· Τ̣Ο̣ Δ̣Ε̣ Ε̣ΤΙ

1 𝔓46, ℵ2, D, K, L, et al. read ἔφυγον. 1–2 The word order for ἐπὶ γῆς παραιτησάµενοι τόν varies. 𝔓46*, ℵ2, K, L, P, Ψ read τὸν ἐπὶ γῆς παραιτησάµενοι. 104, 629, lat. read παραιτησάµενοι τὸν ἐπὶ γῆς. 3 οὐρανοῦ is the reading of 0243, 0285, 6, 614, et al. The final ν at the very end of the line is indicated by a supralinear stroke. 6 Ekthesis denotes a significant text break that introduces a biblical quotation that is also designated in the previous line by a mid-point dot.

TRANSCRIPTION OF CODEX I 7

113

l. σείσω. σείω is the reading of D, K, L, P, Ψ, 81, et al.

p.137 (Heb 13:7–9) 1

5

1 3 5 7 8

Μ̣ΝΗΜΟΝΕΥΕΤΕ ΤΩΝ ΗΓΟΥΜΕΝΩ Ϋ̣ΜΩΝ ΟΙΤΙΝΕΣ ΕΛΑΛΗΣΑΝ ΫΜΙΝ ΤΟΝ ΛΟΓΟΝ ΤΟΥ ΘΥ· ΩΝ ΑΝΑΘΕΩΡΟΥ Τ̣ΕΣ ΤΗΝ ΕΚΒΑΣΙΝ ΤΗΣ ΑΝΑΣΤΡΟ ΦΗΣ ΜΙΜΙΣΘΑΙ ΤΗΝ ΠΙΣΤΙΝ· Ι̣Σ ΧΣ ΕΧΘΕΣ ΚΑΙ ΣΗΜ̣ΕΡΟΝ Ο ΑΥΤΟΣ [κ]Α̣Ι̣ Ε̣ΙΣ ΤΟΥΣ Α̣ΙΩ̣ΝΑ ̣ Σ ̣ ̣ Δ̣ΙΔ ̣ Α ̣ Χ̣ΑΙΣ ΠΟΙ [κιλαις και ξενα]Ι̣Σ̣ Μ̣Η ΠΑΡΑΦΕΡΕ [σθε καλον γαρ χαρι]Τ̣Ι̣ ΒΕ̣ΒΑ̣ΙΟ ̣ Υ ̣ Σ ̣ ̣[θαι] προηγουµένων is the reading of D*. The mid-point dot signals a minor sense break. l. µιµεῖσθε. The mid-point dot signals the end of a sentence. αἰῶνας ἀµήν is attested in D*. περιφέρεσθε is attested in K, L.

p.138 (Heb 13:16–18) 1

5

1 2 3

ΓΑΡ ΘΥΣΙΑΙΣ ΕΥΑΡΕΣΤΙΤΑΙ Ο ΘΣ· ΠΙΘΕΣΘΑΙ ΤΟΙΣ ΗΓΟΥΜΕΝΟΙΣ ΫΜΩ̣ ΚΑΙ ΫΠΕΙΚΕΣΘΑΙ ΑΥΤΟΙ ΓΑΡ ΑΓΡΥ ΠΝΟΥΣΙΝ ΫΠΕΡ ΤΩΝ ΨΥΧΩΝ Ϋ ΜΩΝ ΩΣ ΛΟΓΟΝ ΑΠΟΔΩΣΟΝΤΕΣ ΙΝΑ ΜΕΤΑ ΧΑΡΑΣ ΤΟΥΤΟ ΠΟΙΩΣΙΝ ΚΑΙ ΜΗ ΣΤΕΝΑΖΟΝΤΕΣ ΑΛΥΣΙΤ[ελες] Γ̣ΑΡ ̣ ̣ Υ̣ΜΙ̣ Ν ̣ ̣ Τ̣ΟΥ ̣ Τ ̣ Ο ΠΡΟ ̣ Σ ̣ Ε̣ΥΧ̣ΕΣ̣ΘΑ ̣ [̣ ι π]Ε̣ΡΙ ΗΜ̣Ω[̣ ν πεποι] [θαµεν γαρ οτι καλην συνειδησιν …] l. εὐαρεστεῖται. The mid-point dot denotes the end of a sentence. l. πείθεσθε. Ekthesis designates the beginning of a new sentence. ὑπεικέσθε is a singular reading. The expected reading is ὑπείκετε.

114

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016)

Instead of ἀποδώσοντες, D* attests ἀποδωσόνται περὶ ὑµῶν. Sanders has a raised dot following ἀποδώσοντες, which is not visible on the images, hence its exclusion from this edition. However, it is notable that there is not a terminal sigma on ἀποδώσοντες as is the custom when a sigma occurs at the end of a line. This may be evidence that there really was a raised dot here, but that it has since faded. 9 l. προσεύχεσθε. D* adds καί after προσεύχεσθε. Ekthesis signals the beginning of a new paragraph, which follows an enlarged blank space in the previous line. 9–10 Sanders read the beginning of line 10 as θαµεν γ̣αρ οτ[ι. The reading of NA28 is πειθόµεθα. Witnesses to πεποίθαµεν are ℵc, Cc, Dc, K, et al. This reading could not be confirmed using the new images. 5

p.139 (Heb 13:23–25) 1

5

2 3 5 6

8

[… απολελυµε] Ν̣ΟΝ ΜΕΘ ΟΥ ΕΑΝ ΤΑΧΙΟΝ ΕΡΧΗ Τ̣ΑΙ ΟΨΟΜΑΙ ΫΜΑΣ· ΑΣΠΑΣΑΣΘΑΙ ΠΑΝΤΑΣ ΤΟΥΣ ΗΓΟΥ ΜΕΝΟΥΣ ΫΜΩΝ ΚΑΙ ΠΑΝΤΑΣ ΤΟΥΣ ΑΓΙΟΥΣ· [α]Σ̣ΠΑ ̣ ΖΟΝΤΑΙ ΫΜΑΣ ΟΙ ΑΠΟ ΤΗΣ Ι [ταλι]Α̣Σ̣ [η χαρ]Ι̣Σ̣ Μ̣ΕΤ̣Α̣ ΠΑ̣ΝΤ ̣ Ω̣Ν̣ Υ̣ΜΩ ̣ Ν̣ [προς] Ε̣[βραιους] The mid-point dot and ensuing enlarged space sets off the final lines of the letter as a postscript. l. ἀσπάσασθε. 𝔓46 omits πάντας. Ekthesis indicates the beginning of the postscript of the letter. The mid-point dot signals a division of greetings between the saints and the greetings sent from Italy (lines 8–9). Following the major text division in the previous line, this line would be expected to begin with ekthesis, but the spacing indicates that it did not, and Sanders was able to see the initial alpha, thus confirming the restoration provided. D* adds τῶν ἁγίων before ὑµῶν.

TRANSCRIPTION OF CODEX I 9

115

Several manuscripts (including ℵ2, A, C, D, K, et al.) add ἀµήν at the end of the verse.

p.140 (1 Tim 1:1–3) 1

5

†

ΠΡΟΣ ΤΙΜΟΘΕΟΝ [Α]

ΠΑΥΛΟΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΟΣ ΙΥ ΧΥ ΚΑΤ ΕΠΙ ΤΑΓΗΝ ΘΥ ΣΡΣ ΗΜΩΝ ΚΑΙ ΧΥ ΙΥ ΤΗ[ς] ΕΛΠΙΔΟΣ ΗΜΩΝ ΤΙΜΟΘΕΩ ΓΝΗΣ̣[ι] Ω ΤΕΚΝΩ ΕΝ ΠΙΣΤΙ· ΧΑΡΙΣ ΕΛΕΟΣ ΕΙΡΗΝΗ ΑΠΟ ΘΥ ΠΡΣ ΚΑΙ ΧΥ ΙΥ ΤΟΥ ΚΥ ΗΜΩΝ· ΚΑΘ̣Ω[̣ ς] ΠΑΡΑΚΑΛΕΣΑ ΣΕ ΠΡΟΣΜΕ̣ΙΝ ̣ [αι εν] [Εφ]Ε̣Σ̣Ω̣ Π̣ΟΡ ̣ [̣ ευ]Ο̣ΜΕ ̣ ̣ΝΟ ̣ Σ ̣ ̣ [εις Μακεδονιαν]

1

There is a staurogram in the upper left corner of the page. The superscription heading (ΠΡΟΣ ΤΙΜΟΘΕΟΝ Α) has decorative lines both above and below the letters. 2 Other manuscripts preserve the order Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ, although this order is attested in A, K, L. Ekthesis signals the beginning of the epistle to Timothy. 2–3 ‫ א‬has ἐπιταγήν for ἐπαγγελίαν. 5 l. πίστει. The mid-point dot indicates a minor sense break, although the corresponding blank space following it sets the opening lines off as a paragraph. 6 A number of manuscripts, including ℵ2, D2, K, L, P, Ψ, et al. add ἡµῶν after πατρός. Ekthesis indicates the beginning of a new sense unit.

p.141 (1 Tim 1:10–13) 1

5

[… ε] Τ̣ΕΡΟΝ ΤΗ ΫΓΙΑΙΝΟΥΣΗ ΔΙΔΑΣΚΑΛΙΑ ΑΝΤΙΚΕΙΤΑΙ ΚΑΤΑ ΤΟ ΕΥΑΓΓΕΛΙΟΝ ΤΗΣ ΔΟΞΗΣ ΤΟΥ ΜΑΚΑΡΙΟΥ ΘΥ Ο ΕΠΙ ΣΤΕΥΘΗΝ ΕΓΩ· ΧΑΡΙΝ ΕΧΩ ΤΩ ΕΝΔΥΝΑΜΩΣΑΝΤΙ

116

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016) Μ̣Ε ΧΩ ΙΥ ΤΩ ΚΩ ΗΜΩΝ ΟΤΙ ΠΙΣΤΟ [µ]Ε̣ Η̣Γ̣ΗΣΑΤΟ ΘΕΜΕΝΟ̣Σ ΕΙΣ Δ̣ΙΑ ̣ ΚΟ̣ [νιαν το π]Ρ̣ΟΤ ̣ ̣Ε̣ΡΟ ̣ [̣ ν οντα βλασφη] [µον …]

5

D, K, L, add καί before χάριν. A small number of manuscripts (ℵ2, 33, sa) have the present tense ἐνδυνάµουντι for the aorist ἐνδυναµώσαντι, perhaps as a harmonization to Phil 4:13.

p.142 (1 Tim 1:19–2:1) 1

5

ΤΙΝΕΣ ΑΠΩΣΑΜΕΝΟΙ ΠΕΡΙ ΤΗΝ ΠΙ̣ ΣΤΙΝ ΕΝΑΥΑΓΗΣΑΝ ΩΝ ΕΣΤΙΝ ΫΜΕ̣ ΝΕΟΣ ΚΑΙ ΑΛΕΞΑΝΔΡΟΣ ΟΥΣ ΠΑΡΕΔ[ω] ΚΑ ΤΩ ΣΑΤΑΝΑ ΙΝΑ ΠΑΙΔΕΥΘΩΣΙΝ ΜΗ ΒΛΑΣΦΗΜΕΙΝ· ΠΑΡΑΚΑΛΩ ΟΥΝ ΠΡΩΤΟΝ ΠΑΝΤ[ων] ΠΟ̣ΙΕ ̣ ΙΣΘΑΙ ΔΕΗ̣ΣΕΙΣ ΠΡΟΣΕΥ̣[χας ευχα] [ριστιας υπερ παντων ανθρωπων …]

2–3 l. Ὑµέναιος. 5–6 The mid-point dot and ekthesis serve to end a sentence and begin a new paragraph. 6 A few witnesses, including D*, F, G, et al. have the 3rd person παρακάλει in place of παρακαλῶ. 8 Sanders was able to read the beginning of the line as ριστιας̣ [. This reading creates an unusually long line in the previous line if the text is restored following NA28. The most likely explanation is that ἐντεύξεις following προσευχάς was omitted, as in the reconstruction here.

p.143 (1 Tim 2:9–13) 1

5

ΧΡΥΣΙΩ Η ΜΑΡΓΑΡΙΤΑΙΣ Η ΙΜΑΤΙ ΣΜΩ ΠΟΛΥΤΕΛΕΙ ΑΛΛ Ο ΠΡΕΠΙ ΓΥ ΝΑΙΞΙΝ ΕΠΑΓΓΕΛΛΟΜΕΝΑΙΣ ΘΕΟ ΣΕΒΙΑΝ ΔΙ ΕΡΓΩΝ ΑΓΑΘΩΝ· ΓΥΝΗ ΕΝ ΗΣΥΧΙΑ ΜΑΝΘΑΝΕΤΩ Ε

TRANSCRIPTION OF CODEX I

117

ΠΑΣΗ ΫΠΟΤΑΓΗ ΔΙΔΑΣΚΕΙΝ ΔΕ ΓΥ [ν]ΑΙΚΕΙ ΟΥΚ ΕΠΙΤΡΕΠΩ ΟΥΔΕ ΑΥ [θεν]Τ̣ΕΙΝ ΑΝΔ̣ΡΟ ̣ Σ ̣ ̣ Α̣ΛΛ ̣ ̣ Ε̣ΙΝ ̣ Α ̣ Ι̣ ̣ Ε̣Ν̣ [ησυχια Αδαµ γαρ π]Ρ̣Ω[̣ τος επλα] [σθη …] Some witnesses, including ‫א‬, D, K, L, Ψ et al. attest χρυσῶ instead of χρυσίω. 2 l. πρέπει. 3–4 l. θεοσέβειαν. The mid-point dot signals a major sense break. 6–7 l. γυναικί. This case of itacism is unusual because, whereas the scribe often shortens diphthongs with iota, here the scribe lengthens it. 1

p.144 (1 Tim 3:7–9) 1

5

ΔΙ ΔΕ ΚΑΙ ΜΑΡΤΥΡΙΑΝ ΚΑΛΗΝ ΕΧΕ[ιν] ΑΠΟ ΤΩΝ ΕΞΩΘΕΝ ΙΝΑ ΜΗ ΕΙΣ ΟΝΙ̣ ΔΙΣΜΟΝ ΕΜΠΕΣΗ ΚΑΙ ΠΑΓΙΔΑ ΤΟΥ ΔΙΑΒΟΛΟΥ· ΔΙΑΚΟΝΟΥΣ ΩΣΑΥΤΩ̣[ς] ΣΕΜΝΟΥΣ ΜΗ ΔΙΛΟΓΟΥΣ ΜΗ ΟΙΝΩ ΠΟΛΛΩ ΠΡΟΣΕΧΟΝΤΑΣ ΜΗ ΑΙΣΧ̣ΡΟ ̣ ̣ ΚΕΡΔΙΣ ΕΧΟΝΤΑΣ ΤΟ ΜΥΣΤΗΡ̣Ι[̣ ον] Τ̣ΗΣ ΠΙΣΤΕΩΣ ΕΝ Κ̣ΑΘ ̣ Α ̣ ΡΑ̣ Σ̣ΥΝ ̣ [̣ ειδησει]

l. δεῖ. A few manuscripts, including D, K, L, P, have the reading δεῖ δέ αὐτόν. 2–3 l. ὀνειδισµόν. 4 This mid-point punctuation indicates the end of a sentence. 5 ℵ2 omits σεµνούς. Ekthesis signals the sense break from the mid-point dot in the previous line. 6–7 l. αἰσχροκερδεῖς. 1

p.145 (1 Tim 4:1–3) 1

ΤΟ̣ ΔΕ ΠΝΑ ΡΗΤΩΣ ΛΕΓΕΙ ΟΤΙ ΕΝ ΫΣΤΕ ΡΟΙΣ ΚΑΙΡΟΙΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΗΣΟΝΤΑΙ ΤΙ ΝΕΣ ΤΗΣ ΠΙΣΤΕΩΣ ΠΡΟΣΕΧΟΝΤΕΣ

118

5

1 4 6

9

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016) ΠΝΕΥΜΑΣΙΝ ΠΛΑΝΟΙΣ ΚΑΙ ΔΙΔΑΣΚΑ ΛΙΑΙΣ ΔΑΙΜΟΝΙΩΝ ΕΝ ΫΠΟΚΡΙΣΕΙ ΨΕΥΔΟΛΟΓΩΝ ΚΕΚΑΥΤΗΡΙΑΣΜΕΝΩ [τη]Ν̣ ΙΔΙΑΝ ΣΥΝΕΙΔΗΣΙΝ ΚΩΛΥΟΝ [των γ]Α̣ΜΕΙΝ̣ Α̣ΠΕ ̣ ̣ΧΕ ̣ ̣ΣΘΑ̣Ι̣ Β̣ΡΩ ̣ Μ ̣ Α ̣ Τ ̣ ̣Ω̣ [α ο θ(εο)ς εκτισεν εις µεταληψιν …] The ekthesis lacks the accompanying supralinear stroke. A few manuscripts, including P, Ψ, 104, et al., replace πλάνοις with πλάνης. The standard reading is κεκαυστηριασµένων instead of κεκαυτηριασµένων. This orthographic variant is otherwise unattested. Some late manuscripts, including F, 0241vid, lat et al., add καί before κεκαυστηριασµένων. Sanders was able to restore the line as [α ο θ(εο)ς εκτισεν] ε̣ι̣ς̣ [µεταλη]ψ̣[ιν]

p.146 (1 Tim 4:10–13) 1

5

ΣΗΡ ΠΑΝΤΩΝ ΑΝΩΝ ΜΑΛΙΣΤΑ ΠΙΣΤΩ̣ ΠΑΡΑΓΓΕΛΛΕ ΤΑΥΤΑ ΚΑΙ ΔΙΔΑΣΚΕ ΜΗ ΔΙΣ ΣΟΥ ΤΗΣ ΝΕΟΤΗΤΟΣ ΚΑΤΑΦΡ[ο] ΝΕΙΤΩ ΑΛΛΑ ΤΥΠΟΣ ΓΙΝΟΥ ΤΩΝ ΠΙ̣ ΣΤΩΝ ΕΝ ΛΟΓΩ· ΕΝ ΑΝΑΣΤΡΟΦΗ ΕΝ ΑΓΑΠΗ· ΕΝ ΠΙΣΤΙ· ΕΝ ΑΓΝΙΑ· ΕΩΣ ΕΡΧΟΜΑΙ ΠΡΟΣΕΧΕ ΤΗ ΑΝΑ̣ ΓΝΩΣΕΙ· ΤΗ ΠΑΡΑΚΛΗΣΕΙ̣ […]

2 Ekthesis indicates the beginning of a new paragraph. 2–3 l. µηδείς. 6 l. πίστει, ἁγνείᾳ. Some manuscripts add ἐν πνεύµατι before ἐν πίστει, including K, L, P, 365, et al. The mid-point dots signal minor pauses within a sentence. 7 Ekthesis indicates the beginning of a new paragraph.

TRANSCRIPTION OF CODEX I

119

p.147 (1 Tim 5:5–9) 1

5

5 6

Π̣ΡΟΣΕΥΧΑΙΣ ΝΥΚΤΟΣ ΚΑΙ ΗΜΕΡΑΣ Η ΔΕ ΣΠΑΤΑΛΩΣΑ ΖΩΣΑ ΤΕΘΝΗΚΕ ΚΑΙ ΤΑΥΤΑ ΠΑΡΑΓΓΕΛΛΕ ΙΝΑ ΑΝΕ ΠΙΛΗΜΠΤΟΙ ΩΣΙΝ· ΕΙ ΔΕ ΤΙΣ ΤΩ Ι̣ΔΙΩΝ ΚΑΙ ΜΑΛΙΣΤΑ ΟΙΚΙΩΝ ΟΥ ΠΡΟΝΟΕΙΤΑΙ ΤΗΝ ΠΙΣΤΙΝ ΗΡΝΗ [τ]Α̣Ι ΚΑΙ ΕΣΤΙΝ ΑΠΙΣΤΟΥ ΧΕΙΡΩΝ [χηρα] Κ̣ΑΤΑΛΕΓΕΣΘΩ ΜΗ ΕΛΑΤ̣Τ̣Ο̣ [ετων εξηκο]Ν̣[τα γε]Γ̣ΟΝ ̣ Υ̣ΙΑ ̣ ̣ Ε̣[νος] l. οἰκείων. A few manuscripts (C, D1, K, L, P, et al.) add τῶν before οἰκείων. Ekthesis signals the sense break that is indicated in the previous line to denote the end of a sentence. προνοεῖ is the reading attested in most manuscripts (ℵ2, A, C, D1, L, P, Ψ, et al.).

p.148 (1 Tim 5:16–19) 1

5

5 6

7 8

ΙΝΑ ΤΑΙΣ ΟΝΤΩΣ ΧΗΡΑΙΣ ΕΠΑΡΚΕ̣ΣΗ ̣ ̣ ΟΙ ΚΑΛΩΣ ΠΡΟΕΣΤΩΤΕΣ ΠΡΕΣΒΥΤΕ ΡΟΙ ΔΙΠΛΗΣ ΤΙΜΗΣ ΑΞΙΟΥΣΘΩΣΑΝ ΜΑΛΙΣΤΑ ΟΙ ΚΟΠΙΩΝΤΕΣ ΕΝ ΛΟΓΩ ΚΑΙ ΑΛΗΘΕΙΑ· ΛΕΓΕΙ ΓΑΡ Η ΓΡΑΦ[η] OΥ ΦΙΜΩΣΕΙΣ ΒΟΥΝ ΑΛΟΩΝΤΑ̣ ΚΑΙ ΑΞΙΟΣ Ο ΕΡΓΑΤΗΣ ΤΟΥ ΜΙΣΘΟ̣[υ] ΑΥΤΟΥ· ΚΑΤΑ ΠΡΕΣΒΥΤΕΡ̣[ου κα] ΤΗΓΟΡ̣ΙΑΝ Μ̣[η] ΠΑ̣ΡΑ ̣ Δ ̣ Ε ̣ ̣ΧΟ ̣ [̣ υ εκτος] All other manuscripts attest διδασκαλίᾳ instead of ἀληθείᾳ. The mid-point dot signals the end of a sentence. The word order of the opening phrase from the quotation of Deut 25:4 is βοῦν ἀλοῶντα οὐ φιµώσεις in ℵ, D2, F, G, K, L, et al. In addition, D* reads βοῦν ἀλοῶντα οὐ κηµώσεις. Ekthesis indicates the beginning of a biblical quotation. A few manuscripts read τῆς τροφῆς instead of τοῦ µισθοῦ, including ‫*א‬vid. The mid-point dot signals the end of a sentence.

120 9

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016) Ekthesis matches the sense break in the previous line.

p.149 (1 Tim 6:1–2) ΚϚ 1

5

ΑΞΙΟΥΣ ΗΓΕΙΣΘΩΣΑΝ ΪΝΑ ΜΗ ΤΟ Ο ΝΟΜΑ ΤΟΥ ΘΥ ΚΑΙ Η ΔΙΔΑΣΚΑΛΙΑ ΒΛΑ ΣΦΗΜΗΤΑΙ· ΟΙ ΔΕ ΠΙΣΤΟΥΣ ΕΧΟ ΤΑΣ ΔΕΣΠΟΤΑΣ ΜΗ ΚΑΤΑΦΡΟΝΙ ΤΩΣΑΝ ΟΤΙ ΑΔΕΛΦΟΙ ΕΙΣΙΝ ΑΛΛΑ ΜΑΛΛΟΝ ΔΟΥΛΕΥΕΤΩΣΑΝ ΟΤΙ ΠΙ ΣΤΟΙ ΕΙΣΙΝ ΚΑΙ ΑΓΑΠΗΤΟΙ ΟΙ ΤΗΣ [ευ]ΕΡ̣ΓΕΣΙΑΣ ΑΝΤ̣ΙΛΑΜΒΑΝΟΜΕ̣ [νοι ταυτα διδα]Σ̣[κε και π]Α̣ΡΑ ̣ Κ ̣ Α ̣ Λ ̣ [̣ ει]

The quire number ΚϚ (26) appears in the upper right corner with a decorative horizontal stroke both above and below the letters. 3–4 Other witnesses attest ἔχοντες, but A, D*, F, G, et al read ἔχοντας, which is likely a harmonization to δεσπότας. 4–5 l. καταφρονείτωσαν.

p.150 (1 Tim 6:9–11) 1

5

ΑΙΤΙΝΕΣ ΒΥΘΙΖΟΥΣΙΝ ΤΟΥΣ ΑΝΟΥΣ ΕΙΣ ΟΛΕΘΡΟΝ ΚΑΙ ΑΠΩΛΕΙΑΝ· ΡΙΖΑ ΓΑΡ ΠΑΝΤΩΝ ΤΩΝ ΚΑΚΩΝ ΕΣΤΙΝ Η ΦΙΛΑΡΓΥΡΙΑ· ΗΣ ΤΙΝΕΣ ΟΡΕΓΟΜΕ ΝΟΙ ΑΠΕΠΛΑΝΗΘΗΣΑΝ ΑΠΟ ΤΗΣ ΠΙΣΤΕΩΣ ΚΑΙ ΕΑΥΤΟΥΣ ΠΕΡΙΕΠΕΙ ΡΑΝ ΟΔΥΝΑΙΣ ΠΟΛΛΑΙΣ· Σ̣Υ Δ̣Ε̣ Ω̣ Α̣ΝΕ ̣ ̣ Θ̣Υ̣ [τ]Α̣ΥΤΑ ΦΕΥΓΕ

7 ℵ*, H read ποικιλαις in place of πολλαῖς. 7–8 A mid-point dot signals the end of a sentence, and ekthesis serves to denote a new paragraph. 8 Several manuscripts (ℵ2, D, F, G, H, K, L, P, Ψ, et al.) attest the reading ἄνθρωπε τοῦ θεοῦ.

TRANSCRIPTION OF CODEX I

121

p.151 (1 Tim 6:17–19) 1

5

1 2 3

6 9

[… υψη] ΛΑ ΦΡΟΝΕΙΝ ΜΗΔΕ ΗΛΠΙΚΕΝΑΙ Ε ΠΙ ΠΛΟΥΤΩ ΑΔΗΛΟΤΗΤΙ ΑΛΛ ΕΠΕΙ ΤΩ ΘΩ ΤΩ ΠΑΡΕΧΟΝΤΙ ΗΜΙΝ ΤΑ ΠΑΝΤΑ ΠΛΟΥΣΙΩΣ ΕΙΣ ΑΠΟΛΑΥΣΙ ΑΓΑΘΟΕΡΓΕΙΝ ΠΛΟΥΤΕΙΝ ΕΝ ΕΡΓΟΙΣ ΑΓΑΘΟΙΣ· ΕΥΜΕΤΑΔΟΤΟΥΣ ΕΙΝΑΙ [κ]ΟΙΝΩΝΙΚΟΥΣ· ΑΠΟΘΗΣΑΥΡ̣ΙΖ ̣ Ο [τας] ΕΑΥΤΟΙΣ ΘΕΜ̣[ε]Λ̣Ι[̣ ο]Ν̣ Κ̣ΑΛ ̣ Ο ̣ [̣ ν εις] [το µελλον ινα επιλαβωνται …] ὑψηλὰ φρονεῖν is also attested in ℵ in place of ὑψηλοφρονεῖν (A, D, F, G, K, L, et al.). l. ἐπί. Other witnesses attest πλούτου instead of πλούτῳ, but the reading is attested in D, 73, 109, 114. τῷ θεῷ instead of θεῷ (ℵ, D*, F, G, et al.). D2, K, L, 630 have ἐν τῷ θεῷ, while θεῷ τῷ ζῶντι is the reading of D*.2, K, L, 630, et al. Codex I contains the definite article in τὰ πάντα with A, 37, 116. All other witnesses have καλοῖς instead of ἀγαθοῖς. Sanders was able to restore this line as [το µελλ]ο̣ν̣ ινα επ̣ι̣λαβ̣ων̣ ̣[ται].

p.152 (2 Tim 1:1–3) 1

5

†

ΠΡ(ΟΣ) ΤΙΜΟΘΕΟΝ Β

ΠΑΥΛΟΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΟΛΟΣ ΙΥ ΧΥ ΔΙΑ ΘΕΛΗ ΜΑΤΟΣ ΘΥ ΚΑΤ ΕΠΑΓΓΕΛΙΑΝ ΖΩΗΣ ΤΗΣ ΕΝ ΧΩ ΙΥ ΤΙΜΟΘΕΩ ΑΓΑΠΗΤΩ ΤΕΚΝΩ ΧΑΡΙΣ ΕΛΕΟΣ ΕΙΡΗΝΗ ΑΠΟ ΘΥ ΠΡΣ ΚΑΙ ΧΥ ΙΥ ΤΟΥ ΚΥ ΗΜΩΝ· ΧΑΡΙΝ ΕΧΩ ΤΩ ΘΩ Ω ΛΑΤΡΕΥΩ ΑΠΟ ΠΡΟΓΟΝΩΝ ΕΝ ΚΑΘΑΡΑ ΣΥΝΕΙΔΗ̣[σει] [ως] ΑΔΙΑΛΕ̣[ιπ]Τ[ο]Ν̣ Ε̣ΧΩ ̣ ΤΗΝ ΠΕ̣[ρι σου]

122 1

2 5 6 7

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016) There is a staurogram in the upper left corner of the page. Also, between the staurogram and Τιµόθεον there is a ligature for πρός, which is made to resemble a staurogram (see plates 6 and 8). In the ligature, the tail of the rho forms the downstroke and the horizontal stroke of the pi forms the cross stroke. This is the only occurrence of the ligature in Codex I. The superscription heading (Τιµόθεον Β’) has decorative lines both above and below the letters. Whereas other witnesses have Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ, this text reverses the order. Codex I frequently begins each epistle with ekthesis and a paragraph marker. Ekthesis is used to designate a new sense unit. A few manuscripts (629, 1739, 1881, vgmss) reverse the word order of Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ, and a very few, albeit including ℵ*, 33, (syp) have κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ. Ekthesis serves to begin a new sense unit, following an intentional blank space on the preceding line.

p.153 (2 Tim 1:10–12) 1

5

1 2

7 8

ΦΑΝΕΡΩΘΕΙΣΑΝ ΔΕ ΝΥΝ ΔΙΑ ΤΗΣ ΕΠΙΦΑΝΙΑΣ ΤΟΥ ΣΡΣ ΗΜΩΝ ΘΥ ΚΑΤΑΡΓΗΣΑΝΤΟΣ ΜΕΝ ΤΟΝ ΘΑΝΑ ΤΟΝ ΦΩΤΙΣΑΝΤΟΣ ΔΕ ΖΩΗΝ ΚΑΙ Α ΦΘΑΡΣΙΑΝ ΔΙΑ ΤΟΥ ΕΥΑΓΓΕΛΙΟΥ ΕΙΣ Ο ΕΤΕΘΗΝ ΕΓΩ ΚΗΡΥΞ ΚΑΙ ΑΠΟ [σ]ΤΟΛΟΣ ΚΑΙ ΔΙΔΑΣΚΑΛΟΣ ΔΙ Η[ν αι] [τια]Ν̣ ΚΑΙ ΤΑΥΤΑ̣ Π̣ΑΣ ̣ ̣ΧΩ ̣ ̣ [αλλ ουκ] Ε̣ [παισχυνοµαι …] The first letter is enlarged but is lacking a paragraphos. l. ἐπιφανείας. Most manuscripts have either Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ (ℵ2, C, D2, F, G, K, et al.) or Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ (ℵ*, A, D*, vgmss, et al.). Codex I is unique in reading θεοῦ. See Wayment, Scribal Characteristics, 260–61. Many manuscripts add ἔθνων after διδάσκαλος, including ℵ2, C, D, F, G, K, L, P, and Ψ. 33 adds καὶ διάκονος following διδάσκαλος. καί is absent from ℵ*, Ψ, 1175, et al.

TRANSCRIPTION OF CODEX I

123

p.154 (2 Tim 2:2–5) 1

5

ΠΑΡ ΕΜΟΥ ΔΙΑ ΠΟΛΛΩΝ ΜΑΡΤΥΡΩ ΤΑΥΤΑ ΠΑΡΑΘΟΥ ΠΙΣΤΟΙΣ ΑΝΟΙΣ ΟΙ ΤΙΝΕΣ ΕΙΚΑΝΟΙ ΕΣΟΝΤΑΙ ΚΑΙ ΕΤΕ ΡΟΥΣ ΔΙΔΑΞΑΙ ΣΥΝΚΑΚΟΠΑΘΗΣΟΝ ΩΣ ΚΑΛΟΣ ΣΤΡΑΤΙΩΤΗΣ ΧΥ ΙΥ· ΟΥΔΕΙΣ ΣΤΡΑΤΕΥΟΜΕΝΟΣ ΕΜΠΛΕ [κε]ΤΑΙ ΤΑΙΣ ΤΟΥ ΒΙΟΥ ΠΡΑΓΜΑΤ̣[ειαις] [ινα τ]Ω̣ Σ̣ΤΡ ̣ Α ̣ Τ ̣ ̣ΟΛΟΓΗΣΑΝ̣[τι αρεση] [εαν δε και α]Θ̣Λ[̣ η τις …]

l. ἴκανοι. l. συγκακοπάθησον. A few manuscripts have σὺ οὖν κακοπάθησον (C3, D1, Hc, K, L, Ψ, et al.) instead of συγκακοπάθησον. κακοπάτησον is the reading of 1175, lat. 5–6 Ekthesis signals a new sentence that is combined with a midpoint dot in the line preceding it. 6 F, G, it, et al. add τῷ θεῷ after στρατευόµενος.

3 4

p.155 (2 Tim 2:14–16) 1

5

1 2 4

ΕΝΩΠΙΟΝ ΤΟΥ ΘΥ ΜΗ ΛΟΓΟΜΑΧΕΙ ΕΠ ΟΥΔΕΝ ΧΡΗΣΙΜΟΝ ΕΠΙ ΚΑΤΑ ΣΤΡΟΦΗ ΤΩΝ ΑΚΟΥΟΝΤΩΝ· ΣΠΟΥΔΑΣΟΝ ΣΕΑΥΤΟΝ ΔΟΚΙΜΟ ΠΑΡΑΣΤΗΣΑΙ ΤΩ ΘΩ ΕΡΓΑΤΗΝ Α ΝΕΠΑΙΣΧΥΝΤΟΝ ΟΡΘΟΤΟΜΟΥΝ ΤΑ ΤΟΝ ΛΟΓΟΝ ΤΗΣ ΑΛΗΘΕΙΑΣ· ΤΑΣ [δ]Ε̣ Β̣ΕΒΗΛΟΥΣ ΚΕΝ̣ΟΦ ̣ ΩΝΙΑΣ [περιιστ]ΑΣΟ· ΕΠΙ̣ Π̣ΛΕ ̣ ̣ΙΟ ̣ Ν ̣ ̣ Γ̣ΑΡ ̣ ̣ A significant number of witnesses have κυρίου rather than θεοῦ, including A, D, K, L, P, Ψ. A few texts (A, C*, 048. 1175, latt) have the indicative λογοµάχει instead of the infinitive λογοµαχεῖν. A number of witnesses substitute εἰς for ἐπ’, including ℵ2, D, K, L, Ψ et al. Ekthesis signals a new sentence that is combined with a midpoint dot in the line preceding it.

124 7 8

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016) Sanders’ edition mistakenly placed τάς at the beginning of line 8, but it is clearly visible at the end of the line. A few late witnesses (F, G et al.) have καινοφωνίας instead of κενοφωνίας.

p.156 (2 Tim 2:22–24) 1

5

ΔΙΚΑΙΟΣΥΝΗΝ ΠΙΣΤΙΝ ΑΓΑΠΗΝ ΕΙ ΡΗΝΗΝ ΜΕΤΑ ΠΑΝΤΩΝ ΤΩΝ ΕΠΙΚΑ ΛΟΥΜΕΝΩΝ ΤΟΝ ΚΝ ΕΚ ΚΑΘΑΡΑΣ ΚΑΡΔΙΑΣ· ΤΑΣ ΔΕ ΜΩΡΑΣ ΚΑΙ ΑΠΑΙ ΔΕΥΤΟΥΣ ΖΗΤΗΣΕΙΣ ΠΑΡΑΙΤΟΥ ΕΙ ΔΩΣ ΟΤΙ ΓΕΝΝΩΣΕΙ ΜΑΧΑΣ· ΔΟΥΛΟΝ ΔΕ ΚΥ ΟΥ ΔΙ ΜΑΧΕΣΘΑΙ ΑΛ ΛΑ ΗΠΙΟΝ ΕΙΝΑΙ ΠΡΟΣ ΠΑΝΤ̣[ας δι] Δ̣ΑΚΤΙΚΟ̣Ν̣ ΑΝΕΞ̣ΙΚΑΝΟΝ̣ […]

2–3 Most witnesses (ℵ, D, K, L, P, Ψ, et al.) omit πάντων and read τῶν ἐπικαλουµένων. A has πάντων τῶν ἀγαπώντων. 5 Ekthesis signals a new sense unit following the mid-point dot, which signals the end of a sentence, in the previous line. 6 l. γεννῶσιν. The scribe omitted final nu. 7 l. δεῖ. Ekthesis serves to designate a new sentence and sense unit following a mid-point dot. 8 A few witnesses (D*, F, G) have νήπιον instead of ἤπιον.

p.157 (2 Tim 3:6–8) 1

5

ΓΥΝΑΙΚΑΡΙΑ ΣΕΣΩΡΕΥΜΕΝΑ ΑΜΑΡ ΤΙΑΙΣ ΑΓΟΜΕΝΑ ΕΠΙΘΥΜΙΑΙΣ ΠΟΙ ΚΕΙΛΑΙΣ ΠΑΝΤΟΤΕ ΜΑΝΘΑΝΟΝΤΑ ΚΑΙ ΜΗΔΕΠΟΤΕ ΕΙΣ ΕΠΙΓΝΩΣΙΝ ΑΛΗΘΕΙΑΣ ΕΛΘΕΙΝ ΔΥΝΑΜΕΝΑ· ΟΝ ΤΡ̣ΟΠΟ̣Ν̣ Δ̣Ε ΙΑ̣ΝΝΗΣ ΚΑΙ ΙΑΜΒΡΗΣ [α]Ν̣ΤΕ̣Σ̣Τ̣ΗΣ ̣ ̣ΑΝ ̣ ̣ Μ̣ΩΥ̣ΣΕΙ· ΟΥΤΩΣ [κα]Ι̣ ΟΥΤ̣ΟΙ̣ ̣ [ανθιστανται τη αλη] [θεια …]

TRANSCRIPTION OF CODEX I

125

2 Some witnesses (A, 1505, syh) add καὶ ἡδοναῖς after ἐπιθυµίαις. 2–3 l. ποικίλαις. 5–6 Ekthesis, following a mid-point dot in the previous line, signals a new sense unit. 6 A few witnesses have Ἰαµβρῆς for Μαµβρῆς (F, G, it. et al.). 8 Sanders was able to restore this line as [κ]α̣ι ουτοι αν̣θι̣ ̣στ̣ α ̣ ̣ν̣τα ̣ ̣ι̣ τη αλη̣.

p.158 (2 Tim 3:16–4:1) 1

5

ΠΡΟΣ ΕΛΕΓΜΟΝ· ΠΡΟΣ ΕΠΑΝΟΡΘΩ ΣΙΝ· ΠΡΟΣ ΠΑΙΔΙΑΝ ΤΗΝ ΕΝ ΔΙΚΑΙ ΟΣΥΝΗ· ΙΝΑ ΑΡΤΙΟΣ Η Ο ΤΟΥ ΘΥ ΑΝΟΣ ΠΡΟΣ ΠΑΝ ΕΡΓΟΝ ΑΓΑΘΟΝ ΕΞΗΡΤΙ ΣΜΕΝΟΣ· ΔΙΑΜΑΡΤΥΡΟΜΑΙ ΕΝΩ ΠΙΟΝ ΤΟΥ ΘΥ ΚΑΙ ΧΥ ΙΥ ΤΟΥ ΜΕΛΛΟ̣Ν̣ ΤΟΣ ΚΡΙΝΕΙΝ̣ ΖΩΝ̣Τ̣ΑΣ ̣ ̣ ΚΑΙ ΝΕΚ[ρους]

ἔλεγχον replaces ἐλεγµόν in some witnesses, including D, K, L, P, Ψ, et al. 2 l. παιδείαν. 3 ἄρτιος is replaced by τέλειος in D*. 5 Several manuscripts add one or more words after διαµαρτύροµαι. Ψ and 1505 add οὖν, 326* adds ἐγώ, and D1, K, L, 630, 1241, and 𝔐 add οὖν ἐγώ. 5–6 Ekthesis, following a mid-point dot in the previous line, signals a new sense unit following the end of a sentence. 7 κρίνειν is replaced by κρίναι in F, G, 6, 33, 81, and 1881. 1

p.159 (2 Tim 4:8–10) 1

5

ΤΗ ΗΜΕΡΑ ΟΥ ΜΟΝΟΝ ΔΕ ΕΜΟΙ ΑΛ ΛΑ ΚΑΙ ΠΑΣΙΝ ΤΟ̣ΙΣ ̣ ̣ ΗΓΑΠΗΚΟΣΙΝ ΤΗΝ ΕΠΙΦΑΝΙΑΝ ΑΥΤΟΥ· ΣΠΟΥΔ̣[ασον ελ]Θ̣ΕΙΝ ΠΡΟΣ Μ̣Ε̣ Τ̣Α̣ ΧΕΩΣ ΔΗ̣ΜΑ ̣ Σ ̣ ̣ ΓΑΡ Μ̣Ε ΕΓΚΑΤΕΛ̣Ι̣ ΠΕΝ Α̣Γ̣ΑΠ ̣ Η ̣ Σ ̣ ̣[ας τον νυν αιωνα …]

126

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016)

The phrase ὁ δίκαιος κριτής, following τῇ ἡµερᾷ has been omitted by the scribe, likely in error. 2 Some manuscripts, including D*, 6, 1739*, et al. omit πᾶσιν. 3 l. ἐπιφάνιαν. 3–4 Ekthesis, following a mid-point dot in the previous line, signals a new sense. 4–5 Codex I has been cited as a witness in NA28 to the reading of τάχιον (also attested in 33), but the new images permit the line to be read more clearly, and the correct reading is ταχέως. Indeed, the reading is sufficiently clear that it does not warrant the use of underdots. 5–6 Some witnesses have the imperfect ἐγκατέλειπεν (A, C, D1, F, G, L, et al.). Sanders read ἐνκατέλιπεν. 1

p.160 (2 Tim 4:18–20) 1

5

[… και σω] ΣΕΙ ΕΙ̣Σ̣ ΤΗ̣Ν̣ [β]Α̣Σ̣ΙΛΕΙ̣ΑΝ ̣ ΑΥΤΟΥ ΤΗΝ ΕΠΟΥ̣ΡΑ ̣ Ν ̣ Ι̣ Ο ̣ Ν ̣ ̣ Ω̣ Η̣ Δ̣ΟΞ ̣ Α ̣ ̣ Ε̣ΙΣ ̣ ΤΟΥΣ ΑΙ ΩΝΑΣ ΤΩΝ̣ Α̣ΙΩ ̣ Ν ̣ Ω ̣ Ν ̣ ̣ Α̣ΜΗ ̣ Ν· ΑΣΠΑΣΑΣΘ̣Ε̣ ΠΡΙ̣Σ̣ΚΑ ̣ Ν ̣ ΚΑ̣Ι̣ Α̣ΚΥ ̣ Λ ̣ ΑΝ Κ̣ΑΙ ΤΟΝ ΟΝΗ̣ΣΙΦΟ̣ΡΟ ̣ Υ ̣ ̣ [οικ]Ο̣Ν̣ [Ε] [ρα]Σ̣ΤΟΣ̣ [εµε]ΙΝΕ̣[ν εν Κορι]Ν̣[θ]Ω̣ Τ̣ΡΟ ̣ ̣ [φιµον …]

3–4 Ekthesis, following a mid-point dot in the previous line, signals a new sense unit following the end of a sentence. 4 A few witnesses support ἀσπάσασθε (d, e, f, et al.).

p.161 (Titus 1:1–3) 1

5

[Π]Ρ̣ΟΣ ̣ ̣ ΤΙΤΟΝ

†

ΠΑΥΛΟΣ ΔΟΥΛΟΣ Θ̣Υ ΑΠΟΣΤ̣ΟΛ ̣ ΟΣ ΔΕ ΙΥ ΧΥ ΚΑΤΑ ΠΙΣΤΙ̣Ν̣ Ε̣ΚΛ ̣ Ε ̣ ΚΤΩΝ ΘΥ ΚΑΙ ΕΠΙ̣Γ̣ΝΩ ̣ Σ ̣ ̣ΙΝ ̣ ̣ ΑΛΗΘΕΙΑΣ ΤΗΣ ΚΑΤ ΕΥΣΕ[βε]Ι̣ΑΝ ̣ ̣ Ε̣Π̣ ΕΛΠΙΔΙ ΖΩΗΣ ΑΙΩΝ̣ΙΟ ̣ Υ ̣ ̣ Η̣Ν̣ Ε̣ΠΗ ̣ Γ ̣ ̣ΓΕΙΛΑΤΟ Ο ΑΨΕΥ

TRANSCRIPTION OF CODEX I

127

̣ ΩΝ ΑΙΩ̣ΝΙΩ̣Ν̣ [δης θ(εο)ς προ χ]Ρ̣ΟΝ [εφανερωσεν] Δ[ε κ]Α̣Ι[̣ ροις] Ι̣ΔΙ̣ Ο ̣ Ι̣ Σ ̣ ̣ 1 2

3 4 5

There is a staurogram in the upper right corner of the page. The superscription heading (πρὸς Τίτον) has decorative lines both above and below the letters. The π of Παῦλος is not set off by ekthesis as is customary for this scribe at the beginning of each epistle. The text is somewhat faded and partially broken at this point, so it is possible that there was originally a paragraphos, but in the absence of ekthesis we have been hesitant to restore it. A few manuscripts (A, 629, 1175, et al.) have Χρίστου Ἰησοῦ; D* reads Χρίστου. Sanders notes the use of the terminal nu in this line, but the nu is clearly written out. Sanders recorded αληθιας, but the correct restoration is αληθειας as is evident using the new images. F, G, H, 365 read ἐν rather than ἐπ’.

p.162 (Titus 1:10–11) 1

5 1

3 4

ΕΙΣΙΝ ΓΑΡ ΠΟΛΛΟΙ ΑΝΥΠΟΤΑΚΤΟΙ ΜΑΤΑΙΟΛΟΓΟΙ ΚΑΙ ΦΡΕΝΑΠΑΤΑΙ ΜΑΛΙΣΤΑ ΟΙ ΕΚ ΤΗΣ ΠΕΡΙΤΟΜΗΣ ΟΥΣ ΔΙ ΕΠΙΣΤΟΜΙΖΕΙΝ ΟΙΤΙΝΕΣ ΟΛΟΥΣ ΟΙΚΟΥΣ ΑΝΑΤΡΕΠΟΥΣΙΝ ΔΙΔΑΣΚΟΝ̣ Τ̣Ε̣Σ̣ Α Μ̣Η̣ Δ̣Ε̣Ι̣ Α̣ΙΣ ̣ ̣ΧΡ ̣ Ο ̣ Υ ̣ ̣ Κ̣Ε̣ΡΔ ̣ Ο ̣ Σ ̣ ̣ Χ̣ΑΡ ̣ Ι̣ Ν ̣ ̣ Some manuscripts add καί following πολλοί (ℵ, A, C, P, et al.). Ekthesis signals the beginning of a new paragraph. Sanders mistakenly included καί following πολλοί in his edition, but it is clearly absent. Because of Sanders’ edition, this reading is misrepresented in ΝΑ28. See also Wayment, Two New Textual Variants, 737–38. Some witnesses omit the definite article τῆς (A, D1, F, G, K, L, P, Ψ, et al.). l. δεῖ.

128

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016)

p.163 (Titus 2:4–6) 1

5 1 3 5

6

[… σωφρονιζω] ΣΙ ΤΑΣ ΝΕΑΣ ΦΙΛΑΝΔΡΟΥΣ ΕΙΝΑΙ ΦΙΛΟΤΕΚΝΟΥΣ ΣΩΦΡΟΝΑΣ [α]ΓΝΑΣ· ΟΙΚΟΥΡΓΟ̣ΥΣ ̣ ΑΓΑ̣ΘΑ ̣ Σ ̣ ̣ [υπο] [τ]ΑΣΣΟΜΕΝΑΣ Τ̣ΟΙ̣Σ̣ ΙΔΙΟΙΣ ΑΝ̣ΔΡ ̣ [̣ ασιν] [ι]ΝΑ ΜΗ Ο ΛΟ̣Γ̣ΟΣ ̣ ̣ ΤΟΥ Θ̣Υ̣ [βλασφη] [µηται τους νεωτερους ωσαυτως …] Some witnesses have the indicative σωφρονίζουσιν (ℵ2, A, F, G, H, P, et al.). Rather than οἰκουργούς, some witnesses have οἰκουρούς (ℵ2, D1, H, K, L, P, et al.). Sanders was able to read this entire line without brackets, and therefore ruled out the possibility that Codex I added καὶ ἡ διδασκαλία following θεοῦ, a reading supported by C, vgmss, syh. Sanders was able to restore this line as µηται· τους̣ ν̣εω ̣ τ̣ ερους ω̣σ[̣ αυτως].

p.164 (Titus 2:14–15) 1

5 4

[… λυτρ] Ω̣Σ̣ΗΤ ̣ ̣ΑΙ̣ ̣ ΗΜΑΣ ΑΠΟ ΠΑΣΗΣ ΑΝΟΜΙΑΣ Κ̣ΑΙ̣ ̣ Κ̣ΑΘ ̣ Α ̣ ΡΙΣΗ Ε̣ΑΥΤΩ ΛΑΟΝ ΠΕΡΙΟΥ̣ Σ̣ΙΟΝ ΖΗΛΩΤΗΝ ΚΑΛΩΝ ΕΡΓΩΝ [τα]Υ̣Τ̣Α̣ ΛΑΛΕ̣Ι̣ Κ̣ΑΙ̣ ̣ ΠΑΡΑΚΑΛΕΙ ΚΑΙ Ε [λεγχε µετα] Π̣Α[̣ σ]Η̣Σ̣ [ε]Π̣[ι]ΤΑΓΗΣ ΜΗ̣ [δεις σου περιφρονειτω …] A reads δίδασκε in place of λάλει.

p.165 (Titus 3:8–9) Κ̣Ζ̣ 1

[… ινα φρον] Τ̣ΙΖ ̣ ΟΥΣΙΝ Κ̣ΑΛ ̣ Ω ̣ Ν ̣ ̣ Ε̣ΡΓΩΝ Π̣ΡΟΙΣΤ̣Α̣

TRANSCRIPTION OF CODEX I

5

129

ΣΘΑΙ ΟΙ ΠΕΠ̣ΙΣ ̣ ̣Τ̣Ε̣ΥΚ ̣ ΟΤΕΣ Θ̣Ω·̣ [Ταυ]ΤΑ ΕΣΤΙΝ Κ̣ΑΛ ̣ Α ̣ ̣ Κ̣ΑΙ ΩΦ̣Ε̣ΛΙ̣ Μ ̣ Α ̣ ̣ [το]Ι̣Σ̣ ΑΝΟΙΣ· Μ̣ΩΡ ̣ Α̣Σ̣ Δ̣Ε̣ Ζ̣[η]Τ̣[ησεις] [κ]Α̣Ι̣ ΓΕΝΕΑΛ̣[ογ]Ι̣ΑΣ ̣ ̣ [και ερεις και] [µαχ]Α̣Σ̣ ΝΟΜ̣[ικας περιιστασο …]

The quire number ΚΖ (27) appears, albeit very faintly, in the upper right corner with a decorative horizontal stroke both above and below the letters. 1 The indicative φροντίζουσιν (also attested in a few late witnesses 37, 73, et al.) has replaced the subjunctive φροντίζωσιν, which is to be expected in a purpose clause. 2 The mid-point dot indicates a sense break. 3 Sanders was able to read the beginning of this line, and in his edition he gave a capitalized first letter with a paragraphos. τὰ καλά D2, K, L, P, Ψ, et al. 5 F and G read λογοµαχίας γενεαλογίας, which is a harmonization to 1 Tim. 6:4. Sanders read ἐρίς (l. ἔρεις), but this part of the text is no longer extant.

p.166 (Phlm 1:1–3) 1

5

1

2

†

ΠΡ̣ΟΣ ̣ ̣ Φ̣[ΙΛΗΜΟΝΑ]

Π̣ΑΥΛΟ̣Σ̣ Δ̣Ε̣[σµιος] ΧΥ̣ Ι̣Υ̣ Κ̣[α]Ι̣ ΤΙΜ̣Ο̣ ΘΕΟΣ Ο̣ Α̣ΔΕΛΦΟΣ ΦΙΛΗΜΟΝΙ Τ[ω] Α̣ΓΑΠΗΤΩ̣ ΚΑΙ ΣΥΝ̣Ε̣ΡΓΩ ΗΜΩ[ν] [και απφ]Ι̣Α̣ Τ̣Η̣ Α̣ΔΕ ̣ ΛΦΗ ΚΑΙ ΑΡΧΙΠ̣[πω] [τω συστρατ]ΙΩ̣[τη] ΗΜΩΝ ΚΑΙ [τη] [κατ οικον σου εκκλησια χα]Ρ̣ΙΣ ̣ ̣ There is a staurogram in the upper left corner of the page. What is visible of the superscription heading (πρὸς Φιλήµονα) is extremely faint and probably has decorative lines both above and below the letters as per the custom, but it is very difficult to see. There are several variants attested for δέσµιος. D* has ἀπόστολος, 629 has ἀπόστολος δέσµιος, while 323 and 945 read δοῦλος. Codex I begins each book with ekthesis and a paragraphos with the exception of Titus.

130 3 4 5

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016) The longer reading of D* (ar), b, et al. (τῷ ἀγαπητῷ ἀδελφῷ) is not attested in this manuscript. Some witnesses (D2, K, L, Ψ, et al.) have τῇ ἀγαπητῇ in place of τῇ ἀδελφῇ; other witnesses (629, ar [b vgms], et al.) have both readings combined (ἀδελφῇ τῇ ἀγαπητῇ). The καί that begins this line was placed on the previous line and in brackets in Sanders’ edition. The spacing of the letters makes it certain that it should be included at the beginning of this line.

p.167 (Phlm 1:14–16) 1

5

[χ]Ω̣ΡΙΣ ΔΕ ΤΗΣ ΣΗΣ ΓΝΩΜΗΣ ΟΥΔΕΝ Η̣ ΘΕΛΗΣΑ ΠΟΙΗΣΑΙ ΙΝΑ ΜΗ ΩΣ Κ̣ΑΤΑ̣ ΑΝ̣ Α̣[γκ]ΗΝ ΤΟ ΑΓΑΘΟΝ ΣΟΥ Η ΑΛΛΑ ΚΑ̣Τ̣Α̣ Ε̣[κου] [σ]ΙΟΝ ΤΑΧΑ ΓΑΡ ΔΙΑ ΤΟΥ̣[τ]Ο̣ ΕΧ̣Ω[̣ ρισθη] Π̣ΡΟΣ ΩΡΑΝ ΙΝΑ ̣ ̣ ΑΙΩ[νιον αυτον απε] [χ]ΗΣ̣ ΟΥΚΕΤΙ [ως δουλον αλλ υπερ δουλον …]

CONCLUSION Despite its damaged and somewhat fragmentary condition, Codex I is an important witness to the early text of the Epistles of Paul. This new transcription confirms the majority of the text as recorded nearly a century ago by Sanders, an excellent and capable scholar and textual critic. Most of the instances in which the new transcription varies from Sanders consist of differences in the placement of both underdots and square brackets. The new edition, in general, tends to be less certain of the text than was Sanders. As a full set of plates was not made as a part of Sanders’ edition, it is difficult to tell whether this is primarily due to the deterioration of the text over time, or rather, perhaps, due to a less conservative transcriptional approach by Sanders. The evidence favors the conclusion that the manuscript has continued to deteriorate since, as Sanders himself noted, “somewhat more was read in the first collation than could be seen on later examination, but the fragments now seem to be keeping perfectly and so will be available for future reference.”1 A comparison between the four plates which Sanders did include and their modern counterparts, however, reveals little, if any, deterioration over the last century. The comparison of only four images, however, is far too small a sample size with which one might responsibly draw conclusions concerning the remainder of the manuscript. Having said that, there are certainly occasions on which Sanders saw text which is no longer visible in the image sets today. A further way in which this new edition adds to the fine work done by Sanders is in the inclusion of tables and commentary which lay out all of the manuscript’s variant readings and list examples of

1

Sanders, Epistles of Paul, vii.

132

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016)

many scribal characteristics and practices in an easily accessible format.2 The lists of variant readings were particularly helpful when evaluating the textual affiliation of Codex I, which appears to align more closely with the earlier textual tradition represented by the editorial text of NA28 than it does with the Byzantine tradition (as represented by the RP). The scribe of Codex I seems to have been both careful and well practised, creating relatively few errors of any major significance. Most of the scribal errors did little or nothing to alter the meaning of the text, and were largely either itacistic or orthographic in some other respect.

The variant readings are based on comparisons with both the NA28 and RP editions of the Greek New Testament. Examples of scribal practices include the use of quire numbers, terminal nu, terminal sigma, incipits, nomina sacra forms, and various others. 2

APPENDICES APPENDIX 1: TERMINAL NU The page (or folio) numbers in the “Page #” column are based on the pagination of this edition, which also follows that of Sanders. The words in the “Word with Nu at a Line’s End” column are noted as they appear in the transcription section (with bracketed letters, underdots, nomina sacra and terminal letter forms, etc.) so as to give the reader a better visual portrayal of how they appear in the manuscript. The stroke indicating a terminal nu has been expanded in this table as “(ν),” but it appears in the transcriptions as a supralinear stroke as it was originally written by the scribe of Codex I. Page # 3 7 13

Verse 1 Cor 11:18 1 Cor 12:28 1 Cor 15:3

Word with Nu at a Line’s End ϋπαρχει(ν) [πρωτο]̣ν̣ απεθανεν

15

1 Cor 15:28

παν||τα

17 23

1 Cor 15:49 2 Cor 2:3

φο̣ρεσοµ̣ε(ν) εστι(ν)

23

2 Cor 2:4

συ(ν)||οχης

25 27 31 31 33 33 33 33 35

2 Cor 3:7 2 Cor 4:7 2 Cor 6:6 2 Cor 6:7 2 Cor 7:7 2 Cor 7:7 2 Cor 7:7 2 Cor 7:7 2 Cor 8:6

ε]ν̣ η]µ̣ων· εν [αριστερ]ω̣ν̣ α̣να ̣ ̣γγ̣ ε̣ λ̣ λ̣ ω ̣ (̣ ν) τ̣ο(̣ ν̣) υµω(ν̣) µ̣α̣λλο(ν) τη(ν)

35

2 Cor 8:7

πα(ν)||τι

Terminal Nu Used?/Notes Yes No No No, occurs mid-word Yes Yes Yes, occurs mid-word No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes, occurs mid-word

134

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016)

Page #

Verse

Word with Nu at a Line’s End

37

2 Cor 8:24

ε(ν)||δεικνυµενοι

37 41 41 41 41 43 43 45 47 49 51 51 53 55

2 Cor 9:1 2 Cor 10:18 2 Cor 10:18 2 Cor 10:18 2 Cor 11:1 2 Cor 11:21 2 Cor 11:21 2 Cor 12:7 2 Cor 13:2 Gal 1:1 Gal 1:22 Gal 1:23 Gal 2:17 Gal 3:17

[γρα]φ̣ει(ν) εαυτο(ν) εστιν συνϊστησι(ν) µικρο(ν) [α]τ̣ιµιαν [ησθενηκα]µ̣ε(̣ ν̣) [α]ποκαλυψεω(ν) παρω(ν) ΑΝΩΝ ε(ν) ησαν [ευρεθ]ηµεν Χ̣Ν̣

57

Gal 4:9

γνο(ν)||τες

59 59 61 63 65 67 69 71 73 75 77 77 79 79 79 81 81 82 83

Eph 2:16 Eph 2:16 Eph 3:18 Eph 4:18 Eph 5:10 Eph 6:1 Eph 6:19 Phil 1:13 Phil 2:3 Phil 2:25 Phil 3:15 Phil 3:16 Phil 4:14 Phil 4:15 Phil 4:15 Col 1:12 Col 1:12 Col 1:20 Col 1:27

εν εχθρα(ν) πασι(ν) τη(ν) [ευαρ]ε̣σ̣τον [γ]ο̣νευσιν ε(ν) εν εριθια(ν) λιτουργο(ν) φρονωµε(ν) πλη(ν) πλην ε(ν) εξηλθο(ν) ευχαριστουν ι̣κ̣α̣νω ̣ σ ̣ ̣αν̣ ̣ ΟΥ(Ν)||ΟΙΣ̣ εν

83

Col 1:28

πα(ν)||τα

84 84 85

Col 2:17 Col 2:17 Col 2:19

εστι(ν) εορακε(ν) [επιχορηγουµεν]ο̣(ν)

Terminal Nu Used?/Notes Yes, occurs mid-word Yes Yes No Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes No Yes No No No Yes, occurs mid-word No Yes Yes Yes No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes No No Yes No Yes, occurs mid-word Yes Yes Yes

APPENDICES Page #

Verse

Word with Nu at a Line’s End

89

Col 4:11

συ(ν)||[εργ]οι

91 91 91 93 95 97 97 99 99

1 Thess 1:9 1 Thess 1:9 1 Thess 1:10 1 Thess 2:14 1 Thess 3:13 1 Thess 4:17 1 Thess 4:18 1 Thess 5:23 1 Thess 5:25

εσχοµεν ειδωλω(ν) τω(ν) τω(ν) ϋµων απαντησι(ν) [χρον]ω̣(ν) εν [ηµ]ων

99

1 Thess 5:26

πα(ν)[τας[

101 101 103 103 105 105 105 107 107 107 109 110 111

2 Thess 1:11 2 Thess 1:11 2 Thess 2:16 2 Thess 2:16 Heb 1:1 Heb 1:2 Heb 1:2 Heb 2:5 Heb 2:5 Heb 2:6 Heb 3:6 Heb 3:14 Heb 4:3

ϋµων πασαν ηµω(ν) ε̣ν̣ πατρασιν ελαλησεν εποιησεν ῡπεταξεν µελλουσα(ν) αν||[θρω]π̣ος̣ οικο(ν) κατασχωµεν· γενηθεντω(ν)

111

Heb 3:4

πα(ν)||[τ]ω̣ν

111

Heb 3:5

τη(ν)

115

Heb 6:10

διακονου(ν)||[τ]ε̣ς

115 115 115 117 117 119 119 119 121

Heb 6:11 Heb 6:11 Heb 6:12 Heb 7:9 Heb 7:10 Heb 7:28 Heb 7:28 Heb 7:28 Heb 9:2

εκαστο(ν) πληροφορια(ν) τω(ν) λαµβανω(ν) σ̣υν̣ η ̣ ̣ντ̣ η ̣ ̣σε̣ ν̣ ̣ καθιστησιν ασθενιαν· τον τω(ν)

123

Heb 9:19

πα(ν)||[τι]

135 Terminal Nu Used?/Notes Yes, occurs mid-word No Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes No No Yes, occurs mid-word No No Yes No No No No No Yes No Yes No Yes Yes, occurs mid-word Yes Yes, occurs mid-word Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No Yes Yes, occurs mid-word

136

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016)

Page # 125 127 129 133 135 136 137 137

Verse Heb 10:8 Heb 10:28 Heb 11:7 Heb 11:40 Heb 12:16 Heb 12:25 Heb 13:7 Heb 13:7

Word with Nu at a Line’s End λεγω(ν) δυσιν βλεποµενων ηµω(ν) αυτων· ΟΥΝΩ(Ν) ηγουµενω(ν) ϋµιν

137

Heb 13:7

αναθεωρου(ν)||τες

137 138 138 139 141 141 142 142 143 143 143 145 145 145 146 147 147 147 147 148

Heb 13:7 Heb 13:17 Heb 13:17 Heb 13:25 1 Tim 1:11 1 Tim 1:12 1 Tim 1:20 1 Tim 1:20 1 Tim 2:10 1 Tim 2:11 1 Tim 2:12 1 Tim 4:2 1 Tim 4:3 1 Tim 4:3 1 Tim 4:10 1 Tim 5:6 1 Tim 5:8 1 Tim 5:8 1 Tim 5:9 1 Tim 5:17

πιστιν ϋµω̣(ν̣) ποιωσιν υ̣µω ̣ ν̣ ευαγγελιον πιστο(ν) παιδευθωσιν βλασφηµειν· αγαθων· ε(ν) ε̣ν̣ κεκαυτηριασµενω(ν) κωλυον β̣ρ̣ωµ ̣ ̣ατ̣ ω ̣ (̣ ν̣) πιστ̣ω(̣ ν̣) τεθνηκε(ν) τω(ν) χειρων ελατ̣το̣ ̣(ν̣) αξιουσθωσαν

149

1 Tim 6:2

εχο(ν)||τας

150 151 151 152 154 154 155 155 155

1 Tim 6:10 1 Tim 6:17 1 Tim 6:19 2 Tim 1:2 2 Tim 2:2 2 Tim 2:3 2 Tim 2:14 2 Tim 2:14 2 Tim 2:15

εστιν απολαυσι(ν) αποθησαυρ̣ι̣ζο(ν) ηµων· µαρτυρω(ν) συγκακοπαθησον λογοµαχει(ν) ακουοντων· ορθοτοµουν

Terminal Nu Used?/Notes Yes No No Yes No Yes Yes No Yes, occurs mid-word No Yes No No No Yes No No No Yes No Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes No Yes, occurs mid-word No Yes Yes No Yes No Yes No No

APPENDICES Page # 157

Verse 2 Tim 3:7

Word with Nu at a Line’s End επιγνωσιν

158

2 Tim 4:1

µελλο̣ν̣||τος

159 160 160 160 161 161 161 162 162 164 167

2 Tim 4:8 2 Tim 4:18 2 Tim 4:18 2 Tim 4:19 Title Titus 1:1 Titus 1:2 Titus 1:11 Titus 1:11 Titus 2:14 Philem 1:14

ηγαπηκοσιν την α̣µ̣ην· α̣κυ̣ ̣λαν τιτον ε̣κ̣λε̣ κτων αιω̣νιω̣ν̣ διδασκον̣ χ̣α̣ρ̣ι̣ν̣ εργων αν̣

137 Terminal Nu Used?/Notes No No, occurs mid-word No No No No No No No No No No No

APPENDIX 2: LINE-ENDING OR TERMINAL SIGMA Similar to terminal nu, the scribe noted a terminal or line-ending sigma by elongating the top stroke of the letter significantly. At times this elongation was helpful when determining whether the scribe was intentionally ending the line. The page (or folio) numbers in the “Page #” column are based on the pagination Sanders employed which is followed in the transcription section above. The words in the “Word with Sigma at a Line’s End” column are noted as they appear in the transcription section (with bracketed letters, underdots, nomina sacra and terminal letter forms, etc.) so as to give the reader a better visual portrayal of how they appear in the manuscript. Page # 23 33 35 37 37 39 39 43 45 47

Verse 2 Cor 2:4 2 Cor 7:8 2 Cor 8:6 2 Cor 9:1 2 Cor 9:1 2 Cor 10:1 2 Cor 10:1 2 Cor 11:20 2 Cor 12:7 2 Cor 13:1

Word with Sigma at a Line’s End [υµ]α̣ς̣ υ̣µ̣ας̣ ̣ ουτως της [αγ]ι̣ου̣ ς της εις τις α̣γγ̣ ε̣ λ̣ ο̣ ς̣ ̣ υµας

Terminal Sigma Used? Yes Yes Yes No No No Yes No Yes Yes

138 Page # 47 49 55 55 57 57 65 65 69 70 71 73 75 80 83 83 84 84 87 89 89 91 95 95 95 95 97 101 103 105 105 105 109 109 109 111 111 113 113 115 117

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016) Verse 2 Cor 13:2 Title Gal 3:16 Gal 3:16 Gal 4:9 Gal 4:10 Eph 5:6 Eph 5:8 Eph 6:19 Title Phil 1:12 Phil 2:1 Phil 2:25 Title Col 1:28 Col 1:28 Col 2:16 Col 2:17 Col 3:16 Col 4:12 Col 4:12 1 Thess 1:10 1 Thess 3:11 1 Thess 3:12 1 Thess 3:12 1 Thess 3:12 1 Thess 4:18 2 Thess 1:11 2 Thess 2:17 Title Heb 1:1 Heb 1:3 Heb 3:4 Heb 3:5 Heb 3:6 Heb 3:4 Heb 3:6 Heb 5:7 Heb 5:7 Heb 6:12 Heb 7:8

Word with Sigma at a Line’s End τοις γαλατας ως ΧΣ γνωσθεντες καιρ̣ους απιθιας φωτος λογος φιλιππισιου̣ς̣ εις τις ϋµας κολασσαεις ηµεις νουθετουντες εορτης φυσιουµενος πλουσιως επαφρας ταις ηµας ϋµας περις||[σευ]σαι αλληλους ηµεις λογοις κλησεως τας εβραιους πολυτροπως τ̣η̣ς̣ ΘΣ· εις ηµε̣ις ΘΣ εις σαρκος ῑκεισιας µακροθυµιας δεκατας

Terminal Sigma Used? Yes No Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No No No Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

APPENDICES Page # 119 119 119 120 123 127 127 128 131 132 133 134 134 135 137 138 139 139 139 139 140 145 147 149 150 150 150 151 152 153 153 155 155 156 156 157 157 158 161 161 161

Verse Heb 7:27 Heb 7:28 Heb 8:1 Heb 8:7 Heb 9:19 Heb 10:27 Heb 10:28 Heb 10:38 Heb 11:23 Heb 11:31 Heb 11:39 Heb 12:7 Heb 12:9 Heb 12:17 Heb 13:8 Heb 13:16 Heb 13:23 Heb 13:24 Heb 13:24 Heb 13:24 1 Tim 1:2 1 Tim 4:1 1 Tim 5:5 1 Tim 6:2 1 Tim 6:9 1 Tim 6:10 1 Tim 6:10 1 Tim 6:18 2 Tim 1:1 2 Tim 1:10 2 Tim 1:11 2 Tim 2:15 2 Tim 2:16 2 Tim 2:22 2 Tim 2:23 2 Tim 3:8 2 Tim 3:8 2 Tim 3:17 Titus 1:1 Titus 1:1 Titus 1:2

Word with Sigma at a Line’s End προσενεγκας· της τ̣η̣ς̣ τοπος· εντολης ϋπεναντιους µωϋσεως [δ]ι̣κ̣α̣ι̣ο̣ς̣ βασιλεως [ειρη]νης επαγγελιας ϋι̣οι̣ ̣ς̣ τους̣ ε̣κζ̣ητησ̣α̣ς̣ αυτος ΘΣ ϋµας· τους αγιους· [ταλι]α̣ς̣ ΠΡΣ προσεχοντες ηµερας της ΑΝΟΥΣ της πολλαις· εργοις της της εις τας̣ κεν̣ο̣φωνιας̣ καθαρας µαχας· ιαµβρης ουτως ΑΝΟΣ αποστ̣ο̣λος της ζωης

139 Terminal Sigma Used? No Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes No No No No No No No Yes No No Yes No No No Yes Yes Yes No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes No Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes

140 Page # 161 162 162 163 164 166

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016) Verse Titus 1:3 Titus 1:11 Titus 1:11 Titus 2:5 Titus 2:14 Phlm 1:3

Word with Sigma at a Line’s End ι̣δι̣ ̣οι̣ ̣ς̣ ους̣ ολους̣ σωφρονας ανοµιας χα]ρ̣ι̣ς̣

Terminal Sigma Used? Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No

APPENDIX 3: ENLARGED LETTERS WITH EKTHESIS AND PARAGRAPHOI The page (or folio) numbers in the “Page #” column are based on the pagination of this edition, which also follows that of Sanders’ edition. The words in the “Word with an Incipit” column are noted as they appear in the transcription section (with bracketed letters, underdots, nomina sacra, and terminal letter forms, etc.) so as to give the reader a better visual portrayal of how they appear in the manuscript. Upper case and lower case letters have been used to approximate the difference in size in letters between those letters designated by ekthesis and the letters that follow it. Page # 6

Verse

Word with an Incipit

1 Cor 12:16

Κα̣ι̣

14

1 Cor 15:15

Ευρισκοµε̣θ[̣ α]

20 22 28

2 Cor 1:1 2 Cor 1:17 2 Cor 4:17

Παυλος Βουλοµ̣ε[̣ νος] Το

30

2 Cor 5:19

κο||Σ[µον]

32

2 Cor 6:17

Εκ

Notes Sanders omits the paragraphos over the first letter, but it is clearly present.

The incipit occurs mid-word. Sanders omits all of verse 19.

APPENDICES

36

2 Cor 8:16

ΘΩ

38 42 46 48 48 50 54 54 56 56

2 Cor 9:7 2 Cor 11:10 2 Cor 12:15 2 Cor 13:10 2 Cor 13:11 Gal 1:13 Gal 3:6 Gal 3:8 Gal 3:25 Gal 3:28

Εκαστος Εσ̣τι̣[ν] Δαπανη̣[σω] Δια Χαιρετε̣ Ηκουσαται Καθως Οτι Πιστεως Ουκ

58

Gal 4:22

αβρα||Αµ

60 62 64 66 66 68 68 70 70 72

Eph 3:8 Eph 4:10 Eph 4:29 Eph 5:22 Eph 5:24 Eph 6:10 Eph 6:12 Phil 1:1 Phil 1:2 Phil 1:22

Εµοι Ο Προς Αι Αλλα̣ Του Οτι Παυλος Και Σαρκι

74

Phil 2:13

ε||Νεγρων

74 78 80 80 80 82 82 84

Phil 2:14 Phil 4:4 Col 1:1 Col 1:2 Col 1:3 Col 1:21 Col 1:22 Col 2:8

Παντα Χαιρεται Παυλος Χαρις Τω Και Νυνι Εστε

86

Col 3:8

απο||Θ̣εσθαι

88

Col 4:1

Οι

88

Col 4:2

[προσκαρτε]||Ρουντες

141 In addition to being an incipit with an accompanying paragraphos, the theta here is also the first half of the nomen sacrum. No paragraphos.

The incipit occurs mid-word.

The incipit occurs mid-word.

The incipit occurs mid-word. The incipit occurs mid-word.

142 90

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016) 1 Thess 1:1

Παυλος

90

1 Thess 1:2

ΘΩ

92

1 Thess 2:9

[µνη]||Μο̣ν̣ευ̣ ̣ετ̣ ̣ε̣

94 96

1 Thess 3:5 1 Thess 4:8

Δια Ο

96

1 Thess 4:9

[φι]||Λαδελφιας

100 100 100 102 106 108 110 112

2 Thess 1:1 2 Thess 1:2 2 Thess 1:3 2 Thess 2:5 Heb 1:9 Heb 2:14 Heb 3:15 Heb 4:14

Παυλος Χαρις Οφιλοµεν Ου Δια Κεκοινωνηκεν Εν Εχοντες

114

Heb 6:3

[το]||Υτο

116 118 118 120 124 126

Heb 7:1 Heb 7:18 Heb 7:20 Heb 8:8 Heb 9:27 Heb 10:18

Βασιλευς Αθετησεις Κ̣αι Μεµφοµενος Αποκειται Ο̣π̣ο̣υ̣

128

Heb 10:37

[µι]||Κρον

131 132 134 134 135 136 138 138 139 140 140 141

Heb 11:23 Heb 11:32 Heb 12:7 Heb 12:9 Heb 12:17 Heb 12:26 Heb 13:17 Heb 13:18 Heb 13:24 1 Tim 1:1 1 Tim 1:2 1 Tim 1:12

Πιστι Και Εις Μεν Ειστε Νυν Πιθεσθαι Πρ̣ο̣σε̣υχ̣εσ̣θα ̣ [̣ ι] Α̣σπασασθαι Παυλος Χαρις Χ̣αριν

In addition to being an incipit with an accompanying paragraphos, the theta here is also the first half of the nomen sacrum. The incipit occurs mid-word. The incipit occurs mid-word.

The incipit occurs mid-word.

The incipit occurs mid-word. No paragraphos.

APPENDICES 142 143 144 145 146 146 147 148 148

1 Tim 2:1 1 Tim 2:11 1 Tim 3:8 1 Tim 4:1 1 Tim 4:11 1 Tim 4:13 1 Tim 5:8 1 Tim 5:17 1 Tim 5:18

Παρακαλω Γυνη Σεµνους Τ̣ο̣ Παραγγελλε Εως Ι̣διων Οι Ου

148

1 Tim 5:19

[κα]||Τηγορ̣ιαν

150 152 152 152 153 154 155

1 Tim 6:11 2 Tim 1:1 2 Tim 1:2 2 Tim 1:3 2 Tim 1:10 2 Tim 2:4 2 Tim 2:15

Σ̣υ Παυλος Χαρις Χαριν Φανερωθεισαν Ουδεις Σπουδασον

156

2 Tim 2:23

απαι||Δευτους

156 157

2 Tim 2:24 2 Tim 3:8

Δουλον Ον

158

2 Tim 4:1

ενω||Πιον

159 160 162 166

2 Tim 4:9 2 Tim 4:19 Titus 1:10 Philem 1:1

Σπουδ̣[ασον] Ασπασασθ̣ε̣ Εισιν Π̣αυλο̣ς̣

143

No paragraphos. No paragraphos. The incipit occurs mid-word.

No paragraphos. The incipit occurs mid-word. The incipit occurs mid-word.

APPENDIX 4: NOMINA SACRA Page # 4 7 12 17 20 20 24 26 27 28

Verse

Abbreviation

1 Cor 11:26 1 Cor 12:27 1 Cor 14:32 1 Cor 15:50 2 Cor 1:1 2 Cor 1:1 2 Cor 2:14 2 Cor 3:17 2 Cor 4:6 2 Cor 4:16

Κ̣Υ̣ ΧΥ Π̣ΝΤ ̣ ̣Α̣ [Θ]Υ̣ Χ̣Υ̣ Θ̣[Υ] Χ̣Ω̣ ΠΝΑ̣ ΘΥ Α̣ΝΟΣ

Abbreviated Word κυριου χριστου πνευµατα θεου χριστου θεου χριστω πνευµα θεου ανθρωπος

Notes

144 Page # 32

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016) Verse

Abbreviation

2 Cor 6:17

Κ[Σ]

Abbreviated Word κυριος

36

2 Cor 8:16

ΘΩ

θεω

38 39 41 41 49 49 49 49 50 53 53 54 55 55 56 56 57 59 61 61 63 64

2 Cor 9:8 2 Cor 9:15 2 Cor 10:18 2 Cor 11:2 Gal 1:1 Gal 1:1 Gal 1:1 Gal 1:1 Gal 1:11 Gal 2:16 Gal 2:16 Gal 3:6 Gal 3:16 Gal 3:17 Gal 3:24 Gal 3:27 Gal 4:9 Eph 2:16 Eph 3:19 Eph 3:19 Eph 4:18 Eph 4:30

ΘΣ ΘΩ ΚΣ [Θ]Υ̣ ΑΝΩΝ [ΑΝΟ]Υ̣ ΙΥ ΧΥ ΘΥ ΑΝΟΝ ΙΝ ΧΥ ΘΩ ΧΣ Χ̣Ν̣ ΧΝ ΧΝ [Θ]Υ̣ ΘΩ ΧΥ ΘΥ ΘΥ ΠΝ[̣ Α]

θεος θεω κυριος θεου ανθρωπων ανθρωπου ιησου χριστου θεου ανθρωπον ιησουν χριστου θεω χριστος χριστον χριστον χριστον θεου θεω χριστου θεου θεου πνευµα

65

Eph 5:6

[ΘΥ]

θεου

65 66 66 66 66 67 68

Eph 5:8 Eph 5:20 Eph 5:20 Eph 5:20 Eph 5:23 Eph 5:32 Eph 6:11

[Κ]Ω ΙΥ ΧΥ ΘΩ ΠΡ̣[Ι] ΧΣ ΧΝ ΘΥ

κυριω ιησου χριστου θεω πατρι χριστος χριστον θεου

Notes In addition to being the first half of the nomen sacrum, the theta here is also an incipit with an accompanying paragraphos.

No longer visible, but visible to Sanders.

APPENDICES

145

Page # 70 70 70

Verse

Abbreviation

Phil 1:1 Phil 1:1 Phil 1:2

Χ̣[Υ] ΧΩ ΙΥ ΘΥ ΠΡ̣Σ̣

70

Phil 1:2

ΚΥ ΙΥ ΧΥ

71 71

Phil 1:11 Phil 1:11

[Χ]Υ ΘΥ

Abbreviated Word χριστου χριστω ιησου θεου πατρος κυριου ιησου χριστου χριστου θεου

71

Phil 1:13

[ΧΩ]

χριστω

72 73 74 76 77 77 78 80 80 80 80

Phil 1:21 Phil 2:1 Phil 2:13 Phil 3:5 Phil 3:14 Phil 3:14 Phil 4:4 Col 1:1 Col 1:1 Col 1:2 Col 1:2

Χ̣[Σ] ΠΝΣ ΘΣ Ι̣Σ̣Λ ΘΥ ΧΩ ΙΥ ΚΩ ΙΥ ΧΥ ΘΥ ΧΩ Θ̣[Υ]

80

Col 1:2

ΚΥ ΙΥ ΧΥ

80 80 81 81 82 83 83 83 83 84 86 87 87 88 88 88 89 89

Col 1:3 Col 1:3 Col 1:10 Col 1:12 Col 1:20 Col 1:27 Col 1:28 Col 1:28 Col 1:28 Col 2:8 Col 3:6 Col 3:16 Col 3:16 Col 3:25 Col 4:1 Col 4:1 Col 4:11 Col 4:12

ΘΥ ΠΡΙ ΘΥ [Π]Ρ̣Ι̣ ΟΥΝΟ ̣ ΙΣ̣ ΧΣ ΑΝΟΝ [ΑΝ]Ο̣Ν̣ ΑΝΟΝ Χ̣Ν ΘΥ ΚΥ ΠΝΙΚΑΙΣ ΘΩ̣ Κ̣[Ν] ΟΥΝΩ ΘΥ ΧΥ ΙΥ

χριστος πνευµατος θεος ισραηλ θεου χριστω ιησου κυριω ιησου χριστου θεου χριστω θεου κυριου ιησου χριστου θεου πατρι θεου πατρι ουρανοις χριστος ανθρωπον ανθρωπον ανθρωπον χριστον θεου κυριου πνευµατικαις θεω κυριον ουρανω θεου χριστου ιησου

Notes

No longer visible, but visible to Sanders.

146

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016)

Page # 90

Verse

Abbreviation

1 Thess 1:1

ΘΩ ΠΡΙ

90

1 Thess 1:1

ΚΥ ΙΥ ΧΥ

90

1 Thess 1:1

ΘΥ ΠΡΣ

90

1 Thess 1:1

ΚΥ ΙΥ ΧΥ

Abbreviated Word θεω πατρι κυριου ιησου χριστου θεου πατρος κυριου ιησου χριστου

90

1 Thess 1:2

ΘΩ

θεω

91 91 91 91 92 93 93 93 95 95 95 95 95 96 96 96 97 97 98 98 99 99 99 100 100 100

1 Thess 1:9 1 Thess 1:9 1 Thess1:10 1 Thess 1:10 1 Thess 2:8 1 Thess 2:14 1 Thess 2:15 1 Thess 2:15 1 Thess 3:11 1 Thess 3:11 1 Thess 3:12 1 Thess 3:13 1 Thess 3:13 1 Thess 4:8 1 Thess 4:8 1 Thess 4:8 1 Thess 4:16 1 Thess 4:16 1 Thess 5:9 1 Thess 5:9 1 Thess 5:23 1 Thess 5:23 1 Thess 5:23 2 Thess 1:1 2 Thess 1:1 2 Thess 1:2

ΘΝ ΘΩ ΥΝ [ΟΥ]Ν̣ΩΝ ̣  ΘΥ [Χ]Ω̣ ΙΥ ΚΝ ΙΝ ΚΣ ΙΣ ΚΣ ΘΥ Κ̣Υ̣ ΑΝΟΝ ΘΝ ΠΝΑ ΟΥΝΟΥ ΧΩ ΘΩ ΙΥ ΧΥ ΠΝΑ ΚΥ ΙΥ ΧΥ ΘΩ ΠΡΙ ΚΥ Θ[Υ

θεον θεω υιον ουρανων θεου χριστω ιησου κυριον ιησουν κυριος ιησους κυριος θεου κυριου ανθρωπον θεον πνευµατα ουρανου χριστω θεω ιησου χριστου πνευµατα κυριου ιησου χριστου θεω πατρι κυριου θεου

Notes

In addition to being the first half of the nomen sacrum, the theta here is also an incipit with an accompanying paragraphos.

APPENDICES Page #

Verse

Abbreviation

100

2 Thess 1:2

ΚΥ ΙΥ ΧΥ

100 102 103 103 103 103 103 105 106 106 106 106 107 108 109 109 109 110 111 112 112 112 112 114 114 116 117 118 119 120 122 125 126 128 129 131 131 131 132

2 Thess 1:3 2 Thess 2:8 2 Thess 2:14 2 Thess 2:14 2 Thess 2:16 2 Thess 2:16 2 Thess 2:16 Heb 1:1 Heb 1:9 Heb 1:9 Heb 1:10 Heb 1:10 Heb 2:6 Heb 2:13 Heb 3:4 Heb 3:6 Heb 3:6 Heb 3:14 Heb 4:4 Heb 4:14 Heb 4:14 Heb 4:14 Heb 4:14 Heb 6:1 Heb 6:1 Heb 7:1 Heb 7:8 Heb 7:19 Heb 7:27 Heb 8:8 Heb 9:11 Heb 10:7 Heb 10:16 Heb 10:36 Heb 11:6 Heb 11:22 Heb 11:23 Heb 11:24 Heb 11:32

ΘΩ Κ̣[Σ] ΚΥ ΙΥ ΧΥ ΙΣ ΧΣ ΘΣ ΠΗΡ ΘΣ ΘΣ ΘΣ Κ̣[Ε] ΟΥΝΟΙ [Α]ΝΟΥ ΘΣ ΘΣ ΧΣ ΥΣ ΧΥ ΘΣ ΟΥΝΟ ̣ Υ ̣ Σ ̣ ̣ Ι̣[Ν] Υ̣Ν̣ Θ̣Υ ΧΥ Θ̣[Ν] ΘΥ̣ ΑΝΟΙ ΘΩ ΑΝΟΥΣ ΙΣΛ ΧΣ ΘΣ ΚΣ ΘΥ ΘΩ ΙΣΛ ΠΡΩΝ Υ̣Σ̣ ΔΑΔ

147 Abbreviated Word κυριου ιησου χριστου θεω κυριος κυριου ιησου χριστου ιησους χριστος θεος πατηρ θεος θεος θεος κυριε ουρανοι ανθρωπου θεος θεος χριστος υιος χριστου θεος ουρανους ιησουν υιον θεου χριστου θεον θεου ανθρωποι θεω ανθρωπους ισραηλ χριστος θεος κυριος θεου θεω ισραηλ πατερων υιος δαυιδ

Notes

148 Page # 133 134 134 134 136 136 137 137 138 140 140 140 140 140 140 141 141 141 145 146 146 149 150 150 150 151 152 152 152 152 152 152 152 153 153 154 154 155 155 156 156

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016) Verse

Abbreviation

Heb 11:40 Heb 12:7 Heb 12:7 Heb 12:9 Heb 12:25 Heb 12:26 Heb 13:7 Heb 13:8 Heb 13:16 1 Tim 1:1 1 Tim 1:1 1 Tim 1:1 1 Tim 1:2 1 Tim 1:2 1 Tim 1:2 1 Tim 1:11 1 Tim 1:12 1 Tim 1:12 1 Tim 4:1 1 Tim 4:10 1 Tim 4:10 1 Tim 6:1 1 Tim 6:9 1 Tim 6:11 1 Tim 6:11 1 Tim 6:17 2 Tim 1:1 2 Tim 1:1 2 Tim 1:1 2 Tim 1:2 2 Tim 1:2 2 Tim 1:2 2 Tim 1:3 2 Tim 1:10 2 Tim 1:10 2 Tim 2:2 2 Tim 2:2 2 Tim 2:14 2 Tim 2:15 2 Tim 2:22 2 Tim 2:24

ΘΥ ΘΣ ΠΗΡ ΠΡΑΣ ΟΥΝΩ(Ν) Ο̣ΥΝ ̣ ΟΝ ̣  ΘΥ Ι̣Σ ΧΣ ΘΣ ΙΥ ΧΥ ΘΥ ΣΡΣ ΧΥ ΙΥ ΘΥ ΠΡΣ ΧΥ ΙΥ ΚΥ ΘΥ ΧΩ ΙΥ ΚΩ ΠΝΑ ΣΗΡ ΑΝΩΝ ΘΥ ΑΝΟΥΣ Α̣ΝΕ ̣ ̣ Θ̣Υ̣ ΘΩ ΙΥ ΧΥ ΘΥ ΧΩ ΙΥ ΘΥ ΠΡΣ ΧΥ ΙΥ ΚΥ ΘΩ ΣΡΣ ΘΥ ΑΝΟΙΣ ΧΥ ΙΥ ΘΥ ΘΩ ΚΝ ΚΥ

Abbreviated Word θεου θεος πατηρ πατερας ουρανων ουρανον θεου ιησους χριστος θεος ιησου χριστου θεου σωτηρος χριστου ιησου θεου πατρος χριστου ιησου κυριου θεου χριστω ιησου κυριω πνευµατα σωτηρ ανθρωπων θεου ανθρωπους ανθρωπε θεου θεω ιησου χριστου θεου χριστω ιησου θεου πατρος χριστου ιησου κυριου θεω σωτηρος θεου ανθρωποις χριστου ιησου θεου θεω κυριον κυριου

Notes

APPENDICES

149

Page # 158 158 158 158 161 161 161

Verse

Abbreviation

2 Tim 3:17 2 Tim 3:17 2 Tim 4:1 2 Tim 4:1 Titus 1:1 Titus 1:1 Titus 1:1

ΘΥ ΑΝΟΣ ΘΥ ΧΥ ΙΥ Θ̣Υ̣ ΙΥ ΧΥ ΘΥ

Abbreviated Word θεου ανθρωπος θεου χριστου ιησου θεου ιησου χριστου θεου

161

Titus 1:2

[ΘΣ]

θεος

163 165 165 166

Titus 2:5 Titus 3:8 Titus 3:8 Philem 1:1

Θ̣Υ̣ Θ̣Ω̣ ΑΝΟΙΣ Χ̣Υ̣ Ι̣Υ̣

θεου θεω ανθρωποις χριστου ιησου

Notes

No longer visible, but visible to Sanders.

APPENDIX 5: TEXTUAL VARIANTS This appendix provides a list of the textual differences between the text of NA28, the RP (Robinson Pierpont edition) and Codex I. Page Verse 4 1 Cor 11:26 4 1 Cor 11:27 10 1 Cor 14:12 16 1 Cor 15:38 16 1 Cor 15:38 17 1 Cor 15:49 18 1 Cor 16:2 20 2 Cor 1:1 22 2 Cor 1:17 26 2 Cor 3:17 32 2 Cor 6:16 34 2 Cor 7:13 35 36 39 40 41 42

2 Cor 8:6 2 Cor 8:16 2 Cor 9:15 2 Cor 10:10 2 Cor 10:18 2 Cor 11:9

Codex I Reading [α]ν̣ ελθη αρτον [το]υ̣[τον] π̣ρ̣ο̣φ̣η̣[ευητε] [αυ]τ̣ω̣ δ̣ι̣δω ̣ σ ̣ ̣ι̣ν̣ τ̣ο̣ ιδιον φο̣ρεσοµ̣ε(ν) [σαβ]βα̣το̣ υ Χ̣Υ [Ιησου] βουλοµ̣ε[̣ νος] κυριου µ̣ο̣υ̣ ϋµων περισσοτερως π̣ροε̣νη̣ρξ̣ α ̣ σ ̣ θαι δι̣δ[̣ οντι] δ̣ε τω θω µεν επισ̣τ[̣ ολαι] [συνιστα]ν̣ων̣ [εµαυτον] υµιν

NA28 Reading ελθη αρτον περισσευητε διδωσιν αυτω ιδιον φορεσοµεν σαββατου Χριστου Ιησου βουλοµενος κυριου µου ηµων περισσοτερως προενηρξατο δοντι τω θεω επιστολαι µεν συνιστανων εµαυτον υµιν

RP Reading ελθη αρτον περισσευητε διδωσιν αυτω ιδιον φορεσωµεν σαββατων Ιησου Χριστου βουλευοµενος κυριου εκει µοι ηµων περισσοτερως προενηρξατο δοντι τω θεω µεν επιστολαι συνιστων υµιν εµαυτον

150 43 44 45 46 47 47 48 53 53 55 57 60 60 61 63 63 64 64 66 66 68 69 70 70 70 73 73 73 74 76 76 77 79 80 80 80 81

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016)

2 Cor 11:20 εις προσω[πον υµας] εις προσωπον υµας υµας εις προσωπον 2 Cor 11:28 ε̣π̣ι̣σ̣υσ ̣ ̣τασ[ις] επιστασις επιστασις 2 Cor 12:6 α̣κ̣ουει ακουει τι ακουει τι 2 Cor 12:14 καταναρκησω ϋµων καταναρκησω καταναρκησω 2 Cor 13:1 δυο η τριων δυο µαρτυρων και δυο µαρτυρων και µαρ[τυρων] τριων τριων 2 Cor 13:2 νυν νυν νυν γραφω 2 Cor 13:10 [ο κυριος ο κυριος εδωκεν µοι εδω]κεν µοι εδωκεν µοι ο κυριος Gal 2:16 οτι οτι διοτι Gal 2:16 εξ ερ[γων νοµου ου εξ εργων νοµου ου ου δικαιωθησεται δικ]αιωθησεται δικαιωθησεται εξ εργων νοµου Gal 3:17 [του θεου ει]ς̣ Χ̣Ν̣ του θεου του θεου Gal 4:8 [φυσει] µ̣η̣ ο̣υσ ̣ ι φυσει µη ουσιν µη φυσει ουσιν Eph 3:7 εγενηθην εγενηθην εγενοµην Eph 3:7 της δοθεισης της δοθεισης την δοθεισαν Eph 3:18 ϋ̣ψος και βαθος υψος και βαθος βαθος και υψος Eph 4:18 αυτω αυτοις αυτοις Eph 4:18 εσκοτωµε[νοι] εσκοτωµενοι εσκοτισµενοι Eph 4:28 [ταις ιδιαις χερσιν] ταις ιδιαις χερσιν το το αγαθον ταις το αγαθον αγαθον χερσιν Eph 4:28 εχηται εχη εχη Eph 5:22 absent υποτασσθωσαν υποτασσεσθε Eph 5:23 [εκ]κλησιας εκκλησιας εκκλησιας και Eph 6:10 του λοιπου του λοιπου το λοιποιν αδελφοι µου Eph 6:21 [και υµεις] ε̣ιδητε ειδητε και υµεις ειδητε και υµεις Phil 1:1 Χ̣[Υ Ιησου] Χριστου Ιησου Ιησου Χριστου Phil 1:11 καρπον καρπον καρπων Phil 1:11 τον δια τον δια των δια Phil 2:2 [φρονητα]ι̣ παντες φρονητε φρονητε Phil 2:2 συνψυχοι το αυτο συµψυχοι το εν συµψυχοι το εν Phil 2:3 προη[γουµενοι] ηγουµενοι ηγουµενοι Phil 2:13 ΘΣ θεος ο θεος Phil 3:4 αλλος δοκει δοκει αλλος δοκει άλλος Phil 3:6 [ζη]λος ζηλος ζηλον Phil 3:14 εις εις επι Phil 4:13 µε µε µε Χριστω Col 1:1 ΙΥ ΧΥ Χριστου Ιησου Χριστου Ιησου Col 1:2 [η]µων ηµων ηµων και ΚΥ ΙΥ ΧΥ Col 1:3 [και πατ]ρι πατρι πατρι Col 1:10 τη επιγνωσει τη επιγνωσει εις την επιγνωσιν

APPENDICES 82 82 83 84 85 85

85 86 87 87 87 88 88 88 88 89 89 90 90 90 90 92 92 93 93

Col 1:20 Col 1:20 Col 1:27 Col 2:7 Col 2:16 Col 2:17

151

αυτου δι αυτου αυτου δι αυτου εν τοις επι τοις ο εστιν ος εστιν τη πιστει εν τη πιστει και εν ποσει η εν ποσει το δε σωµα του το δε σωµα του Χριστου µηδεις Χριστου µηδεις υµας υµας καταβραβευετω καταβραβευετω θελων εν θελων εν ταπεινοφροσυνη ταπεινοφροσυνη και θηρσκεια των και θηρσκεια των αγγελων αγγελων Col 2:18 εορακε(ν) εορακεν µη εορακεν Col 3:7 τουτ̣[οις] τουτοις αυτοις Col 3:16 λογος του ΚΥ λογος του Χριστου λογος του Χριστου Col 3:16 [και υµνοι]ς και υµνοις υµνοις Col 3:16 τ̣η̣ κ̣α̣ρ[̣ δια] ταις καρδιαις ταις καρδιαις Col 3:25 [κοµι]ειται κοµισεται κοµισεται Col 3:25 absent at the end absent at the end παρα τω ΘΩ of the verse of the verse Col 4:1 ΟΥΝΩ ουρανω ουρανοις Col 4:2 [προσκαρτε]ρουντες προσκαρτερειτε προσκαρτερειτε Col 4:12 ΧΥ ΙΥ Χριστου Ιησου Χριστου Col 4:12 [ινα η]τε ινα σταθητε ινα σταθητε 1 Thess 1:1 ΚΥ κυριω κυριω 1 Thess 1:1 ΧΥ χριστω χριστω 1 Thess 1:1 απο ΘΥ ΠΡΣ η̣µ[ων absent at the end absent at the end of the verse of the verse και] ΚΥ ΙΥ ΧΥ 1 Thess 1:2 µνιαν µνειαν µνειαν υµων 1 Thess 2:7 νηπιοι νηπιοι ηπιοι 1 Thess 2:8 εγενηθ̣η̣[τε] εγενηθητε γεγενησθε 1 Thess 2:15 προφητας προφητας ιδιους προφητας 1 Thess 2:15 και θεω µη και θεω µη και θεω µη αρεσκοντων αρεσκοντων αρεσκοντων absent following εκδιωξαντων

94 1 Thess 3:2 95 1 Thess 3:11 95 1 Thess 3:11 95 1 Thess 3:12

αυτου εν τοις ος εστιν εν πιστει η εν ποσει 15 words absent following µελλοντων

παρακαλεσαι υπερ ϋµων ΙΣ την αγαπην

παρακαλεσαι υπερ ηµων Ιησους τη αγαπη

παρακαλεσαι υµας περι ηµων Χριστος τη αγαπη

152 96 96 96 96 99 100 102 103 104 105 107 108 109 110 112 113 114 115 116 119 119 120 122 122 122 124 125 125 126 126 126 127 128 128 128 129 130

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016)

1 Thess 4:8 τον 1 Thess 4:8 το αγ[ιον] αυτου 1 Thess 4:8 διδοντα 1 Thess 4:9 ειχο[µεν] 1 Thess 5:25 περι 2 Thess 1:1 ΚΥ 2 Thess 2:6 αυτ̣ο̣υ̣ 2 Thess 2:16 και θεος 2 Thess 3:8 νυκτα και ηµ̣[εραν] Heb 1:2 εποιησεν [τους αι]ω̣νας Heb 2:4 [µε]ρισµοι Heb 2:14 αιµατος κ̣αι̣ ̣ [σαρ]κος Heb 3:4 παντα Heb 3:14 του ΧΥ γεγοναµεν Heb 4:12 ενθυµησεως Heb 5:7 ικεισιας Heb 6:2 βαπτισθενν Heb 6:11 πιστεως Heb 7:1 ος Heb 7:27 προσενεγκας Heb 7:28 [ιε]ρ̣εις Heb 8:8 αυτους Heb 9:10 βαπτισµοις Heb 9:10 δικαιωµατα Heb 9:11 [µελλ]ο̣ντ̣ ω̣ν Heb 9:26 της αµαρτιας Heb 10:8 [ηβου]λ̣η̣θησ̣α̣ν̣ Heb 10:8 θυσιαν και [πρ]ο̣σφορα̣ν̣ Heb 10:16 διανοιαν Heb 10:17 αν[ο]µιων αυτων και των αµαρ̣[τιων] Heb 10:17 µησθη̣σο[µαι] Heb 10:27 πυρος Heb 10:35 µεγαλην µισθαποδοσιαν Heb 10:37 χρον̣ι̣ει̣ ̣ Heb 10:38 [δ]ι̣κα ̣ ̣ι̣ος̣ ̣ Heb 11:6 προσερχοµενον Heb 11:13 κοµισ[αµε]νοι

τον και τον και αυτου το αγιον το αγιον αυτου διδοντα δοντα εχετε εχετε και περι περι κυριω κυριου εαυτου εαυτου και ο θεος και θεος νυκτος και ηµερας νυκτος και ηµερας εποιησεν τους τους αιωνας αιωνας εποιησεν µερισµοις µερισµοις αιµατος και σαρκος και σαρκος αιµατος παντα τα παντα του Χριστου γεγοναµεν του γεγοναµεν Χριστου ενθυµησεων ενθυµησεων ικετηριας ικετηριας βαπτισµων βαπτισµων ελπιδος ελπιδος ο ο ανενεγκας ανενεγκας αρχιερεις αρχιερεις αυτους αυτοις βαπτισµοις βαπτισµοις και δικαιωµατα δικαιωµασιν γενοµενων µελλοντων της αµαρτιας αµαρτιας absent absent θυσιας και θυσιαν και προσφορας προσφοραν διανοιαν διανοιων αµαρτιων αυτων αµαρτιων αυτων και των ανοµιων και των ανοµιων µησθησοµαι µησηθω πυρος ζηλος πυρος µεγαλην µισθαποδοσιαν µισθαποδοσιαν µεγαλην χρονισει χρονιει δικαιος µου δικαιος προσερχοµενον τω προσερχοµενον τω λαβοντες λαβοντες

APPENDICES 131 Heb 11:22 132 Heb 11:32 132 Heb 11:32 133 133 134 134 134 134 135 136 136 136 138 139 139 140

ϋϊω γαρ µε̣ βαρακ· σαµψων· ιεφθ̣[αε] Heb 11:39 τας επαγγελιας Heb 12:1 τηλικου̣το̣ ̣ν̣ Heb 12:7 υιος Heb 12:8 και χωρις Heb 12:8 και ουχ ϋϊοι εσται Heb 12:9 πολυ Heb 12:16 αυτων Heb 12:25 εξεφυγον Heb 12:25 επι γης παραιτη̣σαµενοι τον χρηµατιζοντα Heb 12:25 π̣[ο]λυ Heb 13:17 ϋπεικεσθαι Heb 13:25 αµην absent Postscript to [προς] ε̣[βραιους] Hebrews 1 Tim 1:1 ΙΥ ΧΥ

140 1 Tim 1:2 141 1 Tim 1:12 143 1 Tim 2:12 144 1 Tim 3:7 146 1 Tim 4:12 147 1 Tim 5:8 148 1 Tim 5:17 148 1 Tim 5:18 150 151 151 151 151 151 152 153 153

1 Tim 6:11 1 Tim 6:17 1 Tim 6:17 1 Tim 6:17 1 Tim 6:17 1 Tim 6:18 2 Tim 1:1 2 Tim 1:10 2 Tim 1:11

153

υιων υιων µε γαρ µε γαρ βαρακ σαµψων βαρακ τε και ιεφθαε σαµψων και ιεφθαε την επαγγελιαν την επαγγελιαν τοσουτον τοσουτον υιος εστιν υιος χωρις χωρις και ουχ υιοι εστε εστε και ουχ υιοι πολυ δε πολλω εαυτου αυτου εξεφυγον εφυγον επι γης παρατον επι γης παραιτη̣σαµενοι τον ιτησαµενοι χρηµατιζοντα χρηµατιζοντα πολυ πολλω υπεικετε υπεικεσθαι αµην absent αµην absent absent Χριστου Ιησου

ΠΡΣ χαριν διδασκειν δε γυ[ν]αικει δε εν αγαπη

πατρος χαριν διδασκειν δε γυναικει δε εν αγαπη

προνοειται αληθεια ου φιµωσεις βουν αλοωντα̣ Θ̣Υ̣ [υψη]λα φρονειν πλουτω ΘΩ τα παντα αγαθοις ΙΥ ΧΥ ΘΥ διδασκαλος

προνοει διδασκαλια βουν αλοωντα ου φιµωσεις θεου υψηλοφρονειν πλουτου θεω παντα καλοις Χριστου Ιησου Χριστου Ιησου διδασκαλος

κυριου Ιησου Χριστου πατρος ηµων και χαριν γυναικι δε διδασκειν δε αυτον εν πνευµατι εν αγαπη προνοει διδασκαλια βουν αλοωντα ου φιµωσεις του θεου υψηλοφρονειν πλουτου θεω τω ζωντι παντα καλοις Ιησου Χριστου Χριστου Ιησου διδασκαλος εθνων

154 154 2 Tim 2:3 155 155 156 156 158

2 Tim 2:14 2 Tim 2:14 2 Tim 2:22 2 Tim 2:23 2 Tim 4:1

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016) συγκακοπαθησον ΘΥ επ παντων γεννωσει διαµαρτυροµαι

158 2 Tim 4:1

ΧΥ ΙΥ

159 2 Tim 4:8

ηµερα

160 162 162 165 165

2 Tim 4:19 Titus 1:10 Titus 1:10 Titus 3:8 Titus 3:8

ασπασασθ̣ε̣ πολλοι της περιτοµης [φρον]τ̣ι̣ζουσιν καλα

συγκακοπαθησον

συ ουν κακοπαθησον θεου κυριου επ εις των επικαλουµενων των επικαλουµενων γεννωσιν γεννωσιν διαµαρτυροµαι διαµαρτυροµαι ουν εγω Χριστου Ιησου του κυριου Ιησου Χριστου ηµερα ο δικαιος ηµερα ο δικαιος κριτης κριτης ασπασαι ασπασαι πολλοι και πολλοι και της περιτοµης περιτοµης φροντιζωσιν φροντιζουσιν καλα τα καλα

APPENDIX 6: ORTHOGRAPHIC DIFFERENCES Page Verse Codex I ΝΑ28 Orthography 3 1 Cor 11:19 δι δει 16 1 Cor 15:38 [ηθελη]σ̣ε̣ ηθελησεν 19 1 Cor 16:13 [γρηγορ]ειται γρηγορειτε 26 2 Cor 3:16 δ α̣ν̣ δε εαν 26 2 Cor 3:16 περιερ̣[ειται] περιαιρειται 28 2 Cor 4:16 ανακεν[ουται] ανακαινουται 39 2 Cor 9:15 επει επι 39 2 Cor 10:1 [ε]π̣ι̣εικιας επιεικειας 39 2 Cor 10:1 ταπι[νος] ταπεινος 40 2 Cor 10:10 [βα]ριαι βαρειαι 41 2 Cor 11:1 [ανειχεσ]̣θα ̣ ̣ι̣ ανειχεσθε 45 2 Cor 12:6 φιδοµαι φειδοµαι 50 Gal 1:13 ηκουσαται ηκουσατε 57 Gal 4:9 επιστρεφεται επιστρεφετε 58 Gal 4:21 λεγεται λεγετε 58 Gal 4:21 [α]κουεται ακουετε 59 Eph 2:16 α̣ποκτινας αποκτεινας 60 Eph 3:7 [ενερ]γιαν ενεργειαν 61 Eph 3:18 [εξισχυσ]ηται εξισχυσητε 64 Eph 4:28 χριαν χρειαν 64 Eph 4:30 [λυπει]ται λυπειτε 65 Eph 5:6 απιθιας απειθειας

APPENDICES 65 65 65 67 68 68 68 69 70 71 73 73 73 74 74 74 75 75 76 77 77 77 77 78 78 79 79 79 79 80 80 83 84 84 84 85 85 86 86 86 87 87 89

Eph 5:7 Eph 5:10 Eph 5:11 Eph 6:1 Eph 6:10 Eph 6:11 Eph 6:11 Eph 6:20 Title Phil 1:12 Phil 2:2 Phil 2:2 Phil 2:3 Phil 2:12 Phil 2:13 Phil 2:14 Phil 2:25 Phil 2:25 Phil 3:5 Phil 3:13 Phil 3:14 Phil 3:15 Phil 3:14 Phil 4:3 Phil 4:4 Phil 4:14 Phil 4:14 Phil 4:14 Phil 4:15 Title Col 1:2 Col 1:29 Col 2:7 Col 2:8 Col 2:8 Col 2:16 Col 2:16 Col 3:5 Col 3:6 Col 3:8 Col 3:15 Col 3:15 Col 4:12

γινεσθαι δοκει[µαζοντες] [συγκοινωνει]τ̣α̣ι̣ [υπακουετα]ι̣ κρατι ενδυσασθαι µεθοδιας δι φιλιππισιου̣ς̣ [γινωσ]κιν [φρονητα]ι̣ συν̣ψυχοι εριθια(ν) κατεργαζεσθαι ενεργιν ποιειται συνστρατιωτην λιτουργο(ν) βενιαµειν [επεκ]τ̣ι̣νοµενος βραβιον φρονηται δι[ωκων] κε χαιρεται εποιησαται συνκοινωνη[σαντ]ε̣ς̣ θλιψι οιδαται κολασσαεις κολασσαις ε̣νερ̣γι[αν] εδιδαχθηται εστε στοιχια µερι [ν]ο̣υµηνιας πορνιαν απιθειας [απο]θ̣εσθαι εκλη[θ]η̣ται γινεσθαι τ̣ελιοι

155 γινεσθε δοκιµαζοντες συγκοινωνειτε υπακουετε κρατει ενδυσασθε µεθοδειας δει φιλιππησιους γινωσκειν φρονητε συµψυχοι εριθειαν κατεργαζεσθε ενεργειν ποιειτε συστρατιωτην λειτουργον βενιαµιν επεκτεινοµενος βραβειον φρονειτε διωκω και χαιρετε εποιησατε συγκοινωνησαντες θλιψει οιδατε κολοσσαεις κολοσσαις ενεργειαν εδιδαχθητε εσται στοιχεια µερει νεοµηνιας πορνειαν απειθειας αποθεσθε εκληθητε γινεσθε τελειοι

156 90 92 92 93 93 94 96 96 97 99 100 102 103 103 104 108 110 110 110 111 111 112 113 114 115 115 115 115 117 117 117 118 118 118 118 119 120 121 122 123 123 124 124

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016) 1 Thess 1:2 1 Thess 2:7 1 Thess 2:8 1 Thess 2:14 1 Thess 2:16 1 Thess 3:3 1 Thess 4:9 1 Thess 4:9 1 Thess 4:17 1 Thess 5:24 2 Thess 1:3 2 Thess 2:6 2 Thess 2:15 2 Thess 2:15 2 Thess 3:9 Heb 2:14 Heb 3:14 Heb 3:15 Heb 3:15 Heb 4:6 Heb 4:6 Heb 4:13 Heb 5:7 Heb 6:1 Heb 6:11 Heb 6:12 Heb 6:12 Heb 6:13 Heb 7:8 Heb 7:9 Heb 7:9 Heb 7:18 Heb 7:18 Heb 7:19 Heb 7:19 Heb 7:28 Heb 8:8 Heb 9:1 Heb 9:9 Heb 9:16 Heb 9:18 Heb 9:26 Heb 9:26

µνιαν εµ οµιροµενοι επαθεται εθ̣νησιν σενεσθαι χριαν [γρα]φιν περιλιποµε[νοι] προσευχεσθαι οφιλοµεν οιδαται στηκεται ε[διδ]αχθηται µιµισθ̣α̣ι̣ επι βαιβεαν ακουσηται [σκλη]ρυνηται επι ε̣υη̣γγε̣λι̣[σθεντες] τετραχιλισµενα̣ ε̣ι̣σ̣χυ̣ ̣[ρας] τελιοτητα ενδικνυσθαι γενησθαι µιµητε ε̣παγ̣γι̣ λα[µενος] µαρτυροµενος δια̣ λ̣ευ̣ ̣ει̣ ̣ς̣ αθετησεις γεινεται ετελιωσεν κριττονος ασθενιαν επει (both instances) λατριας [τε]λιωσαι διατιθεµενου ενκεκενισται επι εδι

µνειαν εν οµειροµενοι επαθετε εθνεσιν σαινεσθαι χρειαν γραφειν περιλειποµενοι προσευχεσθε οφειλοµεν οιδατε στηκετε εδιδαχθητε µιµεισθαι επει βεβαιαν ακουσητε σκληρυνητε επει ευαγγελισθεντες τετραχηλισµενα ισχυρας τελειοτητα ενδεικνυσθαι γενησθε µιµηται επαγγειλαµενος µαρτυρουµενος δι λευι αθετησις γινεται ετελειωσεν κρειττονος ασθενειαν επι λατρειας τελειωσαι διαθεµενου εγκεκαινισται επει εδει

APPENDICES 124 124 124 125 128 128 128 128 129 130 130 131 131 131 132 133 133 134 134 134 134 134 135 135 135 136 137 138 138 138 139 140 142 143 143 143 144 144 144 145 146 146 146

Heb 9:26 Heb 9:26 Heb 9:26 Heb 10:6 Heb 10:36 Heb 10:36 Heb 10:36 Heb 10:38 Heb 11:7 Heb 11:13 Heb 11:13 Heb 11:22 Heb 11:23 Heb 11:23 Heb 11:32 Heb 11:40 Heb 11:40 Heb 12:7 Heb 12:7 Heb 12:8 Heb 12:8 Heb 12:8 Heb 12:16 Heb 12:17 Heb 12:17 Heb 12:26 Heb 13:7 Heb 13:16 Heb 13:17 Heb 13:18 Heb 13:24 1 Tim 1:2 1 Tim 1:20 1 Tim 2:10 1 Tim 2:10 1 Tim 2:12 1 Tim 3:7 1 Tim 3:7 1 Tim 3:8 1 Tim 4:2 1 Tim 4:11 1 Tim 4:12 1 Tim 4:12

πολλακεις νυν [συν]τελια ηυδοκησας εχεται χριαν κοµι̣σ̣[η]σθαι [υ]π̣οστιλητ[αι] [π]ιστι ειδοντες [ε]πει ενετιλατο πιστι αστιον επιλιψει κριττον τ̣ελιωθωσιν παιδιαν ϋποµενεται εσται παιδιας εσται απεδοτο ειστε µετεπιτα σισω̣ µιµισθαι ευαρεστιται πιθεσθαι πρ̣οσ ̣ ε̣υχ̣εσ̣θα ̣ ̣[ι] α̣σπασασθαι πιστι ϋµε̣νεος πρεπι θεοσεβιαν γυ[ν]αικει δι ονι̣δισµον αισχρ̣οε̣ ρδις κεκαυτηριασµενω(ν) µη̣δις πιστι αγνια

157 πολλακις νυνι συντελεια ευδοκησας εχετε χρειαν κοµισησθε υποστειληται πιστει ιδοντες επι ενετειλατο πιστει αστειον επιλειψει κρειττον τελειωθωσιν παιδειαν υποµενετε εστε παιδειας εστε απεδετο ιστε µετεπειτα σεισω µιµεισθε ευαρεστειται πειθεσθε προσευχεσθε ασπασασθε πιστει υµεναιος πρεπει θεοσεβειαν γυναικι δει ονειδισµον αισχροκερδεις κεκαυστηριασµενων µηδεις πιστει αγνεια

158 147 149 149 151 153 154 156 157 158 159 160 162

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016) 1 Tim 5:8 1 Tim 6:2 1 Tim 6:2 1 Tim 6:17 2 Tim 1:10 2 Tim 2:2 2 Tim 2:24 2 Tim 3:6 2 Tim 3:16 2 Tim 4:8 2 Tim 4:19 Titus 1:11

οικιων εχοντας καταφρονιτωσαν επει επιφανιας εικανοι δι ποικειλαις παιδιαν επιφανιαν ασπασασθ̣ε̣ δι

οικειων εχοντες καταφρονειτωσαν επι επιφανειας ικανοι δει ποικιλαις παιδειαν επιφανειαν ασπασαι δει

PLATES

160

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016)

PLATES

161

162

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016)

PLATES

163

164

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016)

PLATES

165

166

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016)

136

BIBLIOGRAPHY Aland, Barbara, Kurt Aland, Johannes Karavidopoulos, Carlo M. Martini, and Bruce M. Metzger, eds. The Greek New Testament. United Bible Societies. Fifth revised edition. Stuttgart: Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft, 2014. Aland, Kurt, and Barbara Aland. The Text of the New Testament. Translated by Erroll F. Rhodes. Second edition. Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1989. Aland, Kurt. Kurzgefasste Liste der griechischen Handschriften des Neuen Testaments. Zweite neubearbeitete und erganzte Auflage. Berlin, New York: de Gruyter, 1994. (= Arbeiten zur Neutestamentlichen Textforschung 1). Alexander, Patrick H. et al. eds. The SBL Handbook of Style. Peabody, Massachusetts: Hendrickson, 1999. Bagnall, Roger S. Digital Imaging of Papyri: A Report to the Commission on Preservation and Access. Washington, DC: The Commission on Preservation and Access, 1995. ———. Reading Papyri, Writing Ancient History. New York: Routledge, 1995. Bay, Stephen, Roger Macfarlane, Thomas A. Wayment, and Gregory Bearman. “Multi-Spectral Imaging vs. Monospectral Infrared Imaging.” Zeitschrift für Papyrologie und Epigraphik 173 (2010): 211–217. ———. “Exploring the Limitations and Advantages of Multi-Spectral Imaging in Papyrology: Darkened, Carbonized, and Palimpsest Papyri.” Pages 87–97 in Digital Imaging of Ancient Textual Heritage: Technological Challenges and Solutions. Proceedings of the Εἰκονονοποιὶα Conference 28–29 October 2010, Helsinki Finland. Edited by Vesa Vahtikari, Mika Hakkarainen, and Antti Nurminen. Commentationes Humanarum Litterarum 129. Ekena: Societas Scieniarum Fennica, 2011.

168

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016)

Blass, Friedrich, and A. Debrunner. A Greek Grammar of the New Testament and Other Early Christian Literature. Translated and edited by Robert W. Funk. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1961. Brown, Michelle P., ed. In the Beginning: Bibles Before the Year 1000. Washington DC: Smithsonian, 2006. Cavallo, Guglielmo. Ricerche sulla maiuscola biblica. Studi e testi di papirologia 2. Florence: Le Monnier, 1967. Cavallo, Guglielmo, and H. Maehler. Greek Bookhands of the Early Byzantine Period, A.D. 300-800. Bulletin of the Institute of Classical Studies Supplement 47. London: University of London, 1987. Clark, Kenneth W. A Descriptive Catalogue of Greek New Testament Manuscripts in America. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1937. Clarke, Kent D. “Paleography and Philanthropy: Charles Lang Freer and His Acquisition of the ‘Freer Biblical Manuscripts.’” Pages 17–73 in The Freer Biblical Manuscripts: Fresh Studies of an American Treasure Trove. Edited by Larry W. Hurtado. SBL Text Critical Studies 6; Atlanta: Society of Biblical Literature, 2006. Colwell, Ernest C. “Method in Evaluating Scribal Habits: A Study of P45, P66, P75.” Pages 106–24 in Studies in Methodology in Textual Criticism of the New Testament. Leiden: Brill, 1969. ———. “Method in Locating a Newly-Discovered Manuscript within the Manuscript Tradition of the Greek New Testament.” Studia Evangelica 1 (1959): 757–77. ———. Studies in Methodology in Textual Criticism of the New Testament. Leiden: Brill, 1969. Comfort, Philip W. Encountering the Manuscripts: An Introduction to New Testament Paleography and Textual Criticism. Nashville: Broadman & Holman, 2005. Comfort, Philip W. and David P. Barrett. The Text of the Earliest New Testament Greek Manuscripts. Wheaton: Tyndale House, 2001. Ehrman, Bart D. and Michael W. Holmes, eds. The Text of the New Testament in Contemporary Research: Essays on the Status Quaestionis. Studies and Documents 46. Second edtion. Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2012.

BIBLIOGRAPHY

169

Elliott, J.K. A Bibliography of Greek New Testament Manuscripts. Society for New Testament Studies Monograph Series 109. Third edition. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2000. Epp, Eldon J. “The Claremont Profile Method for Grouping New Testament Minuscule Manuscripts.” Pages 211–20 in Studies in the Theory and Method of New Testament Textual Criticism. Edited by Eldon J. Epp and Gordon D. Fee. Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1993. Epp, Eldon J. and Gordon D. Fee, eds. Studies in the Theory and Method of New Testament Textual Criticism. Studies and Documents 25. Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1993. Fee, Gordon D. “Codex Sinaiticus in the Gospel of John: A Contribution to Methodology in Establishing Textual Relationships.” Pages 221–43 in Studies in the Theory and Method of New Testament Textual Criticism. Edited by Eldon J. Epp and Gordon D. Fee; Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1993. ———. “On the Types, Classification, and Presentation of Textual Variation.” Pages 62–79 in Studies in the Theory and Method of New Testament Textual Criticism. Edited by Eldon J. Epp and Gordon D. Fee. Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1993. Finney, Timothy J. “Manuscript Markup.” Pages 263–287 in The Freer Biblical Manuscripts: Fresh Studies of an American Treasure Trove. Edited by Larry W. Hurtado. SBL Text Critical Studies 6; Atlanta: Society of Biblical Literature, 2006. ———. “The Ancient Witnesses of the Epistle to the Hebrews.” Ph.D. dissertation. Murdoch University, Western Australia, 1999. Online: http://purl.org/tfinney/PhD/. Freer, Charles Lang. Charles Lang Freer Papers, Freer Gallery of Art and Arthur M. Sackler Gallery Archives, Smithsonian Institution, Washington, D.C. Gift of the Estate of Charles Lang Freer. Abbreviated as CLFP. Goodspeed, Edgar J. “Notes on the Freer Gospels.” American Journal of Theology 13 (1909): 597–603. Greenlee, J. Harold. Introduction to New Testament Textual Criticism. Second edition. Peabody, Massachusetts, Hendrickson, 1995. Gregory, Caspar R. Das Freer Logion, Versuche und Entwurfe. Leipzig: Hinrich, 1905.

170

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016)

Groningen, Bernhard Abraham van. Short Manual of Greek Palaeography. Leiden: A. W. Sijthoff, 1940. Haelst, Joseph van. Catalogue des papyrus litteraires juifs et chrétiens. Paris: Sorbonne, 1976. Haines-Eitzen, Kim. Guardians of Letters: Literacy, Power, and the Trasmitters of Early Christian Literature. New York: Oxford University Press, 2000. Hatch, William H.P. The Principal Uncial Manuscripts of the New Testament. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1939. Hurtado, Larry W. Introduction to The Freer Biblical Manuscripts: Fresh Studies of an American Treasure Trove. Edited by Larry W. Hurtado. Text-Critical Studies 6. Atlanta: Society of Biblical Literature, 2006. ———. Lord Jesus Christ: Devotion to Jesus in Earliest Christianity. Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2003. ———. The Earliest Christian Artifacts: Manuscripts and Christian Origins. Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 2006. ———., ed. The Freer Biblical Manuscripts: Fresh Studies of an American Treasure Trove. Text-Critical Studies 6. Atlanta: Society of Biblical Literature, 2006. Kenyon, Frederic G. The Palaeography of Greek Papyri. Oxford, Clarendon Press, 1899. Lagrange, Marie-Joseph. Critique textuelle: La critique rationnelle. Paris: Gabalda, 1935. Leuven Database of Ancient Books. Metzger, Bruce M. A Textual Commentary on the Greek New Testament. Second edition. London and New York: United Bible Societies, 1994. ———. Manuscripts of the Greek Bible: An Introduction to Greek Palaeography. Corrected edition. New York: Oxford University Press, 1991 (1981). ———. The Canon of the New Testament: Its Origin, Development, and Significance. Oxford, Clarendon, 1987. Metzger, Bruce M. and Bart D. Ehrman. The Text of the New Testament: Its Transmission, Corruption, and Restoration. Fourth edition. New York: Oxford, 2005.

BIBLIOGRAPHY

171

New Orleans Baptist Theological Seminary. The Center for New Testament Textual Studies New Testament Critical Apparatus (2004). Bibleworks 9.0.12.512 (Bibleworks, 2013). Nongbri, Brent. God’s Library: The Archaeology of the Earliest Christian Manuscripts. New Haven and London: Yale University Press, 2018. Roberts, Colin H. Greek Literary Hands: 350 B.C. – A.D. 400. Oxford, Clarendon Press, 1956. ———. Manuscript, Society and Belief in Early Christian Egypt: The Schweich Lectures of the British Academy 1977. London: Published for the British Academy by the Oxford University Press, 1979. Roberts, Colin H. and T.C. Skeat. The Birth of the Codex. Oxford: Oxford University Press. 1983. Royse, James R. Scribal Habits in Early Greek New Testament Papyri. New Testament Tools, Studies and Documents 36. Leiden: Brill, 2009. Salih, Abu. The Churches and Monasteries of Egypt and Some Neighboring Countries. Translated by B.T. A. Evetts and A. J. Butler. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1895. Sanders, Henry A. “Age and Ancient Home of Biblical Manuscripts in the Freer Collection.” American Journal of Archaeology 13/2 (1909): 130–41. ———. “Four Newly Discovered Biblical Manuscripts.” The Biblical World 31/2 (1908): 82, 138–42. ———. “New Manuscripts of the Bible from Egypt.” American Journal of Archaeology 12/1 (1908): 49–55. ———. The New Testament Manuscripts in the Freer Collection, Part I: The Washington Manuscript of the Four Gospels. University of Michigan Studies, Humanistic Series 9/1. New York: Macmillan, 1912. ———. The New Testament Manuscripts in the Freer Collection Part II: The Washington Manuscript of the Epistles of Paul. University of Michigan Studies, Humanistic Series 9/2. New York: Macmillan, 1918. ———. The Old Testament Manuscripts in the Freer Collection Part I: The Washington Manuscript of Deuteronomy and Joshua. University of Michigan Studies, Humanistic Series 8/1. New York: Macmillan, 1910.

172

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016)

———. The Old Testament Manuscripts in the Freer Collection Part II: The Washington Manuscript of the Psalms. University of Michigan Studies, Humanistic Series 8/2. New York: Macmillan, 1917. ———. “Proceedings of the Thirty-Ninth Annual Meeting of the American Philological Association Held at Chicago, Illinois, December, 1907.” Transactions and Proceedings of the American Philological Association 38 (1907): xxii. Schefzyk, Jürgen, ed. Alles Echt. Älteste Belege zur Bibel aus Ägypten. Mainz am Rhein, Zabern, 2006. Schubart, Wilhelm. Papyri Graecae Berolinenses. Bonn: A. Marcvs et E. Weber, 1911. Seider, Richard. Palaographie der Greichischen Papyri. Three volumes. Stuttgart: Hiersemann, 1967-70. Smyth, Herbert W. Greek Grammar. Revised by Gordon M. Messing. Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 1963. Tischendorf, Constantine von. Novum Testamentum Graece, Editio octava maior. Two volumes. Leipzig: Giesecke & Devrient, 1869– 72. Turner, Eric G. Greek Manuscripts of the Ancient World. Second edition, revised and enlarged by P.J. Parsons. London: Institute of Classical Studies, 1987. ———. The Typology of the Early Codex. Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press, 1977. Wallace, Daniel B. Greek Grammar Beyond the Basics: An Exegetical Syntax of the New Testament. Grand Rapids: Zondervan, 1996. Wayment, Thomas A. “The Scribal Characteristics of the Freer Pauline Codex.” Pages 251-262 in The Freer Biblical Manuscripts: Fresh Studies of an American Treasure Trove. Edited by Larry W. Hurtado. SBL Text Critical Studies 6; Atlanta: Society of Biblical Literature, 2006. ———. “Two New Textual Variants from the Freer Pauline Codex (I).” Journal of Biblical Literature 123/4 (Winter, 2004): 737–40. Westcott, B.F. and F.J.A. Hort. The New Testament in the Original Greek. New York: Harper & Brothers, 1881.

SUBJECT INDEX Akmim (Panopolis), 20 Ali Arabi, 1, 20–21

Codex Washingtonensis, 6 Coptic Psalter, 20

Biblical Majuscule, 9

Dimai/Medinet Dimay, 20–21

Codex Alexandrinus, 10 Codex Ephraemi Rescriptus, 9 Codex I (016) contents, 5–6 date, 8–11 diacritical marks, 16–17 ekthesis, 10–11, 14, 19, 140 harmonization, 30–31 layout, 24–25 nomina sacra, 15, 143 omissions, 29–30 orthography, 26 paleography, 9–10 paragraphoi, 14, 16, 19 physical condition, 1, 3, 6, 23–24, 37–38, 131 provenance, 20–21 punctuation, 19–20 quires, 4–6 scribal features, 11–15 scribe, 11–12 textual affiliation, 35–37, 132 titles, 11, 18–19 Codex Nitrius, 9 Codex Rossanensis, 9

Freer Art Collection, 2 Freer, Charles Lang, 1–2, 20–22 Haggi, 20–21 Kelsey, Francis W., 3, 21–22 Monastery of the Vinedresser, 23 Multispectral Imaging, 3, 3n9, 4n10, 38n110, 40–41 Notable textual variants, 149 2 Corinthians 8:6, 30 Ephesians 4:18, 34 Ephesians 5:22, 27–28 Philippians 2:2, 28–30 Philippians 2:3, 32 Colossians 2:16, 30 Colossians 2:17–18, 29 Colossians 4:12, 32 1 Thessalonians 2:15, 29 2 Thessalonians 3:8, 34 1 Timothy 5:8, 33 1 Timothy 5:17, 33 2 Timothy 4:8, 29 Hebrews 9:11, 31

174

A NEW EDITION OF CODEX I (016) Hebrews 7:27–28, 33 Hebrews 10:17, 33 Hebrews 11:13, 31

Sanders, Henry A., 3, 21–22, 39 Smithsonian, 2, 4 White Monastery, 20

AUTHOR INDEX

Barrett, D. P., 38n110 Bay, S., 4n10 Brown, M. P., 3n7

Maehler, H., 9 Metzger, B. M., 9n25, 10, 11, 15n39, 28, 31, 34, 81, 100

Cavallo, G., 9 Clarke, K. D., 2nn4–5, 20–23 Colwell, E. C., 26, 30n90, 37n106 Comfort, P. W., 38n110

Nongbri, B., 21

Ehrman, B. D., 100 Elliott, J. K., 3n7

Royse, J. R., 26n78 Sanders, H. A., 1, 3, 5–6, 8, 12–13, 16, 19, 23–25, 32, 35–36, 38–39 Turner, E. G., 25n75

Fee, G. D., 37n106 Goodspeed, E. J., 23n65 Gregory, C. R., 8n21, 23n65 Hort, F. J. A., 30n92, 36 Hurtado, L. W., viii, 1n3, 3n6, 15n39

von Soden, H. F., 8n21 von Tischendorf , C., 34n99 Wayment, T. A., 11n29, 24n72, 26n76–77 and 80, 33, 43, 53, 69, 75, 82, 95, 98 Westcott, B. F., 30n92, 36